Home

ZOOM HD8IHD16 Manual

1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM MASTER Tracks 1 8 Drum Bass track p HINT e t is possible to play the master tracks of several projects recorded on the hard disk in succession p 165 The data recorded on all tracks including the master track are saved as mono WAV files 2 mono WAV files for stereo tracks To save data as a stereo WAV file special steps are necessary gt p 43 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Master track mixdown steps Here s how to mix recorder tracks and the rhythm section sound onto two stereo channels and record these on the master track 1 if required refer to page 36 and select the desired V take for the master track 2 From the main screen press the MASTER status key repeatedly until the key is lit in red The master track is now ready for recording 3 Start recorder playback and adjust the mixing balance of the various tracks The individual track level settings as well as the insert effect and send return effect settings all have an influence on the signal that is sent to the master track Adjust levels while watching the L R level meter and make sure that no signal clipping occurs 4 To carry out the mixdown operation press the ZERO M4 key to return to the beginning of the song and then press the PLAY gt key while holding down the REC 0 key Recording on the master t
2. GI Recorder section Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 MASTER OUTPUT From immediately Tracks 13 14 4 after MASTER fader Tracks 15 16 4 LT Master track 4 To master MASTER fader EE track Drum kit ITT TTT Rhythm section 1 From master track ZOOM HD8 HD16 Getting to Know the HD8 HD16 GLE Recorder section Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 8 From immediately after MASTER fader Master track To immediately before MASTER fader Bass programs Drum kit Rhythm section Track mixer MASTER OUTPUT To master track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM MASTER From master track Recorder The recorder section of the HD8 has eight audio tracks six mono tracks and one stereo track Up to two tracks can be recorded simultaneously and up to eight tracks can be played back simultaneously The recorder section of the HD16 has sixteen audio tracks eight mono tracks and four stereo tracks Up to eight tracks can be recorded simultaneously and up to sixteen tracks can be played back simultaneously A track is a separate section fo
3. No Name Comment Recommended L R input 0 Vo Vo 1 For duets Vocals 1 Vo Vo 2 Chorus for main vocal Vocals 2 Vo Vo 3 For harmony Vocals 3 AG Vo 1 Creates a street like character Acoustic guitar Vocal 4 AG Vo 2 Different from AG Vo in vocal character Acoustic guitar Vocal 5 AG Vo 3 Aggressively modifies vocal character Acoustic guitar Vocal 6 ShortDLY Short delay sound with effective doubling Microphones 7 FatDrum For drum recording with single point stereo mic Microphones 8 BothTone Tuned for male on L channel and female on R channel Vocals 9 Condnser Simulates condenser mic sound with dynamic mic input Vocals 10 DuoAtack Chorus for lead vocals with emphasized attack Vocals 11 Warmth Warm sound with prominent midrange Vocals 12 AM Radio Simulates AM monaural radio Vocals 13 Pavilion Narration sound at expo booths Vocals 14 TV News TV newscaster sound Vocals 15 F Vo Pf1 For female vocal piano ballads Vocal Piano 16 JazzDuo1 Simulates jazz session LP with lo fi sound Vocal Piano 17 Cntmprry All round clear sound Vocal Piano 18 JazzDuo2 JazzDuo 1 for male vocal Vocal Piano 19 Ensemble For guitar with strong attack and mellow piano Acoustic guitar Piano 20 Enhanced Enhances clear strong outline for ballads Acoustic guitar Vocal 21 Warmy Moderates overbright ambience Acoustic guitar Vocal 22 Strum Vo Smooth fat sound with midrange compensation Acoustic guitar Vocal 23 FatPlu
4. 3 Use the cursor up down keys to select the For a list of available parameters for tracks inputs see the table track parameter you want to adjust below Mono tracks 1 6 HD8 1 8 HD16 Track parameter list Stereo tracks 7 8 HD8 9 10 15 16 HD16 Mono Stereo Master Drum Parameter Displa Setting range Description Input SES vedi p track track track bass track Adjusts high frequency boost or cut in EQ HI GAIN the range from 12 to 12 dB This S Ru parameter is only shown when HI EQ 9 is on EQ HI 500 Hz 18 Adjusts turnover frequency for high FREQUENCY kHz frequency boost cut This parameter is O 9 only shown when HI EQ is on Adjusts mid frequency boost or cut in EQ MID GAIN the range from 12 to 12 dB This 9 parameter is only shown when MID 9 9 Q EQ is on EQ MID 40 Hz 18 Adjusts turnover frequency for mid FREQUENCY s kHz frequency boost cut This parameter is only shown when MID EQ is on EQ MID Q Adjusts the Q value bandwidth for FACTOR 9 0 1 1 0 mid frequency EQ This parameter is only shown when MID EQ is Adjusts low frequency boost or cut in EQ LOW the range from 12 to 12 dB This GAIN S parameter is only shown when LOW 2 9 EQ is on EQ LOW 40 Hz 1 6 Adjusts turnover frequency for low FREQUENCY E kHz frequency boost cut This
5. 100 Copying a rhythm 100 Deleting a rhythm 101 Creating a rhythm 101 Selecting a rhythm 0 101 Entering pattern information using step input 102 Using FAST for pattern information input 104 Entering chord 105 Entering other 1 107 Playing a rhythm 6 0 108 Editing a rhythm 0 108 Copying a specified range of measures 108 Transposing the entire rhythm song 109 Copying a rhythm 0 109 Deleting the rhythm 50 0 110 Assigning a name to a rhythm 110 Importing a rhythm pattern rhythm song from another project cei eles ee RR E LER 111 Using Kit Files rS 112 Creating a kit 112 Assigning samples to pads 112 Making pad parameter settings 1138 Copying a kit file leen 114 Deleting 115 Importing kit file from another project 115 Assigning a name to a kit file 116 Using 117 Making various sample 0
6. e i Dee ZANTROL SURFACE lt e If the formula does not fit on two lines the indication scrolls by one character each If you use the cursor left right keys to move the input position the line scrolls left and right accordingly The formula entered with FAST input is saved as part of a project By calling up the formula later you can edit it or use it to rewrite the song NOTE The FAST method can only write a song in one go from beginning to end Entering rhythm patterns partly into the song ZOOM HD8 HD16 is not possible f you wish to edit a rhythm song that was written with this method edit the formula and then write the entire song again or use step input 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm section switches to rhythm song mode and the rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Press the EDIT key The rhythm song edit menu appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication FAST on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key FAST input is now possible 4 Use the keys and pads of the rhythm section to enter the formula for creating the rhythm song Formula input principles are explained on page 104 CA 1 eed aZ If you make a mistake during input correct it as follow
7. 39 Playing back the same passage repeatedly repeat 39 Finding a desired location scrub preview function 40 Using 40 Changing the scrub direction and duration 40 Re recording only a specified region punch in out function 41 Using manual punch in out 41 Using auto 41 Recording several tracks on a master track mixdown 42 About the 42 Master track mixdown steps 43 Playing the master 43 Converting the master track to a stereo WAV file 43 Combining multiple tracks on one or two tracks bounce 44 Making bounce 05 44 Executing bounce recording 45 Recording the drum bass track sound on an audio track rhythm 45 Selecting drum bass track as recording source 45 Recordirigi ooo red nee Shas certae 46 Recording on 8 tracks simultaneously 8 track recording mode lt lt HD16 only gt gt 46 About 8 track 46 Assigning an input signal to
8. 21 Let s Record kel cee Meee Bae ae 22 Quick TQUE Ss 23 Step 1 Preparations 23 1 1 Creating a new 23 1 2 Selecting the rhythm pattern to 24 Step 2 Recording the first 25 2 1 Adjusting input 5 25 2 2 Applying the insert 26 2 3 Selecting a track and recording 28 Step 3 Overdubbing 29 3 1 Making settings for input sensitivity and insert effect 29 3 2 Selecting a track and recording 29 Step 4 30 4 1 Turning off the input and rhythm section 30 4 2 Adjusting volume panning 30 4 3 Applying the send return effect 32 4 4 Applying the insert effect to 1 33 Step Mixdown 34 5 1 Using the mastering insert 34 5 2 Mixdown on the master 35 tes ut ees do e cune 36 About V takes ren nn 36 Switching 36 Changing the V take 36 Moving to a desired point in the song locate
9. Kick Drum2 Kick Drum1 Side Stick Snare Drum1 Hand Clap Snare Drum2 Low Tom2 Closed Hi Hat Low Tom1 Pedal Hi Hat Mid Tom2 Open Hi Hat Mid Tom1 High Tom2 Crash Cymbal1 Hi Tom1 Ride Cymbal1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal2 High Bongo Low Bongo Mute High Conga Open High Conga Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas ZOOM HD8 HD16 205 Appendix z o Comments Ry 01 1A Drum loop 1 Ry 01 1B Drum loop 2 Ry 01 1C Drum fill 1 Ry 01 1D Drum variation 1 Ry 01 1E Drum fill 2 Ry 01 1F Drum variation 2 Ry 01 1G Drum end Ry 01 2A Drum intro Ry 01 2B Drum loop 1 Ry 01 2C Drum loop 2 Ry 01 2D Drum break Ry 01 2E Drum variation 1 Ry 01 2F Drum fill Ry 01 2G Drum variation 2 Ry 02 1A Drum loop 1 Ry 02 1B Drum loop 2 Ry 03 1A Drum loop 1 Ry 03 1B Drum loop 2 Breakbeats Ry 03 1C Drum loop 3 Ry 03 1D Drum loop 4 Ry 03 1E Drum loop 5 Ry 04 1A Percussion loop 1 Ry 04 1B Percussion loop 2 Ry 04 1C Percussion loop 3 Ry 04 1D Percussion loop 4 Ry 04 2A Percussion loop 1 Ry 04 2B Percussion loop 2 Ry 04 2C Percussion loop 3 Ry 04 2D Percussion loop 4 Ry 04 3A Percussion loop 1 Ry 04 3B Percussion loop 2 Ry 05 1A Asian percussion loop 1 1 Ry 05 1B Asian percussion loop
10. 4 6 JAZZ02 INTROO8 5 POPO7 4 2203 INTROO9 6 POP08 DANCO5 JAZZ04 INTRO10 7 POPO9 DANCO6 2205 INTRO11 10 HOUSO1 JAZZ06 INTRO12 ROCK09 POP11 0502 2207 INTRO13 ROCK10 POP12 HOUSOS SHFLO1 INTRO14 ROCK11 RnBo1 HOUS04 SHFLO2 INTRO15 ROCK12 RnBo2 1 SHFLOS INTRO16 ROCK13 RnBOS 2 SHFLO4 INTRO17 ROCK14 RnB04 SHFLO5 INTRO18 ROCK15 RnB05 TECH04 SKAO1 ENDINGO1 ROCK16 RnB06 05 SKA02 ENDINGO2 ROCK17 RnB07 TECHO06 ENDINGO3 ROCK18 RnB08 07 SKA04 ENDINGO4 ROCK19 RnBog TECHO08 REGGO1 ENDINGO5 ROCK20 RnB10 09 602 ENDINGO6 ROCK21 FUNKO1 TECH10 REGGO3 ENDINGO7 ROCK22 FUNKO2 DnBO1 REGG04 COUNT ROCK23 FUNKOS3 DnB02 AFROO1 AllMute PENES ROCK24 FUNK04 DnB03 AFRO02 ROCK25 FUNKO5 DnB04 AFRO03 EMPTY ROCK26 FUNKO6 DnB05 AFRO04 METRO34 ROCK27 FUNKO7 DnBO06 05 28 FUNKO8 TRIPO1 AFROO6 HRKO1 FUN
11. From master track 2 From the main screen press the ON OFF key of the input to which the instrument or microphone is connected so that the key is lit in red Input selection is performed with the ON OFF keys in the input section If you press an ON OFF key while another key is already lit the previous key goes out and the new key lights up While the key is lit the input is active Normally up to two keys can be activated simultaneously To activate two inputs hold down one ON OFF key and then press the other key 77 Reference Mixer GI 1I3 only gt gt It is also possible to press two separate ON OFF keys together HINT lt lt GEID gt gt When the BTRACK RECORDING key is activated the 8 track recording mode becomes active and up to eight inputs can be used simultaneously Each input can then be switched on or off individually 3 While playing your instrument turn the GAIN control for the input selected in step 2 to adjust the input sensitivity Make adjustments so that the PEAK indicator flickers slightly when you play your instrument at its loudest volume 4 While playing your instrument adjust the recording level by turning the REC LEVEL control The REC LEVEL control adjusts the signal level before it is sent to the recording track 1 after it has passed through the insert effect if the insert effect is used The CLIP indicator will light if t
12. 2 MASTER To perform overdubbing on a mono track after you have recorded tracks 1 8 you must move the recorded takes to tracks 9 16 first p 62 Assigning an input signal to a track After adjusting the level of the signals from the INPUT jacks 1 8 the signals are sent to tracks 1 8 in the recorder section 1 Verify that the instruments or microphones to be recorded are connected to the INPUT jacks 1 8 2 Press the BTRACK RECORDING key in the input section The key lights up and the unit switches to 8 track recording mode 3 Press the ON OFF keys for the INPUT jacks 1 8 When pressed a key lights up and the corresponding input is active 4 While the instruments are played adjust the respective GAIN controls to obtain a suitable input sensitivity level 5 To use an insert effect press the INPUT SOURCE key in the control section and press the ON OFF key for the input to which you want to apply the effect The respective ON OFF key lights up orange and the insert effect is applied When 8 x COMP EQ is selected as algorithm for the insert effect all channels can be processed by the effect Otherwise two selected channels can be effect processed ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Recorder 6 while the instruments are played use the REC LEVEL control to adjust the recording level Set the recordi
13. 87 Drum sequence real time input 93 Drum sequence step input 96 Entering chord information 98 Selecting a rhythm pattern 88 Rhythm pattern list 198 Rhythm pattern mode 88 Rhythm recording function 45 Rhythm section Changing the metronome volume 125 Changing the pad sensitivity 125 Checking the remaining memory 125 Presco nt ep RE aa 124 Swapping left right pan position 125 Rhythm song 11 88 101 Assigning name 110 ese esee s tg a 109 Copying a specified range of measures a A En 108 Delete que Sene ad estates 110 Entering chord information 105 FAST input ences nla tack Range 104 Playa iso eoe Ode redd 108 Step 102 Transposing a rhythm song 109 Rhythm song mode 88 Right side panel 15 81942 ELE 102 as 117 ASSIgIr cuire 112 Copy ade Sew hee weed 119 Del t aei i r ear dn 120 Sample 121 S le 2 rA 55 Scan 172 Scene 84 9 6 169 Scrub review 40 Send return effect 11 32 126 134 Edit
14. REPEAT STEP key Pads 0 9 Serve to enter the phrase number and repetition count Hl The basic rules for creating a rhythm pattern sequence are as follows Line up patterns Use the symbol to line up rhythm patterns For example entering 0 1 2 will result in the following rhythm pattern play sequence PATTERN 0 PATTERN 1 PATTERN 2 Repeat patterns Use the x symbol to specify pattern repetitions x takes precedence over For example entering 0 1 2 2 will result in the following rhythm pattern play sequence PATTERN 0 PATTERN 1 PATTERN 1 PATTERN 2 Repeat multiple patterns Use the and symbols to link a group of patterns for repetition Formulas enclosed in brackets take precedence over other formulas For example entering O 1 2 x 2 3 will result in the following rhythm pattern play 104 sequence PATTERN 0 PATTERN 1 PATTERN 2 PATTERN 1 An example for creating the rhythm pattern sequence 0 1 X4 2 is shown below Press E three times 0 mN 7 REPEAT STEP lt 0 e e CERT Ley Press twice i Lem lt four times e we Press once Loeb Q SERT EFFECT 1 Dx Press twice LH nfe 1
15. 12 Input section HD16 13 Input sensitivity 25 Insert effect 11 26 126 Applying effects to 8 inputs HD16 only Set dhe ewe ok ba Mame bares 128 Changing a patch 132 Editing 130 Inserting effects before track output MASTER 129 Inserting effects into input path 128 er ade eee ota de 127 Selecting a 129 Storing swapping patches 132 ee pena WERE 55 Kitties 112 Assigning 116 Copying a kit 114 Deleting a kit 115 Level meter display mode 170 Locate 39 Major a I RR 56 Manual punch in out 41 Marker function 47 Deleting 48 Dividing 142 Moving a mark 48 Setting a mark 47 Mass storage mode 161 164 Master track 10 42 Converting to stereo WAV 43 Mastering 34 Meter display section HD8 12 Meter display section HD16 13 Metronome Changing the volume 125 154 Basic 155
16. 1 1 4 5 RHYTHM MASTER Operation Manual ZOOM Corporation Reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is prohibited USAGE AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS In this manual symbols are used to highlight warnings and cautions for you to read so that accidents can be prevented The meanings of these symbols are as follows This symbol indicates explanations about Warning extremely dangerous matters If users ignore this symbol and handle the device the wrong way serious injury or death could result AN This symbol indicates explanations about Caution dangerous matters If users ignore this symbol and handle the device the wrong way bodily injury and damage to the equipment could result Please observe the following safety tips and precautions to ensure hazard free use of the HD8 HD106 Power requirements The HD8 HD106 is powered by the supplied Waming adapter To prevent malfunction and safety hazards do not use any other kind of AC adapter When using the HD8 HD16 in an area with a different line voltage please consult your local ZOOM distributor about acquiring a proper AC adapter About grounding Depending on installation conditions a slight electrical Warning charge may be felt when touching metal part of the HD8 HD 16 If you wish to avoid this ground the unit by connecting the ground screw on the rear panel to a good external gro
17. Folder name HINT For information on the folder structure of the HD8 HD16 see page 208 To use a sample imported from an external source select the folder OUSER under the SAMPLER folder in the root directory of the hard disk 120 4 Turn the dial to select the folder which contains the sample file to delete and press the ENTER key Sample files included in the selected folder are listed Sample name 5 Turn the dial to select the sample to delete and press the FUNCTION key The display indication changes as follows letting you check the sample to delete 6 Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows L belete 7 To execute the delete process press the ENTER key once more When the delete operation is completed the screen selection screen returns By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time ZOOM HD8 HD16 Importing a sample from an external source In the factory default condition an array of samples is present in HD8 HD16 for use by the drum kits To expand your choices it is also possible to import parts of an audio track or an audio file contained on a CD ROM disc or similar Once these have been saved in a special area on the internal hard disk of the HD8 HD 16 called the sample pool they can be used as samples in the same way
18. ZOOM HD8 HD16 6 Use the cursor left right keys to cause the counter indication to flash Then use the dial to specify the start point for pitch compensation You can also use the MARKER l 4 gt gt I keys ZERO M4 key REW 44 gt gt keys to locate the point By pressing the PLAY P gt key at this point you can check out the editing result 7 e To start pitch compensation hold down the REC 9 key and press the PLAY gt key Recording starts with the pitch compensation applied If you have selected Bass Seq in step 2 you can check the bass track signal level at the RHYTHM position on the level meter By using the cursor left right keys during recording you can call up and edit the Key Scale and Speed parameters If you press the SHIFT key the pitch compensation effect is bypassed This will also be reflected in the recording HINT The manual and automatic punch in punch out functions gt p 41 can also be used at this point 8 When recording has progressed to the point where you want pitch compensation to stop press the STOP W key The indication Fix appears on the second line of the display 9 To carry out pitch compensation press the ENTER key The audio data of the specified range are overwritten and the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at
19. ad ee has 157 Song position pointer 156 Start Stop Continue 156 Timing 156 MIDI 155 MIDI implementation chart 209 MIDI 154 MIDI note number chart 205 MIDI OUT 154 MihOr 21 eel eke 56 34 Mixdown function 42 ZOOM HD8 HD16 11 76 Assigning an input signal to a 77 Input TEXOF cose cns x PRSE x enn 76 Linking two tracks 82 Scene 84 Solo 83 Track 76 Move Moving 62 Moving 52 Moving V takes of tracks 1 8 to tracks 9 16 16 62 HO 41 Output section HD8 12 Output section HD16 13 Overdubbing 29 Pad section 14 Pads Assigning 112 Changing sensitivity 125 Making settings 113 MIDI note number table 205 Parameter knobs 81 Patch Insert 127 Send return
20. 62 Exchanging V takes 63 Importing audio data to a V take 63 Track capture and 65 Capturing a track 65 Swapping a track 66 Reference Phrase Looping 67 Which kind of phrases can be used 67 Loading a phrase 68 Basic phrase loading 68 Importing a phrase from the current project 68 Importing a phrase from a different project 69 Importing a WAV AIFF 70 Adjusting phrase parameters 70 Copying a 71 Deleting a 72 Writing a phrase loop to a track 73 Using FAST input for the phrase 73 Writing a phrase loop to 1 74 Reference 76 About the mixer of the HD8 HD16 76 Assigning input signals to recording tracks 77 Adjusting the signal for each track track 79 Adjusting a track parameter 79 Using the parameter 81 Linking two tracks stereo link 82 lt lt HD16 gt gt Assigning an input track signal to the SUB OUT jack i
21. 1 On the main screen verify that the ON OFF key for the desired input is lit in red Then press the INPUT SOURCE key in the control section The current insert position is shown on the display 2 Verify that Input is selected If another position is selected turn the dial to select Input You can also make the selection by pressing an ON OFF key in the input section When the input is selected as insert position all ON OFF keys are lit in orange In this condition the effect will apply to one or two inputs as selected in step 1 NOTE lt lt CEID only If the 8 track recording function is inactive you cannot select Input as insert position even when the 8x COMP EQ algorithm was selected 3 Press the EXIT key to return to the main screen lt lt HD16 only gt gt insertion to 8 input channels With the HD16 when the 8 track recording function is enabled and the 8x COMP EQ algorithm is selected the insert effect can be applied to 8 channels simultaneously 1 Press the STRACK RECORDING key in the input section so that the ON OFF keys for inputs 1 8 are lit in red 2 Select 8x COMP EQ as algorithm for the insert effect p 127 3 Press the INPUT SOURCE key in the control section The current insert position is shown on the display 4 Turn the dial to select Input 1 8 All ON OFF keys are lit in orange In this condition the effect wi
22. 134 Storing swapping send return effect patches 135 Editing the name of a send return effect patch 136 Importing patches from another project 136 Reference Creating a CD 138 About creating an audio CD 138 About CD R RW discs 138 Contents Creating an audio 139 Creating an audio CD by 139 Creating an audio CD by 140 Using the marker function to separate tracks 142 Including a playlist in an album 143 Playing an audio 143 Finalizing a CD R RW 144 Erasing a CD RW 144 Loading an audio CD into a project 145 Backup and 146 Saving a single project to CD R RW disc 146 Saving all projects to CD R RW 147 Loading a project from CD R RW disc 148 Reference Projects 150 About 150 Project operations 150 Loading 151 Creating a new project 151 Checking the project size available hard disk oes el erbe pneum e ei 152 Duplicating a project 152 Erasing
23. 134 Pattern te ates 102 Phrase list ue 206 Phrase 67 FAST input coss Less 73 Phrase Adjusting 70 Copying 71 Deleting 72 Importing a 68 Importing a WAV AIFF file 70 Writing a phrase loop to atrack 73 Pitclifix 2c ice Gene Rice cremate 55 Playlist re RR 165 20 20 142 49 124 Project ee ee 150 Basic 150 Changing the project name 1538 Continuous 165 Copying a 152 Creating a new project 23 151 Deleting a 152 Loading a 151 Loading a project from CD R RW disc 148 Saving a single project on CD R RW disc ea A tre se n 146 Saving all projects on CD R RW disc 147 Write protecting 153 Punch in out function 41 Auto 41 Manual punch in out 41 HQ 92 Quick erase 145 BR Range edit Basic 50 C
24. Copy destination rhythm song number rhythm song name 5 Turn the dial to select the copy destination rhythm song and press the ENTER key The indication Copy appears on the display To execute the copy process press the ENTER key once more When the copy operation is completed the unit returns to the rhythm song selection screen with the destination rhythm song being selected By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time 7 Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key Deleting the rhythm song This section explains how to delete the entire rhythm song resetting it to a blank state HINT Once you delete the rhythm song it cannot be recovered Use this operation with care 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Turn the dial to select the rhythm song to delete 3 Press the FUNCTION key The display indication changes as follows This screen lets you check rhythm song number rhythm song name that will be deleted 110 Delete target rhythm song number rhythm song name 4 Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 5 Press the ENTER key once more to delete the rhythm song When the delete operation is completed the unit returns to the rhythm song selection
25. MY MidE04 NIN N A B B RPM DM DM NINI D NINI NI YINI MH MH NM DINI NINININI MH NINI DININI III MH MYO NI AININ NINI N NINI N NINI NIN METRO44 199 Appendix ROCK ACOUSTIC FUNK STUDIO BASIC LIVE REGGAE POP ARENA JAZZ WORLD TECHNO URBAN BUMP IT LNCH BOX CRUNCHIN DEEPKNCK BOUNCER PHT BEAT PUSH ME BEATBOX Bass Programs PICK FINGER ACOUSTIC FRETLESS MUTED SLAP MOOG TECHNO JUNO HUMMER SUBTONE a w nj 200 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Appendix THMPRKIK LIVE_SD 808KICK THUMP MACHINE 909KICK THUNKKIK MARCHSNR 909LONG TIGHT NEPRIM BDI VO BDI POWER ACO BD2 VO BD2 REGAE ANALOGI VO BD3 REGASNR ANALOG2 WHOMPKIK REGATON ATFCTKIK RESO SD BD ROLL1 B_DAKICK ROLL2 BD DRYI 808 RIM ROOM BD DRY2 808BRTE SD DRYI BDBBI 808SNAR SD DRY2 BDBB2 909SNAR SLAPROL BDBB3 ANALOGM SMPLRIM BEND BD ANALOGS SNAPI BGBGRKIK ANLGRIM SNAP2 BMERKIK ATTK SD SNARELET BOXKICK BASIC SNAROLL BROKNKIK BLASTSNR SNRATAK CAJONKIK BOXSNARE SNRBBI CLASSCI MUTE SNRBB2 CLASSC2 BR SLAP SNRBB3 CRNCHKIK BR SWEP SNREYSNR DEEP BD BR SWPE SNRULATR DGRDEKIK BRBITSNR STD SD DIGALGI BRSSMT STELSNR DIGALG2 BRSSSLP STRCHSNR DNGRKICK BRSSWEP STREETSN DOOMKICK BRSSWIP TIGHT DPKNCKIK BRSTAP TOCKDNG DROPKICK CHEATSNR TOCKRIM DROPKIKR CLAPSNR TRSHSNR EASTKCK CRNCHSNR TUBESNR HARD BD CRSHSNR
26. 7 e Turn the dial to select the duration value as listed below The duration is specified as 4 x 1 i e as multiples of a quarter note Depending on this value the actual duration becomes as follows 1 8 quarter note x 1 8 dotted quarter note did uotum dotted 8th note 1 2 nne 8th note 1 9 ie 8th note triplet 1 4 16th note 16th note triplet 1 8 32nd note 1 12 ss 32th note triplet 1 163 64th note 1 24 64th note triplet 8 To enter a note hit the pad corresponding to the note and then press the REPEAT STEP key The note is recorded and the unit advances by the step duration set in step 6 HINT The intensity with which you hit the pad is also recorded on the bass sequence 9 Toentera rest press only the REPEAT STEP key If you press the REPEAT STEP key by itself the position advances by one step duration of quantize value but no play information is recorded 10 Repeat steps 6 9 while changing the quantize value and duration as necessary to enter the bass pattern When you reach the end of the pattern the unit automatically returns to the first measure letting you continue the input You can edit the recorded content as follows To erase an entered note Repeatedly press the REPEAT STEP key to move to the position that you want to erase Then hold down the FUNCTION key and press the respective pad The no
27. 7th Suspended 4th ajor Triad Suspended 4th inor Triad inor 7th flat 5 Dominant 7th inor 6th inor 7th ajor 6th ajor 7th inor 9th Augment ajor 9th Diminish inor Major 7th The following screen shows an example of when the chord type has been changed to M7 By pressing the PLAY key in this condition you can check the rhythm pattern with the new chord information 7 e Move to the location at which you want to input the next chord data and input chord data in the same way as described in steps 3 6 You can move the input location within a rhythm song in the following ways Moving in steps of a measure Use the cursor left right keys to move to the beginning of the preceding or following measure Moving in steps of a beat Use the REW 44 keys to move to the beginning of the preceding or following beat Moving in steps of a sixteenth note Repeatedly press the cursor up key to bring up the indication Event on the display and turn the dial to 106 move forward or backward in 12 tick 16th note units If necessary you can also input chord information at a point within a measure as shown below smallest unit sixteenth note For example to enter chord information in sixteenth note units bring up the indication Event on the first line of the display turn the dial to move current point and then bring up the chord information input screen again Em Am B7 Em
28. A project contains 310 lt lt 330 gt gt patches which are organized according to 8 lt lt 9 gt gt algorithms You can Effect module arrangement Input output type r7 PREAMP VOLUME MODULATION PEDAL DELAY Mono Stereo L mic PRE DE ESSER VOLUME MODULATION PEDAL J DELAY COMP LIMITER MIC PRE r VOLUME PEDAL 2 LIMITER MIC PRE 2 VOLUME PEDAL COMP LIMITER ISOLATOR H VOLUME H MODULATION gt PEDAL DELAY Stereo Stereo HIGH PASS FILTER COMP LIMITER HIGH PASS FILTER LIMITER VOLUME PEDAL VOL PDL applies to all inputs Mono x 8 Mono x 8 gt gt MULTI BAND COMP Lo FI Fons VOLUME FH PEDAL ZOOM HD8 HD16 DIMENSION 127 Reference Effects instantly switch insert effect settings simply by selecting the appropriate algorithm and then selecting a patch The table below shows the number of patches for each algorithm Algorithm Patches preprogrammed patches CLEAN 30 22 DISTORTION 50 40 ACO BASS SIM 20 10 BASS 30 20 MIC 50 30 DUAL MIC 50 30 LINE 50 30 8x COMP EQ 20 10 lt lt GEID only MASTERING 30 21 Changing the insert location of the insert effect In the defa
29. 3Band EQ For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms MOD DELAY module Chorus Ensemble Flanger Pitch Vibe Step Cry Exciter Air Wide Delay Analog Delay Reverse Delay ARRM Pitch For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms ZNR module For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms Volume Pedal module Volume Pedal For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms DUAL MIC algorithm COMP LIMITER module Threshold Ratio Attack Compressor for attenuating high level signals and boosting low level signals Threshold Ratio Release Compressor L Limiter L Limiter for attenuating high level signals that exceed a certain threshold Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Threshold 24 0 Adjusts threshold level of compressor limiter Ratio Compressor 1 6 Adjusts compression ratio of compressor limiter Limiter 1 54 Attack 0 10 Adjusts attack rate of compressor Level 0 12 Adjusts module output level Release 0 10 Adjusts speed of limiter release after signal falls below threshold level MIC PREAMP L module For an explanation of types and parameters see MIC algorithm 3BAND EQ L module
30. 3BandEQ L For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms ZOOM HD8 HD16 185 Appendix DELAY module Time Feedback Delay effect with max setting 2000 ms Time Feedback Warm delay effect with max setting 2000 ms Time Tone Doubling effect which creates body by adding a short delay Delay L Echo L Doubling L Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Delay L Echo L 1 2000ms Time DoublingL 1 100ms Adjusts delay time Feedback 0 100 Adjusts feedback amount Tone 0 10 Adjusts tonal quality Mix 0 100 Adjusts mix ratio of effect sound to original sound COMP LIMITER R module Compressor R For an explanation of types and parameters see COMP LIMITER L module MIC PREAMP R module MicPreR For an explanation of types and parameters see MIC algorithm 3BAND EQ R module 3Band EQ R For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms DELAY R module Delay R Echo R For an explanation of types and parameters see DELAY L module Doubling R ZNR module ZR For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms Volume Pedal module Volume Pedal For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms 186 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Appendix LINE
31. Hi Z selectable x2 Input impedance 1 megohm Hi Z switch ON With phantom power supply x8 Master output Phantom power supply 48V Input level 50 dBm to 4 dBm continuously variable RCA phono jack L R Output impedance 1 kilohm Rated output level 10 dBm Headphones output Standard stereo phone jack x2 50 mW into 32 ohm load Standard stereo phone jack 50 mW into 32 ohm load Sub output Standard stereo phone jack 50 mW into 32 ohm load Digital output S P DIF Optical 20 bit MIDI IN OUT USB USB2 0 High Speed Mass Strage Class operation USB MIDI operation Control input For 2 01 or FSO1 Dimension 382 W x 328 D x 84 H mm 482 W x 328 D x 84 H mm Weight 5 1 kg CD R RW drive installed 4 5 kg CD R RW drive uninstalled 6 0 kg CD R RW drive installed 5 3 kg CD R RW drive uninstalled Power supply DC12V supplied AC adaptor AD 0011 Power consumption 30 W 12V 2 5A typical Supplied accessory Operation manual AC adaptor cable CD ROM screws for CD R RW drive Optional accessory Foot switch FSO1 Expression pedal FP02 CD R RW drive CD 02 or our recommendation drive For details our recommendation drive see our website http www zoom co jp ZOOM HD8 HD16 175 Troubleshooting If there are problems during operation of the HD8 HD 16 check the following points first
32. Spring and Plate have the same parameters Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Pre Delay 1 100 Adjusts pre delay time Decay 1 30 Adjusts reverb time EQ High 12 6 Adjusts high range effect sound EQ Low 12 6 Adjusts low range effect sound E R Mix 0 30 Adjusts mixing ratio of initial reflections EFX Level 0 100 Adjusts effect sound level 190 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Effect Patch List Insert effect Appendix CLEAN algorithm No Patch name Description 0 Standard Standard clean sound optimized for line level equipment 1 Ensemble Transparent sound with ensemble effect 2 CompPlus Universal compressor with a wide range of uses 3 R amp Roll Sound tailored for vintage genres such as rock n roll 4 CutPhase Phase effect for that great cutting style 5 Hi WT Hiwatt amp tone gets natural distortion from the picking dynamics 6 DlyLead Clean lead patch characterized by long delays with solid presence 7 Blues Choose this for an orthodox blues feel 8 MultiFLG Flanger suitable for many uses including arpeggio cutting and lead guitar 9 DaDaFunk Auto wah brings out the picking nuances 10 Tremolo Twin reverb with added tremolo for color 11 BeatRock Get into the Mersey beat for rock bands 12 Rockably Rockabill
33. parameter with the SELECT key and then press the ENTER key 5 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key Linking two tracks stereo link In the HD8 HD 16 the parameters of adjacent odd numbered even numbered mono tracks can be linked resulting in a pair of stereo tracks This function is referred to as stereo link The setting procedure is as follows 1 From the main screen press the TRACK PARAMETER key in the control section The track parameter can be selected 2 Use the cursor left right keys or the status keys to select one of the tracks that you want to stereo link 3 Repeatedly press the cursor down key until the following indication appears 4 Turn the dial to switch the setting to On Stereo linking will be enabled immediately so that the selected track and the adjacent odd numbered even numbered track are linked To defeat stereo linking return the setting to Off HINT You can also use the ENTER key to toggle between On and Off 5 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key HINT To adjust the volume of stereo linked tracks use the odd numbered fader The even numbered fader will have no effect The PAN parameter of two stereo linked tracks will function as a balance parameter that adjusts the volume balance between the tracks Also when stereo link is on the phase setting and V take selection can be made individually for each track 8
34. 1 47 Marker 47 Setting a mark es ere RR aen 47 Locating a mark mec re Rees 48 Deleting a mark uere rene ente eee 48 Making settings for pre count operation 49 Reference Track Editing 50 Editing a range 50 Basic steps for range 0 50 Copying a specified range of 51 Moving a specified range 52 Erasing a specified range 52 Trimming a specified range of data 53 Fade in fade out of specified data range 53 Reversing a specified range of audio data 54 Changing the duration of an entire track 55 Compensating the pitch of a specified range 55 Generating harmony from a specified range of audio data so RUPEE Se nie eee ead 57 Generating a 1 part harmony from a specified range Of AUCIO data oce qr es Ye eS 59 Editing using V takes 61 Basic steps for V take editing 61 Erasing a 61 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Copying a 62 Moving a V take 62 lt lt HD16 only gt gt Moving V takes of tracks 1 8 to tracks 9 16 arte TU exe
35. 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication REC TRACK on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The current setting is shown The indications have the following meaning Mute The recording track s will be muted default setting e Play The recording track s will play back 4 To play the bounce target track turn the dial to change the setting to Play 5 Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Selecting the recording destination V take By default the result of the bounce operation will be recorded on the V take that is currently selected for the recording track s To play back a track while bouncing onto another V take of that track you can use the following procedure to change the recording destination V take 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The indication REC UTILITY appears on the first line and the indication PROJECT on the second line of the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication BOUNCE on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication REC TAKE on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The current setting is shown ZOOM HD8 HD16 The indications have the following meaning Current The bounce result will be recorded on t
36. 41 BB B point xxn 39 Backup 146 Loading a 148 Saving a single project 146 Saving all 147 Bass 87 Bass sequence 87 Bass volume 102 Bounce function 44 Captures 65 CD creation 138 By 140 BY PIC ci ed RR eoo eke 139 Using marks for track division 142 Ga Regn 138 CD R RW 138 Firializing 4 55 hee 144 CD R RW drive installation 18 CD RW PER 138 CD RW disc Erasing sta dein Re 144 Changing the drum kit bass program 89 Character input 37 Chord s eere n 102 Chord information Rhythm 98 Rhytlim song ertet rm 105 56 Chromatic 167 Connections 8 16 Connections 16 17 Contrast eser n 170 Control 14 Control surface mode 163 Selecting the interface 163 COPY iun mairie epe oie 51 n nete eter mie tine 114 Measure 108 Phrase heals entes dee ated 71 veg va bs ES Ip 152 R
37. Bass track volume m 7 107 Reference Rhythm To change an event setting Display the event you want to change and turn the dial to alter the setting To delete event information Display the event you want to delete and press the FUNCTION key twice The indication Event Erase appears Press the ENTER key 8 When you have finished press the STOP W key The key goes out and the rhythm song selection screen appears again To return to the main screen press the EXIT key Playing a rhythm song This section explains how to play one of the 10 rhythm songs that were created by inputting rhythm pattern and chord information 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm song selection screen appears Lid Bonanta 2 Turn the dial to select the rhythm song to play and press the PLAY gt key The rhythm song will begin playing If something also has been recorded on the audio tracks those tracks will also play back The display shows information about the rhythm pattern number chord type and other information at the current location Rhythm song name Current chord 3 To stop the rhythm song press the STOP W key 4 return to the main screen press the EXIT key HINT It is also possible to play a drum kit or bass program by hitting the pads during r
38. S Denotes a parameter that can be selected with the SELECT key A The triangle denotes a parameter that is only displayed when the SUB OUT SEND LVL ON OFF parameter for the master track is Off 80 ZOOM HD8 HD16 NOTE When a recording track is selected the input signal is sent to that track directly without going through the track mixer Therefore the input track parameter setting has no effect However the REC LVL parameter is always active regardless of the recording standby setting of a track lt lt GEID gt gt The STEREO SUB OUT jack parameters are available only on the HD16 4 To adjust the value of a numeric parameter turn the dial 5 To change the setting of an On Off parameter marked with an asterisk in the table select the parameter and then press the ENTER key Each push of the ENTER key toggles the parameter between On and Off For example when you switch HI EQ from On to Off the display indication changes as follows Off condition Repeat steps 3 5 until all desired parameters are adjusted If required you can use the cursor left right keys status keys and ON OFF keys in this condition to change to another track input and adjust other parameters Z Toreturnto the main screen press the EXIT key Using the parameter knobs The row of parameter knobs above the faders and status keys can be used to quickly adjust main track parameters
39. bass sounds This section describes how to use the pads on the top panel to play a drum kit or bass program Playing a drum kit with the pads When playing a drum kit you can use nine pads and switch between three pad banks combination of drum sounds giving you a total of 27 sounds 1 Select the drum kit to play 89 2 Press the RHYTHM status key repeatedly until the key is lit in green While the RHYTHM status key is lit in green the pads can be used to play a drum kit 3 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key in the pad section and press pad 9 KIT PROG so that the pad lights up When the pad is lit the pad bank selection screen is shown A pad bank is a collection of drum sounds playable with the pads Each drum kit has three pad banks numbered 1 3 In the default condition of a project pad bank 1 is selected Drum kit name ANALOG iiss 40 ET 1 3 Lore T ii Pad bank number Sound assigned to Pad number displayed pad 4 Turn the dial to select the pad bank to use The selection becomes active immediately and the sounds assigned to the nine pads change HINT You can also check the number of the currently selected pad bank on the rhythm pattern selection screen 5 Hit the pads to play the drum kit The volume of the drum kit sound can be adjusted with the RHYTHM fader 6 To play a specific pad repeatedly roll play press the REPEAT ST
40. take and select the V take for the master track Then return to the album screen 12 when you have stored all desired projects in the album press the ENTER key twice The display indication changes as follows HINT If you press the ENTER key once the indication xxTracks where xx is the number of tracks appears on the display You can check the total number of tracks that will be written to the disc from this screen 13 e To carry out the write process press the ENTER key once more By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time 141 Reference Creating a CD When the write process is completed the disc is ejected automatically and the message Next appears on the display To write another disc with the same content insert a blank CD R RW disc or a CD RW disc which has been completely erased and press the ENTER key To terminate the process press the EXIT key 14 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Using the marker function to separate tracks When you create an audio CD using the disc at once method marker information included in the project can be used to generate PQ subcode information specifying track start stop position and other items to split up a single project into multiple tracks Marker based track separation can be enabled or disabled for each project For example
41. 13 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times 75 Reference Mixer This section explains the functions and operation of the two mixer types built into the HD8 HD16 About the mixer of the HD8 HD16 The mixer of the HD8 HD16 is divided into two sections an input mixer that processes the input signals from the input jacks and a track mixer that processes the signals from the audio tracks and the drum bass track of the recorder section Details of each mixer are described below Input mixer Adjusts the sensitivity for signals from the INPUT jacks and assigns these signals to the recorder tracks either individually or mixed HDS INPUT 1 Track 1 REC LEVEL Tack 2 INPUT jacks Track Track 6 Tracks 7 8 Recorder section Input mixer Recorder section Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 REC LEVEL Track 6 Track 7 Track 8 Tracks 9 10 Tracks 11 12 Tracks 13 14 Tracks 15 16 Input mixer INPUT jacks e The input mixer serves to adjust the following parameters Input signal sensitivity Input signal recording level Input signal phase lt lt 071 only gt gt Level of signal sent to STEREO SUB OUT jack If an input signal is not assigned to a track recording track not selected
42. 2 Press the PROJECT UTILITY key The rhythm utility menu screen appears 3 Verify that the indication KIT FILE is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication NEW on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 2 E NOTE When a file with the same name is present in the same folder on the hard disk a symbol appears on the display This is a warning that the file cannot be created You must first change the name from this screen For details on entering characters see page 37 Note that available characters are limited 112 You can change the name of the kit file later p 116 5 Tocreate the new file press the ENTER key Assigning samples to pads You can freely assign samples to any pad in the drum kit 1 Press the RHYTHM status key repeatedly until the key is lit in green 2 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 9 KIT PROG so that the pad lights up The display indication changes as follows H Seon ana annk 1 Emeta gt Pad bank number Sample assigned to pad Pad number If no sample has been assigned to the pad the indication Empty is shown in the sample name field HINT Immediately after a newly cr
43. 5 e Use the cursor up down keys to select one of the following CD RW disc erase methods Normal Default setting Information from all areas of the disc is erased This takes longer than the QUICK erase operation but all contents of the disc are reliably erased This method is recommended Required time is max 74 minutes for a 650 MB disc and 80 minutes for a 700 MB disc Quick Only the track information on the CD RW disc is erased This requires less time than the Normal erase operation 6 Press the ENTER key The second line of the display now shows the indication 7 To carry out the erase process press the ENTER key once more The erasing operation starts When the operation is finished the display shows Complete By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time 8 e Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Creating a CD Loading an audio CD into a project The HD8 HD 16 can read audio data from an audio CD inserted in the CD R RW drive and record these data on any track V take of the internal recorder The data can then be played and edited in the same way as other tracks This is convenient to use drum or guitar phrases from a sampling CD Data can be read only as entire audio CD tracks Specifying a range is not possible To use only a part of a trac
44. Delete Y PATTERN A PATTERNB PRA lt PATTERN Deleting a specific measure Use the cursor left right keys to move to the start position of the measure that you want to delete Press the FUNCTION key three times This brings up the indication Measure Delete Then press the ENTER key The measure at the current position is deleted and subsequent rhythm pattern information moves forward When a measure at the beginning of a rhythm pattern for example first measure of a 2 measure pattern is deleted that measure only is deleted and the indication changes to Pattern for the second measure 103 Reference Rhythm Delete 1 measure Y PATTERNA PATTERNB PATTERN D PATTERN Using FAST for pattern information input The FAST Formula Assisted Song Translator method developed by ZOOM uses simple formulas to specify rhythm pattern playback from start to end The following keys and pads can be used for numeric input TEMPO key Serves for entering the multiplication symbol x the addition symbol the opening bracket and the closing bracket REPEAT STEP 7 1 D TOM Y 2 ow Ge T CRASH RIDE OPEN HAT L1 me 1 1 KICK SNARE CLOSED HAT CONTROL SURFACE
45. ENTER key The display indication changes as follows CTP P iL 4 Verify that the second line of the display shows LOAD and press the ENTER key A screen for selecting a new kit file appears Lab dn mm P o GL Rt Hol TP PH QS ME TH nsi 5 Turn the dial to select the kit file and press the ENTER key When you press the ENTER key the kit file is loaded and the rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears again 89 Reference Rhythm Changing the bass program The HD8 HD16 offers a selection of 11 bass programs To select a bass program proceed as follows 1 Press the RHYTHM status key repeatedly until the key is lit in red While the RHYTHM status key is lit in red the pads can be used to play a bass program 2 Fromthe main screen hold down the SHIFT key in the pad section and press pad 9 KIT PROG so that the pad lights up When the pad is lit the bass program is shown on the first line of the display Bass program Lib s e HINT The second line of the display shows the type of scale playable by the pads as well as the key and range These parameters can be changed p 91 3 Use the cursor up down keys to select the bass program The bass program becomes active immediately 4 return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Using the pads to play drum
46. ENTER key When import is completed the disc is ejected from the CD R RW drive To import other SMFs repeat steps 1 6 Z Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times HINT By using the USB port it is possible to directly import SMFs from a computer into a project To do this the SMF must be copied to the PROJxxx folder where xxx is the project number Selecting the SMF output destination When playing an SMF you can select whether to send the entire playing information to an external sound source or whether to play certain channels with the internal sound sources of the HD8 HD16 The SMF output destination is specified using the following two parameters SMF CHANNEL TO DRUM Selects which MIDI channel 1 16 of the SMF playing information is directed to the internal drum kit of the HD8 HD16 Information for the channel selected here will not be present at the MIDI OUT connector When this parameter is set to Off no playing information is sent to the drum kit SMF CHANNEL TO BASS Selects which MIDI channel 1 16 of the SMF playing information is directed to the internal bass program of the HD8 HD16 Information for the channel selected here will not be present at the MIDI OUT connector When this parameter is set to Off no playing information is sent to the bass program The diagram on the next page shows a setting example for using the HD8 HD16 as an SMF player and using extern
47. From the main screen press the TRACK PARAMETER key in the control section You can now select various track parameters 2 Use the cursor up down keys to bring up the indication Trackxx yy on the first line of the display where x is the track number and yy is the V take number The V take name is shown on the second line of the display 36 Track number V take name a STE HINT f you select a V take on which nothing is recorded the V take number indication No Data appears f you select the master track Master is shown as the track number 3 Use the cursor left right keys or the status keys to select the track for which to switch the V take HINT e You can also use the respective status key to select a track e When you select a stereo track pair with the status key each push of the status key toggles between the odd and even numbered track 4 Turn the dial to select the V take 5 Repeat steps 3 4 as necessary to select V take for each track 6 To finish press the EXIT key Changing the V take name A V take that has been recorded will be automatically assigned an 8 character name according to the following pattern xx denotes the track number and yy the V take number GTRxx yy V take recorded through CLEAN DIST or ACO BASS SIM algorithm of insert effect BASxx yy V take recorded through BASS algorithm of insert effect
48. HINT You can use the cursor left right keys to change the tuner type For details see the next section While the tuner function is used all effects are disabled 5 Play the note that you want to tune The pitch is automatically detected and the display shows the nearest note name C C D D E The display also indicates by how much the current pitch is different from the correct pitch CHROMATIC cto a d d 440 Pitch is flat 5 H Y Pitch is sharp Li 6 Adjust the pitch until the lt gt indication encloses the desired note 167 Reference Other Functions 7 To change the reference pitch of the tuner turn the dial during tuner operation The reference pitch of the tuner is set to center A 440 Hz by default The reference pitch can be adjusted over the range of 435 445 Hz in 1 Hz steps HINT The reference pitch setting is saved individually for each project When you change the reference pitch of the tuner the pitch of the rhythm section bass program will also change accordingly 8 When you have finished using the tuner function press the EXIT key to return to the main screen Using other tuner types The HD8 HD16 allows various other tuner types besides chromatic tuning including standard tuning for guitar and bass and various special tuning functions For these types it
49. If necessary turn inputs off by pressing the respective ON OFF key 2 Press the status key except MASTER status key for the track that you want to monitor alone The status key lights up in green and only the corresponding track is heard You can use the fader of the track to adjust the volume By using the RHYTHM status key it is possible to isolate the drum or bass track While the RHYTHM status key is lit in green only the drum track is heard While the RHYTHM status key is lit in red only the bass track is heard HINT For stereo tracks both tracks are monitored While the SOLO key is lit two mono tracks that are stereo linked will be played individually 3 cancel the solo function press the SOLO key once more The key goes out 83 Reference Mixer Saving recalling mixer settings scene function The current mixer and effect settings can be saved as a so called scene in a special area of the memory and recalled either manually or automatically whenever desired This is convenient when you want to compare various mixes or when you want to automate mix operations A scene contains the following data Track parameters except for stereo link on off and currently selected V take number The state of all status keys play mute Insert effect patch number input source Send return effect chorus delay reverb patch number e Fader settings Up to 100
50. LATNs1Va CNTRY 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 4 4 4 4 2 2 4 4 4 4 2 2 4 2 4 4 4 4 2 2 FUSs2Va FUNKs2VA DnBs1FB LATNs1FA 68BLUS FUSs2FA FUNKs2Va TPs1VA LATNs1VB Name FUSs2VB FUNKs2FA TPs1FA LATNs1Vb Song FUSs2Vb FUNKs2VB TPs1VB LATNs1FB ROCKs1VA FUSs2FB FUNKs2Vb TPs1FB LATNs2VA ROCKs1Va FUSs3VA FUNKs2FB AMBs1VA LATNs2Va ROCKs1FA FUSs3Va HIPs1VA AMBs1Va LATNs2FA ROCKs1VB FUSs3FA HIPs1Va AMBs1FA LATNs2VB ROCKs1Vb FUSs3VB HIPs1FA AMBs1FB LATNs2Vb ROCKs1FB FUSs3Vb HIPs1VB BALDs1VA LATNs2FB ROCKs2VA FUSs3FB HIPs1Vb BALDs1Va MidEs1VA ROCKs2Va INDTs1VA HIPs1FB BALDs1FA MidEs1Va ROCKs2FA pm p INDTs1Va HIPs1VC BALDs1VB MidEs1FA ZOOM HD8 HD16 MidEs1VB 0507 19 BLUSO5 Appendix INTROO1 MidEs1Vb 0508 20 BLUSO6 INTROO2 MidEs1FB POPO1 HIP21 CNTRO1 INTROO3 Name 2 22 CNTRO2 INTROO4 Standard 1 HIP23 CNTRO3 INTROOS 2 4 1 CNTRO4 INTROO6 POP05 DANCO2 2201 INTROO7
51. NA WZ WZ 4 control SY ce e e e e e e e ula STEREO SUB OUT control PHONES control PEAK indicators 1 8 ON OFF keys GAIN controls 1 8 BTRACK RECORDING key CLIP indicator HD16 3 Meter display section Level meters 1 8 9 10 15 16 RHYTHM MASTER Parameter select indicators Display ZOOM HD8 HD16 13 Names of Parts HD8 4 Fader section GDID Parameter knobs PLAY MUTE REC PLAY MUTE REC PLAY MUTE REC PLAY MUTE REC PLAY MUTE REC PLAY MUTE REC PLAY MUTE REC DRUM BASS MUTE NIX DOWN PLAY Faders 1 6 7 8 RHYTHM MASTER Status keys 1 6 7 8 RHYTHM MASTER HD8 HD16 5 Control section HD8 HD16 6 Pad section GLE GLID CL GLID HDD ACCESS indicator REPEAT STEP key TRACK PARAMETER key PROJECT UTILITY key INPUT SOURCE key NEW PROJECT key SHIFT key PROJECI TRACK 4 5 LI CRASH RIDE IN OUT key 1 REPEAT key SCENE key BOUNCE key MARKER CLEAR key MARK key MARKER M4 key MARKER gt gt I key HD amp S HD16 Rear Panel GPI Grip MIDI IN connector DC 12V jack Pads 1 9 HID 1G ord Disk Recording Studio Qo ZOOM CORPORATION uso n cans CE aan aar alan DIGITAL OUT jack CONTROL IN jack 14 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Names of Parts HD16
52. NOTE Only parameters for tracks 1 8 lt lt CEID 1 16 gt gt and the drum bass track can be adjusted with the parameter knobs Master track and input parameters cannot be adjusted in this Way l From the main screen press the SELECT key in the function transport section You can now select a parameter for adjustment with the parameter knob The display shows the most recently adjusted ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Mixer track parameter a 1 8dE 2 Repeatedly press the SELECT key until the parameter to adjust is shown The display shows the selected parameter The SELECT key gives access to the following track parameters EQ HI GAIN EQ MID GAIN EQ LOW GAIN eCHORUS DELAY SEND LEVEL REVERB SEND LEVEL SUB OUT SEND LEVEL GT7773 only gt gt PAN The currently selected track parameter is also shown by the parameter select indicator CO EQ HIGH EQ MID OEQLOW O DLY SEND i OREV SEND O SUB SEND OPAN 3 Turn the parameter knob for the track whose setting you want to adjust The display switches to the track that is being adjusted and the value of the track parameter selected in step 2 changes HINT You can also use the status keys to select a track For the drum bass track press the RHYTHM status key 4 Repeat steps 2 3 for other parameters HINT To change the setting of an On Off parameter select the 81 Reference Mixer
53. PROJECT UTILITY key The indication REC UTILITY appears on the first line of the display and PROJECT is shown on the second line 2 Verify that PROJECT is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The project menu for various project related functions appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SEQUENCE PLAY on the display and press the ENTER key The display shows the screen for selecting a playlist The second line of the display shows the total playback time of all projects in the playlist Total playing time of projects 4 Turn the dial to select the desired playlist 5 Press the PLAY gt key Projects are played in the order as registered in the playlist The display indication changes as follows Current playback number Project name i Ho 1 PRIGI BOG pas aen Use the MASTER fader to adjust the playback volume When a project has played through the next project is automatically loaded and played ZOOM HD8 HD16 During project playback the following keys can be used to select a track pause play or locate a certain point PLAY gt key Starts playback from the beginning of the current project STOP W key Interrupts project playback and returns to the start of the current project ZERO M4 key Returns to the project registered for playback position 1 FF gt gt key
54. Press the FUNCTION ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Creating a CD key once to bring up the indication INSERT TRACK on the first line of the display The second line shows the name of the project to be inserted In this condition use the dial to select another project and press the ENTER key The indication Insert appears on the second line of the display To carry out the process press the ENTER key To delete a project from an album Use the cursor left right keys to select the track number you want to delete Then press the FUNCTION key twice The indication DELETE TRACK appears on the first line of the display and the name of the project to be deleted from the album is shown on the second line When you press the ENTER key in this condition the indication Delete appears on the second line of the display To delete the project from the album press the ENTER Key To delete all projects from an album On the album screen press the FUNCTION key three times The indication DELETE TRACK appears on the first line of the display and AII is shown on the second line When you press the ENTER key in this condition the indication Delete appears on the second line of the display To delete all projects from the album press the ENTER Key To switch the V take for the master track Press the EXIT key repeatedly to return to the main screen Load the project for which you want to switch the V
55. Problems during playback E No sound or sound is very weak Check the connections to your monitor system and the volume setting of the system Make sure that the status keys in the mixer section are lit in green except the MASTER status key and that the faders are raised If a key is out press it repeatedly to make it light up in green Make sure that the MASTER status key is out and the MASTER fader is raised If a scene with the volume lowered has been assigned to a mark the volume will automatically be lowered when that mark is reached Delete the scene that is assigned to the mark p 47 Operating the fader does not affect the volume On channels for which stereo link is turned on the fader of the even numbered channel will have no effect Either turn stereo link off 82 or operate the fader of the odd numbered channel The display indicates Don t Play and playback is not possible The recorder will not operate at the current display screen Press the EXIT key several times to return to the main screen No sound from input signal or sound is very weak Make sure that the respective ON OFF key of the input is lit Make sure that the GAIN control for the respective input is raised Make sure that the REC LEVEL control is raised If it is raised temporarily turn it down and then up again The indication Stop Recorder is shown on the display and operation is no
56. SONG so that the pad is lit A screen for selecting the rhythm pattern or rhythm song appears 2 Press the PROJECT UTILITY key The rhythm utility menu for making various rhythm section settings appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication MIDI on the second line of the display Then press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows In this condition you can select MIDI related setting items 4 Use the cursor left right keys to select one of the following items DRUM CHANNEL Set the MIDI channel for the drum kit BASS CHANNEL Set the MIDI channel for the bass program CLOCK Turn Timing Clock transmission on off e SPP Turn Song Position Pointer transmission on off COMMAND Turn Start Stop Continue message transmission on off ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference MIDI MTC Turn MIDI Time Code transmission on off HINT For information on the SMF playback procedure see page 158 NOTE While MTC transmission is enabled Timing Clock Song Position Pointer and Start Stop Continue messages are disabled Control Change transmission is always enabled except when the drum kit bass program send receive channel is off 5 Press the ENTER key to display the setting of the selected item and turn the dial to change the setting For details on each item refer to the following explanation When you have finished maki
57. The number and the sound of the pre count clicks can be changed p 49 Ifthe input signal is distorted refer to step 2 1 to adjust the input sensitivity and recording level 5 When you have finished recording press the STOP W key The REC 0 key and PLAY We key will go out and recording will stop The wait bar indication is shown on the display while the unit is processing the recorded data NOTE The duration of the wait bar indication may differ Never turn power to the unit off while this indication is being shown on the display Otherwise recorded data may be lost and damage to the unit may occur To listen to the recorded content press the ZERO lt key to return to the beginning of the song and then press the PLAY gt key ZOOM HD8 HD16 Basic operation of transport keys REW 44 key Moves the current position back in 1 second steps Movement speed can be increased by holding down the REW 44 key and pressing the FF gt gt key ZERO I key Returns the recorder to the start position counter zero position STOP W key Stops the recorder The track will be played back together with the selected guide rhythm from the rhythm section HINT You can specify a position in hours minutes seconds milliseconds or in measures beats ticks and move directly to that point p 39 By setting marks within the recording you can quickly jump to these points p 4
58. This effect can be inserted at one of the following three points in the signal path 1 Immediately after the input jack 2 A desired track of the mixer 8 Immediately before the MASTER fader In the default condition position 1 immediately after input jack is selected When the setting is changed to 2 only a selected track or drum bass sound is processed by the effect When the setting is changed to 3 the final stereo mix can be processed This setting is suitable for processing the signal of the entire song during mixdown Send return effect This effect is internally connected to the send return loop of the mixer section There are two types of send return effect reverb and chorus delay which can be used simultaneously The send level of each mixer channel adjusts the depth of the send return effect Raising the send level will produce a deeper reverb or chorus delay effect for that channel 11 Names of Parts HD8 Top Panel GI 1 Input section 2 Output section 5 Control section 6 Pad section DIGIALOUT ee econ PHONES PHONES 2 sau 5 RHYTHM m
59. display 2 Turn the dial to select the copy source project and press the ENTER key The display changes as follows At this screen you can specify the number for the copy destination project 3 Turn the dial to select the copy destination project number and press the ENTER key The indication Copy appears on the second line of the display 4 Press the ENTER key to copy the project When copying is completed the unit automatically returns to the main screen By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Erasing a project This operation erases the specified project from the hard disk 1 Refer to steps 1 3 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication ERASE on the second line of the display Then press the ENTER key The name and number of the project to erase are shown on the display 2 Turn the dial to select the project and press the ENTER key The indication Erase appears on the second line of the ZOOM HD8 HD16 display 3 Press the ENTER key to erase the project When erasing is completed press the EXIT key to return to the main screen NOTE Once a project has been erased it cannot be recovered Use this operation with care A project for which protect is On cannot be erased Set protect to Off and then repeat the procedure f you erase the project that
60. is shown on the second line 2 Usethe cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SYSTEM on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 170 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication LEVEL METER on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The current level meter setting is shown The available settings are as follows Post default setting The meter shows the level of the signal after passing through the faders and REC LEVEL control Pre The meter shows the level of the signal before passing through the faders and REC LEVEL control 4 Turn the dial to change the setting 5 Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Adjusting the display contrast You can adjust the display contrast as follows 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The indication REC UTILITY appears on the first line of the display and PROJECT is shown on the second line 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SYSTEM on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication CONTRAST on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The current contrast setting is shown Z
61. press the PROJECT UTILITY key The indication REC UTILITY appears on the first line and the indication PROJECT on the second line of the display gpp TE TTL do p iiv i SPRO 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication REC SIGNAL on the display and press the ENTER key The current setting value is shown You can now select one of the following two signal types to be recorded on the track Wet The input signal that has passed through the insert effect will be recorded on the track default setting Dry Only the unprocessed input signal will be recorded on the track Even in this case however the insert effect will be applied to the monitor signal appearing at the MASTER OUT jacks 4 Turn the dial to change the setting to Dry 5 When you have finished adjusting settings press the EXIT key several times The unit returns to the main screen HINT The setting is stored for each project If required change the setting back to Wet before you begin recording other parts 133 Reference Effects Using the send return effect This section explains how to select and edit patches for the send return effect reverb chorus delay About the send return effect patches The reverb and chorus delay parts of the send return effect are separate and can be used independently Reverb and chorus delay each have an effec
62. 0 7 seconds prior 40 to the current location will play ending at the current location If you press the FF gt gt key a section of 0 7 seconds following the current location will play beginning at the current location This is called preview playback When preview playback ends scrub playback will resume Current location Preview playback Preview playback gt gt REW FF 1252 5 Tocancel the scrub function press the STOP Bi key The PLAY gt and STOP Bl keys go out Changing the scrub direction and duration When the scrub function is on you can change the direction of scrub playback whether it will play the section before or after the current location and the length of the scrub playback section l From the main screen hold down the STOP key and press the PLAY P gt key This turns the scrub function on and the direction and duration of scrub playback are shown on the display Direction of scrub playback Length of scrub playback v 2 To change the length of scrub playback use the cursor left right keys to cause the scrub playback length setting to flash and turn the dial You can select 40 80 120 160 or 200 ms as the length of scrub playback 3 To change the direction of scrub playback use the cursor left right keys to cause the scrub playback direction indication to flash and turn the dial E iw Default Current locatio
63. 4 Fader section Grip Parameter knobs 11 12 13 14 15 16 RHYTHM Faders 1 8 9 10 15 16 RHYTHM MASTER Status keys 1 8 9 10 15 16 RHYTHM MASTER HD8 HD16 7 Function transport section GLE GLID EDIT key SOLO key EXIT key FUNCTION key SELECT key SELECT 5010 ENTER key Cursor keys Dial ZERO M4 key 2 REW 44 key EQ ES a F key PLAY gt key STOP key EA REC key SCRUB HD8 HD16 Right Side Panel GP GLID CD R RW drive bay ZOOM HD8 HD16 MASTER 15 Connect your instrument microphone audio devices computer and MIDI devices as shown in the following diagram Dynamic or condenser microphone A 3 The INPUT jacks accept cables with XLR plugs as well as cables with mono phone plugs balanced unbalanced 1 To directly connect an electric guitar or bass with a passive pickup use a high impedance compatible INPUT jack and set the respective Hi Z switch to On engaged On the HD8 the INPUT jack 1 is high impedance compatible On the HD16 INPUT jacks 1 and 2 are high impedance compatible When connecting stereo output devices such as a synthesizer or CD player connect the L side output of the external device to an odd numbered INPUT and the R side output to an even numbered INPUT
64. 9 Adjust the level and panning for the harmony part in the same way by bringing up the indication Chorus Level or Chorus Panning on the second line of the display 10 Press the cursor down key At this screen you can specify the start point in time units measures beats ticks or by using marks To return to the previous screen press the cursor up key 60 Mark Measures beats ticks 11 Use the cursor left right keys and the dial to specify the start point for harmony generation You can also use the MARKER l 4 gt gt I keys ZERO M4 key REW 44 FF gt gt keys to locate the point The Duo Harmony part will be added to the range where recording steps were carried out By pressing the PLAY Be key at this point you can check the editing result HINT The manual and automatic punch in punch out functions gt p 41 can also be used at this point 12 e To start Duo Harmony generation hold down the REC 09 key and press the PLAY gt key During recording you can use the cursor left right keys to call up and edit the Source level and panning Chorus 1 3 level and panning and the Feeling parameter The settings will be reflected in the recorded result 13 when recording has progressed to the point where you want harmony generation to stop press the STOP W key The indication Harmonize appears on the second line of the display 14 confirm the op
65. Am 1 2 03 4 PATTERN A PATTERN B 1234123412341234 Measure Beat HINT At a point where no chord information is input lt is shown to the left of the Root or Chord indication This means that the immediately preceding information continues to be valid 8 Input the remaining chord data in the same way If you have made a mistake or want to make a change proceed as follows To change chord information Move to the location at which the chord data is input use the cursor up down keys to switch the display to Root or Chord and turn the dial to change the chord information To erase chord information Move to the location at which the chord data is input and use the cursor up down keys to bring up the indication chord information that you want to erase Then press the FUNCTION key twice The indication Event Erase appears When you press the ENTER key the chord data root and chord will be erased and the display will change to lt Root or lt Chord 9 when you have finished press the STOP W key The unit returns to the rhythm song selection screen By pressing the PLAY We key in this condition you can check the rhythm song with the new chord information To return to the main screen press the EXIT key ZOOM HD8 HD16 Entering other information A rhythm song contains information about rhythm patterns chord tempo beat etc in a matrix configuration
66. Assign the starting scene to this mark 5 Press the MARK key When you press the MARK key at a location where a mark has been assigned a screen will appear in which you can assign a scene to the corresponding mark NOTE If you press the MARK key at a location where no mark has been assigned marker symbol shown in reverse a new mark will be assigned to that location Take care not to assign a mark by mistake If required user the MARKER M4 gt gt I keys to match the current position with the marker point 6 Turn the dial to select the number of the scene you want to assign to this mark and press the ENTER key The scene will be assigned to the mark HINT To cancel a scene assignment turn the dial until the display indicates 7 Use the MARKER lt lt gt gt keys to locate the next mark at which you want the mix to change and assign a scene in the same way 8 e Whenall desired scenes have been assigned move to the start position of the recorder and start playback Each time the song reaches a mark to which a scene has been assigned the settings of that scene will be recalled 9 Press the EXIT key to return to the main screen ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Mixer Deleting certain parameters from a scene If desired you can disable a group of parameters saved in a scene Such parameters will not change even if the scene is changed The following groups o
67. DAW software 163 lac cp 10 36 Assigning 36 Switching the V take 36 V take based editing 61 Basic operation 61 Copying a 62 Erasing 61 Importing audio data 63 Moving a 62 Moving V takes of tracks 1 8 to tracks 9 16 HD16 62 Swapping V takes 63 Bw WAV 43 63 70 Write Phrase 7 Rhythm song 104 Write protect 153 211 The FCC regulation warning for U S A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by on
68. Duo Harmony Write target track Sines For the Duo Harmony function to work properly the audio data should represent single notes recorded without applying delay reverb chorus or other effects 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing and select the DUO HARMONY command Select the track V take for time stretch compress and press the ENTER key ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Track Editing The indication Duo Harmony Dst appears on the first line of the display In this condition you can select the target destination for writing the created harmony NOTE You can only select a single mono track or one track of a stereo pair as source track for Duo Harmony 2 Use the cursor left right keys or the status keys to select the target track and use the dial to select the V take number If you specify the same track V take as the source the harmony data will be added to the original data and the V take will be overwritten You can also specify a stereo track or two mono tracks as destination 3 Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows From this screen you can set the key to be used as reference for the harmony 4 Turn the dial to select the key The setting range is C B in semitone steps 5 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication Scale on the secon
69. HD16 3 Press the EDIT key The second line of the display shows the currently selected effect type Effect type 4 Turn the dial to select the effect type When the effect type is changed the effect parameters will also change accordingly If the contents of a patch have been changed the 3 Edited symbol will appear on the first line of the display 5 Use the cursor up down keys to select the effect parameter that you want to edit The first line of the display shows the effect type and the second line shows the name and current value of the effect parameter HINT To change the effect type repeatedly press the cursor up key to display the screen of step 3 and then turn the dial Turn the dial to change the setting For details on the effect types that can be selected for the send return effect and on the range of each effect parameter refer to the appendix at the end of this manual 7 Repeat steps 5 6 as necessary to edit other effect parameters 8 When you have finished editing press the EXIT key The send return effect patch select screen appears again NOTE Keep in mind that if you select another patch without first storing the edited patch the changes will be lost If you want to keep the results of your editing session refer to the following section ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Effects Storing swapping send return effect patches A patch th
70. HINT To change the pad bank during step input hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 9 KIT PROG to bring up the pad bank selection screen Turn the dial to select the pad bank Press the EXIT key to return To switch to a bass sequence during step input press the RHYTHM key repeatedly until the key is lit in red NOTE When searching for a note to erase set the quantize value to the same value as the smallest value used during recording or to a smaller value Otherwise the start of a note may be missed 10 e When you have finished step input press the STOP W key The REC key goes out and the rhythm pattern selection screen appears again By pressing the PLAY key you can check the rhythm pattern that you recorded 11 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Reference Rhythm Bass sequence step input Compared to the drum sequence step input the step input procedure for a bass sequence is somewhat more complex because there are the additional elements of pitch and duration As in drum track step input you specify the step length interval to next note or rest using the quantize value and you use the pads and the REPEAT STEP key to enter notes and rests But when you input a note you must also specify the duration parameter This parameter allows you to vary the actual duration for each note while keeping the step length the same see diagram below 1
71. MDPWRTM POPHI2 POPLO POPMID STDOTMI STDOTM2 STDOTM3 SYNTH 808CRSH 808CRSH2 CHINA CRASH CRSH_17 CRSH_20 CRSH_B CRSH3 CUPI CUP2 HICRASH 4CYMBAL LIVECYM MUTECR REVCYMI REVCYM2 RIDE_B RIDE1 RIDE2 RIDE3 RIDE4 SPLASHI SPLASH2 VO CYM 5HIHAT 808CLS 8080PN 909CLS 9090PN CLCLEAR CLS14 CLS14_2 CLSANLG CLSBEND CLSDGAN CLSHMN CLSLIVE CLSSTDO CP HATI HAT2 CP HAT3 5 9 HATTICK2 HHCLSBB HHOPENBB OP HATI OP HAT2 HAT3 OP HAT4 5 9 OPANLGI OPANLG2 OPBEND OPCLEAR OPDGAN OPHMN OPLIVE PEDACO RELCLSD RELOPEN TICK1 TICK2 ZOOM HD8 HD16 AGOHI AGOLO BELLTR BLOCK BONGOI BONGO2 BONGO3 BONGO4 CABASA CABASAI CABASA2 CASTAI CASTA2 CHIMES CLAVE CLAVES CNGAHI CNGALO CNGAMID COWBELI COWBEL2 CSTNET DJEMBEI DJEMBE2 DJEMBE3 DJEMBE4 DJEMBES DJEMBE6 6PERCUS DJMSLAP DUMBECI DUMBEC2 DUMBEC3 DUMBEC4 DUMBECS5 DUM
72. Measures Beats Ticks 1 Verify that the transport is stopped and the main screen is shown The locate function can only be used when the transport is stopped 2 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing part to the unit to change The unit that can be changed is indicated by the flashing value a AA You can use the cursor up down keys to switch between time indication and measure beat tick indication 3 Turn the dial to change the value When you change the displayed value the recorder immediately moves to the new location Pressing the PLAY gt key starts playback from that point HINT If you have set marks using the marker function p 47 you can use the locate function to move among the marks ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Recorder Playing back the same passage repeatedly A B repeat function A B repeat is a function that repeatedly plays back a desired section of the song This is useful to listen to the same section repeatedly for example during practice 1 Move to the point where repeat playback should begin and press the A B REPEAT key in the control section The key flashes and the repeat start location point A is specified HINT The A B point can be specified either during playback or when the recorder is stopped 2 Move to the point at which repeat playback should end and press the A B REPEAT key once more The A B REPEAT key will change from flashin
73. MoreTone Distortion with emphasized midrange body 20 SnrSmack Emphasizes snappy snare sound 21 Shudder Sliced sound for techno tracks 22 SwpPhase Phaser with powerful resonance 23 DirtyBiz Lo fi distortion using ring modulator 24 Doubler Doubling for vocal track 25 SFXlab Forced SFX sound for synthesizer 26 SynLead2 Old style jet sound for synthesizer lead 27 Tekepiko For sequence phrases or single note muted guitar 28 Soliner Simulates analog strings ensemble 29 HevyDrum For hard rock drums 30 49 Empty 8x COMP EQ algorithm HD16 Only No Name Comment Recommended input 1 8 1 Guitar amp 2 Bass amp 0 For vocal band For vocal band 4 Chorus 5 6 Drum 7 8 Keyboard 1 2 Guitar amp 3 Bass amp 1 Inst For jazz or fusion band 4 Piano 5 6 Drum 7 8 Keyboard 1 Acoustic bass 2 Piano 2 AcoBand For acoustic band 3 4 5 6 Acoustic guitar 7 8 Percussion 1 2 Guitar 3 Bass 4 Keyboard 3 1ManBand For private recording studio 5 Vocal 6 Chorus 7 8 Sequence 1 Bass drum 4 StdDrum Standard sound for recording each sound of drum kit 2 Snare drum 3 Hi hat 5 VtgDrum 1970s drum sound with enhanced hi hat 4 High tom 5 Mid tom 6 EhcdDrum Punchy compression drum sound 6 Low tom 7 8 Overhead mic 1 2 Various percussion AEN 3 4 Cymbal bell 7 Percus Suitable for recording individual percussion sound 5 6 7 8 Overall percussion 8 CompLtr Versatile mellow sound 1 8 ZOOM HD8 HD16 195 App
74. PHONES control to a comfortable volume 4 To adjust the volume of the individual tracks use the respective faders The volume of the rhythm section can be adjusted with the RHYTHM fader after selecting the drum track or bass track with the RHYTHM status key When the RHYTHM status key is lit in green the drum track is selected When the RHYTHM status key is lit in red the bass track is selected The overall volume can be adjusted with the MASTER fader 5 To switch individual tracks on or off press the respective status key When the status key is out the track is muted When the key is lit in green muting is canceled For the drum bass track muting is canceled when the status key is lit in green or red 6 To stop the demo song press the STOP W key NOTE The demo song is write protected Even if you change the mix by adjusting fader or pan settings the changes will not be stored To retain any changes you have made cancel the write protect setting first p 153 21 Let s Record This section demonstrates the basic recording procedure of the HD8 HD16 As an example it explains how to record a guitar connected to INPUT jack 1 on track 1 1 Press the NEW PROJECT key in the control section and then press the ENTER key This creates a new project and activates the recording standby condition 2 Connect the guitar to INPUT jack 1 and set the Hi Z switch 1 to ON engaged For
75. Playback stops and the system jumps to the beginning of the next project REW lt lt key Playback stops and the system jumps to the beginning of the previous project When playback of the last project is completed the recorder stops Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Using the tuner function The HD8 HD16 incorporates a versatile tuner that can also accommodate 7 string guitar and other unconventional tunings This section explains how to use the tuner function Using the chromatic tuner The chromatic tuner which can automatically detect pitch in semitone steps operates as follows 1 Connect the instrument that you want to tune to an INPUT jack 2 At the main screen press the ON OFF key for the input to which the instrument is connected so that the key is lit in red HINT If two or more inputs are activated the respective input signals will be mixed and sent to the tuner You should set all inputs not required for tuning to OFF 3 Hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 4 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Other Functions INSERT EFFECT several times until the pad is out The insert effect is bypassed and the display indication changes as follows CENTER 1 4 TLMER 4 Press the ENTER key The built in tuner is activated In the default condition of a project the chromatic tuner will be selected Currently selected tuner type Reference pitch
76. Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for V take editing to select the track V take to use as import destination and bring up the indication IMPORT V TAKE on the display Then press the ENTER key A screen for selecting the import source appears on the display 63 Reference Track Editing PROJE 2 Use the cursor left right keys to select one of the following choices PROJECT Import any V take from another project IMPORT FOLDER Import a WAV AIFF file located on the internal hard disk CD ROM Import a WAV AIFF file located on a CD ROM or CD R RW disc 3 Press the ENTER key Depending on which selection was made in step 2 select the WAV AIFF file B if PROJECT was selected in step 2 The name of the source project is shown on the display Project number Name of source project 1 Turn the dial to select the source project and press the ENTER key A display showing a track and V take in the source project appears Source track number V take name and V take number 2 Use the cursor left right keys status keys and the dial to select the track V take to use as import Source If you select a track V take on which nothing is recorded the indication No Data appears in the V take name field B If CD ROM or IMPORT FOLDER was selected in step 2 Search for the WAV AIFF file in the selected location When a file is found its name is shown on the disp
77. SFX effect that uses cry like a talking modulator 192 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Appendix 9 Melody Chorus sound for melody solo chord playing or harmonics 10 SlapJazz Basic slap sound in the jazz bass style 11 Destroy Smashing sound mixing distortion pitch shift and ring modulator 12 Tremolo A great match for moody bass line and chord playing 13 SoftSlow Melody or solo play tone is ideal for a fretless bass 14 Limiter Limiter evens out the sound when using a pick 15 X over Flanger sound for picking typical of the crossover genre 16 CleanWah Auto wah sound that has a million uses 17 Exciter Universal sound with a fresh and transparent character 18 ClubBass May those walking phrases with this sound that simulates the ambience of a small 19 DriveWah Auto wah sound with variable drive that follows the picking dynamics 20 29 Empty MIC algorithm No Patch name Description 0 Rec Comp Conventional preamp compression sound for recording 1 RoomAmbi Simulates the acoustics of a radio station broadcast studio 2 VocalDly Delay effect that works best with wet vocals 3 Rock Massive compression sound for rock vocals 4 Long DLY Long delay sound for vocals 2 beats at tempo 120 5 InTheBOX This effect seems to put the entire sound into a small box 6 Limiter Limiter effect highl
78. V take recorded through MIC algorithm of insert effect e DULxx yy V take recorded through DUAL MIC algorithm of insert effect ZOOM HD8 HD16 e LINxx yy V take recorded through LINE algorithm of insert effect 8INxx yy lt lt GEID gt gt V take recorded through 8x COMP EQ algorithm of insert effect e MASxx yy V take recorded through MASTERING algorithm of insert effect e BYPxx yy V take recorded without passing through insert effect e BOUxx yy V take recorded using the bounce function or rhythm recording function e LPxx yy Phrase written to V take using the phrase loop function gt p 67 HINT When the phrase loop function is used to write a phrase to the master track the name LP MS yy is assigned HRMxx yy V take recorded using the harmony generate function or duo harmony function To change a V take name proceed as follows 1 From the main screen press the TRACK PARAMETER key in the control section 2 Usethe cursor up down keys to bring up the indication Trackxx yy on the first line of the display where xx is the track number and yy is the V take number The V take name is shown on the second line of the display NOTE Only the name of the V take currently selected for a track can be changed 3 Use the cursor left right keys or the status keys to select the track for which to change the V take name NOTE The name of a V take on which nothing is recorded No Data cann
79. accordingly If you make a mistake during input correct it as follows Inserting a number or symbol Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing position to where you want to insert a new number symbol Then enter the new number symbol Deleting a number or symbol Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing position to the number or symbol that you want to delete Then press the EDIT key When formula input is completed specify the track V take to which the phrase loop is to be written as audio data HINT The entered formula will be stored as part of the project also after writing the phrase loop This allows you to later call up the formula edit it and write the data again After writing the phrase loop it is not possible to write only a part of the data or add a phrase to the loop To make changes enter the new formula from the beginning to the end and then perform the writing operation Writing a phrase loop to a track This section explains how to create a phrase loop and write it as audio data to a specified track V take 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key in the display section The indication REC UTILITY appears on the first line of the display and PROJECT is shown on the second line 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication PHRASE on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The phrase screen appears on the displ
80. adjust the tempo The tempo can be adjusted over a range of 40 0 250 0 BPM HINT The tempo can be changed in the play or stop condition 3 To change the tempo manually hit the TEMPO key repeatedly in the desired tempo The average of the key press intervals is determined and set as the new tempo 4 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times NOTE If you record on the audio tracks while listening to the rhythm pattern and then later change the tempo the audio track content and the rhythm pattern will no longer be synchronized Be sure to decide on the tempo first ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm Changing the drum kit bass program You can change the drum kit bass program used by the rhythm section Changing the drum kit In the HD8 HD16 drum kit information including the drum sounds used by the pads and parameters for each pad is saved in so called drum kit files To change the current drum kit you load a different kit file HINT In the factory default condition the HD8 HD16 gives the user a choice of 20 kit files 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN or pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Press the PROJECT UTILITY key The rhythm utility menu screen appears 3 Verify that the second line of the display shows KIT FILE and press the
81. adjusted and the value of the track parameter selected in step 2 changes Parameter knob 3 PLAY MUTE REC PLAY MUTE REC PLAY MUTE REC HINT To adjust a track parameter for the drum bass track press the RHYTHM status key to select the drum track key lit in green or rhythm track key lit in red and then operate the knob For stereo tracks the parameter change applies to both tracks For parameters marked with a in the table at left you can press the ENTER key to switch the parameter on or off for the most recently adjusted track For example if you press the ENTER key while adjusting EQ HIGH GAIN for track 3 the display changes as follows and high frequency EQ for that track is set to off EM HI Track 3 OFF HINT It is also possible to first select a track with the left right cursor keys or the status keys and then switch the parameter on or off 5 e Repeat steps 3 4to adjust other parameters 31 Quick Tour in the same way Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key HINT Besides the method described above you can also select the track parameter and then turn the dial to adjust the value This method lets you edit all track parameters p 79 4 3 Applying the send return effect The track signals sent to the internal mixer can be processed by an effect that is connected internally to the send return loop of the mixer This is called a se
82. algorithm COMP LIMITER module compressor For an explanation of types and parameters see DUAL MIC algorithm ISOLATOR module Xover Lo Xover Hi Mix High Mix Mid Mix Low Divides the signal into three frequency bands and allows individual adjustment of mixing ratio for each band Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Xover Lo 50Hz 16kHz Adjusts low to mid crossover frequency Xover Hi 50Hz 16kHz Adjusts mid to high crossover frequency Mix High Off 24 6 Adjusts high range mixing level Mix Mid Off 24 6 Adjusts mid range mixing level Mix Low Off 24 6 Adjusts low range mixing level 3BAND EQ R module 3BAND EQ For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms MOD DELAY module Depth Rate Mix Mixes a variable pitch shifted component to original sound resulting in full bodied resonating tone Depth Rate Resonance Produces a resonating and strongly undulating sound Rate Color LFO Shift Produces a swooshing sound Depth Rate Clip Periodically varies the volume level Width Rate Clip Shifts the panning position of the sound between left and right Shift Tone Fine Balance Chorus Flanger Phaser Tremolo Auto Pan Pitch This effect shifts the pitch up or down Ring Modulator For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algor
83. and listen to the result of the selected patch HINT The send level is one of the track parameters For information on how to adjust track parameters see page 79 You can also use the cursor up down keys and the status keys to select a track parameter track and then turn the dial to adjust the send level p 79 To switch between the drum bass track use the RHYTHM status key 5 Use the same procedure to adjust the track specific send level for the other send return effect 6 i you want to temporarily turn the send return effect off hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 5 CHORUS DELAY or pad 6 REVERB so that the pad goes out The send return effect setting for that pad changes to Off The second line of the display shows Off To return the setting to press the same pad once more so that it lights up again Z Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key Editing a send return effect patch This section explains how to edit a send return effect patch 1 On the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 5 CHORUS DELAY or pad 6 REVERB so that the pad lights up The patch select screen for the send return effect appears 2 Turn the dial to select the patch HINT If the indication Empty appears instead of the patch name all modules for the patch are set to Off By editing such a patch you can create your own settings from scratch ZOOM HD8
84. channel playing information in a single track NOTE The following files cannot be read Format 1 or Format 2 SMF Files located CD ROM R RW disc not complying to the ISO 9660 Level 2 standard e Files on a CD R RW disc which has not been finalized Reading an SMF into a project By performing the following steps you can read an SMF from a CD ROM R RW disc and load it in a project The maximum number of SMFs per project is 100 NOTE The SMF must have the file extension MID otherwise it will not be recognized 1 insert the CD ROM or CD R RW disc containing the SMF into the CD R RW drive 2 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The indication REC UTILITY appears on the first line and the indication PROJECT on the second line of the display 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SMF on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The menu screen for SMF selection and playback appears 4 Verify that IMPORT is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The names of SMFs on the CD ROM R RW disc are shown 158 Lypc t 31 File name 5 Turn the dial to select the SMF to import NOTE If the desired file is not shown check whether the file is in Format 0 and whether the file extension is MID 6 To execute the import process press the
85. depending on which command was selected in step 4 See the following sections for the respective commands 7 When the editing command has been executed repeatedly press the EXIT key to return to the main screen NOTE After executing an edit command for rewriting the audio data on a track the original data cannot be restored To retain the condition before editing use the capture and swap functions gt p 65 for that track Copying a specified range of data You can copy the audio data of a specified range to a specified position on a specified track V take This action will overwrite the existing data at the destination location The copy source data will be unchanged Copy source track Copy target track 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing and select the COPY command Select the copy source track V take and press the ENTER key The display for specifying the copy start point appears The range start point can be specified minutes seconds milliseconds or in measures beats ticks You can also specify the point using markers p 47 Use the cursor up down keys to switch units ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Track Editing Start BE BG Ba Measures beats ticks 4 DE d L REGI El er position start a 2 Usethe cursor left right keys to move the flashing section of the counter and tu
86. effect and a send return effect The two types can be used simultaneously The characteristics of these effects are described below Insert effect The insert effect is used by inserting it into a specific point in the signal route You can select one of the following locations at which to apply the effect 1 Input of input mixer 2 Any channel of the track mixer 3 Immediately before the MASTER fader For example if you insert the effect into the input mixer the input signal is processed by the effect and the result is recorded on a track of the recorder Alternatively if you insert the effect into a channel of the track mixer the effect processes the playback signal from an audio track or the drum bass track By selecting a position immediately before the MASTER fader you can use the effect to process the final mix before recording on the master track Send return effect The send return effect is internally connected to the send return loop of the mixer section The HD8 HD 16 has two types of send return effects chorus delay CHORUS DELAY and reverb REVERB which can be used simultaneously The send levels of the input mixer or track mixer adjust the effect depth of the send return effect Raising the send level will send the corresponding signal to the input of the effect and the signal processed by the effect will be returned immediately before the MASTER fader and mixed with the original signa
87. existing data will be completely erased and overwritten by the new audio data 6 When you have selected a track V take press the ENTER key A screen for selecting the phrase loop number for formula input appears HINT Ten phrase loops Loop01 Loop10 can be created 7 Turnthe dial to select the desired phrase loop number and press the ENTER key FAST input is now possible ZOOM HD8 HD16 8 Use the keys and pads of the pad section to enter the formula for creating the loop For information on entry procedures refer to page 73 9 When formula input is completed press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows This screen lets you select whether to match phrase playback to the rhythm section measure tempo 10 Turn the dial to select one of the following methods Adjust Off When you select this setting the selected phrase is played continuously independent of the rhythm song bar lines and tempo Default setting 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 measure beat Phrase A Phrase B Adjust Bar When you select this setting phrase playback start is aligned to the measure start of the rhythm song If one measure of the phrase phrase playback range divided by number of measures specified by Measure x parameter is longer than one measure of the rhythm song the phrase is switched when the number of measures specified by the Measure x parameter has played
88. following features Brings together everything you need for complete music production The HD8 HD16 provides all the functionality you need for professional music production hard disk recorder drum bass machine digital mixer effects CD R RW drive and more From creating the rhythm tracks to multitrack recording mixdown and burning an audio CD the HD8 HD16 lets you do it all Recorder section with plenty of tracks The HD8 provides 8 audio tracks mono x 6 stereo x 1 and the HD16 has 16 audio tracks mono x 8 stereo x 4 Because each track has ten virtual tracks V takes you can record multiple takes for important parts such as vocals or guitar solos and select the best take later A full range of editing functions is provided allowing you to copy or move audio data Special functions including time stretch compression pitch compensation and harmonizing are also available Support for a wide range of input sources Input connectors compatible with high impedance sources and 48V phantom power allow the unit to handle any kind of source from electric guitar electric bass and other high impedance instruments to dynamic and condenser microphones as well as synthesizers and other line level equipment 8 track recording mode sub output support lt lt G27 only gt gt The HD16 has an 8 track recording mode that can handle up to 8 signals simultaneously This is great for multi miking a drum setup or recording an entire band in
89. for the HD8 HD16 gt p 20 the last project is automatically saved 1 2 Selecting the rhythm pattern to use The HD8 HD106 has a built in rhythm function that operates in sync with the recorder This lets you use drum sounds drum kits and bass sounds bass programs to create repeated rhythm patterns of several measures By combining various patterns you can create the rhythm accompaniment for an entire song rhythm song The rhythm function can also be used as a metronome or you can leave out the rhythm from the final mix l Verify that the RHYTHM status key is lit Then set the RHYTHM fader and the MASTER fader to 0 dB MASTER DRUM BASS MUTE MIX DOWN PLAY Lit 0 dB RHYTHM MASTER The output level of the drum Kit bass program drum bass track can be adjusted with the RHYTHM fader in the same way as regular tracks To select the track to adjust with the RHYTHM fader press the RHYTHM status key While the key is lit in green the drum track is adjusted While the key is lit in red the bass track is adjusted HINT When the RHYTHM status key is out the drum bass track is muted In this case press the RHYTHM status key so that it is lit in green or orange 2 Hold down the SHIFT key in the pad section and press pad 7 PATTERN Pad 7 PATTERN lights up and the currently selected rhythm pattern is shown on the display 24 3 Press the PLAY gt key in the transport s
90. for vocals and other microphone recordings DUAL MIC An algorithm with two entirely separate mono input and mono output channels LINE An algorithm suitable mainly for recording line level output instruments such as synthesizer or electric piano MASTERING An algorithm suitable for processing the final stereo mixdown signal lt lt CEID Only gt gt 8x COMP EQ An algorithm with 8 separate input output channels Different high pass filter compressor and EQ settings are possible for each channel When you select an algorithm the patch shown on the ZOOM HD8 HD16 Quick Tour second line of the display also changes NOTE lt lt GEID only The 8x COMP EQ algorithm can only be inserted in the input when the 8 track recording function 46 is active 5 Turn the dial to select the patch A total of 310 lt lt 330 gt gt patches are available for the insert effect You can edit these patches if desired to alter the sound or the effect depth The patches available for each algorithm are listed below Algorithm Patch number range CLEAN 0 29 DISTORTION 0 49 55 SIM 0 19 55 0 29 0 49 DUAL 0 49 LINE 0 49 MASTERING 0 29 GEID 8x COMP EQ 0 19 HINT When Empty is shown as the patch name the patch is empty Selecting such a patch will have no effect 6 While playing your instrument at the maximum level readjust the
91. from the phrase pool of another project saved on the hard disk WAV AIFF FOLDER Import an audio file WAV AIFF from WAV AIFF folder on the internal hard disk CD ROM Import an audio file WAV AIFF from a CD ROM R RW disc inserted in the CD R RW drive The subsequent steps will differ depending on the type of source selected for the phrase See the sections for the respective commands After the import operation was carried out the phrase menu appears again on the display If desired you can import another phrase Up to 100 phrases can be included in a project with a duration of 1 second 30 minutes per phrase To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times HINT The name PHxxx yy is automatically assigned to the loaded phrase where xxx is the project number and yy the phrase number Importing a phrase from the current project You can specify a range from any track V take of the current project and use it as a phrase 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic phrase loading steps to select TAKE as import source Then press the ENTER key The indication Import Source appears on the first line and the indication Trackxx yy where xx is the track number and yy the V take number appears on the second line of the display In this condition you can select the import source track and V take 2 Use the cursor left right keys and the status ZOOM HD8 HD16 keys to
92. hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN or pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Press the PROJECT UTILITY key The rhythm utility menu screen appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to select one of the following items to edit and press the ENTER key KIT FILE Import or create a kit file p 112 SAMPLE FILE Import or edit samples assigned to pads p 117 COUNT Change the length of the pre count that is heard during real time input of a rhythm pattern CLICK VOLUME Change the volume level of the metronome that is heard during real time input of a rhythm pattern PAD SENS Pad sensitivity Change the pad sensitivity which determines the volume level in relation to the force with which the pad is struck MIDI Make MIDI related settings p 155 124 IMPORT Import rhythm patterns and rhythm songs from another project saved on the hard disk p 111 MEMORY Check the remaining amount of rhythm pattern and rhythm song memory POSITION Selects whether the drum sound pan setting applies as seen from the drummer or from the listener 4 Turn the dial to edit the setting The screen display and operation will be different for each item For details refer to the sections that follow HINT For information on kit file operations sample settings MIDI settings and importing refer t
93. how to load a phrase into the phrase pool Basic phrase loading steps When loading phrases some steps are similar for each type 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key in the display section The display indication changes as follows 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication PHRASE on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key A screen for selecting the phrase appears on the display Phrase number Phrase name HINT The phrase number 0 is preprogrammed as a rest of 1 measure 4 4 beat This phrase cannot be overwritten 3 Turn the dial to select a number into which the phrase should be loaded If you select an empty phrase number the display shows Empty NOTE If you select a number into which a phrase is already loaded the previous phrase will be erased and replaced by the new phrase 4 Press the PROJECT UTILITY key once more The phrase utility menu for loading phrases and creating phrase loops appears on the display 5 Verify that the indication IMPORT is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The menu for selecting the import source appears on the display 6 Use the cursor left right keys to select one of the following and press the ENTER key TAKE Import a specified range of audio data from any track V take in the currently loaded project PHRASE Import a phrase
94. in minutes and seconds Number of tracks Playing time 5 Press the ENTER key The indication Finalize appears on the second line of the display 6 To carry out the finalizing process press the ENTER key once more The finalizing process starts When the process is finished the display shows Complete 7 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times HINT A CD RW disc can be returned to the blank condition also after finalizing by erasing all data Erasing a CD RW disc The entire information on a CD RW disc audio data or backup data can be erased thereby returning the disc to the blank state l Insert the disc to erase into the integrated CD R RW drive 2 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 1 CD R RW The menu for various CD R RW functions appears 3 Verify that AUDIO CD is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key ZOOM HD8 HD16 HINT A CD RW disc can also be erased from the backup menu gt p 146 Bring up the indication BACK UP on the first line of the display and the indication CD RW ERASE on the second line Then press the ENTER key The following steps for erasing are the same 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication CD RW ERASE on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows
95. in out until the key is lit in red 2 Raise the fader of this track to a suitable position 3 Use the ON OFF key to select the input and then play your instrument connected to the input jack and use the GAIN control and REC LEVEL control to adjust the recording level 4 Locate a point slightly before the intended punch in point and press the PLAY gt key to begin recorder playback 5 When you come to the punch in point press the REC 0 key or press the foot switch The REC key lights up and track recording begins from that location 6 When you come to the intended punch out point press the REC 0 key or the foot ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Recorder switch once more The REC key goes out and the unit switches from recording to playback 7 To stop the recorder press the STOP lil key 8 To check the newly recorded content locate to a point before the punch in point and press the PLAY gt key Using auto punch in out Auto punch in out is a function that lets you specify beforehand the region to be re recorded Punch in will occur automatically when you reach the starting location In point and punch out will occur automatically when you reach the ending location Out point This is convenient when you cannot operate the HD8 HD16 because you are playing the instrument yourself or when very fast playback record switching is required In order to perform auto punch in out
96. in step 2 to specify the erase range end point If you press the PLAY P key at this point the specified range will be played 5 Press the ENTER key The indication Erase appears on the second line of the display 6 To execute the erase operation press the ENTER key When the erase operation is completed the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Trimming a specified range of data You can erase the audio data of a specified range and adjust the data start end point trimming For example when preparing to burn the master track onto a CD R RW disc you might want to remove unwanted portions at the start and the end of the V take that will be used NOTE When data before a specified section are erased trimmed the remaining audio data will move up by that amount Therefore the timing may become mismatched with regard to other tracks 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing and select the TRIM command Select the track V take to trim and press the ENTER key The display for specifying the trimming start point appears For information on switching the display units see page 51 2 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section of the counter and turn the dial to specify the trimming start point All data before the po
97. input mono track EFFECT i Using stereo input or mono input x 2 insert effect on stereo input stereo track EFFECT Using mono input insert effect on stereo input stereo track EFFECT i Signal flow with insert effect at output Sending insert effect output to stereo track or MASTER fader EFFECT 130 Sending insert effect output to mono track EFFECT lt lt GEID only gt gt With the 8x COMP EQ algorithm the 8 channel signals are processed separately by the high pass filter compressor and EQ effects The input and output for each channel therefore is always mono Editing the insert effect patches The effect modules of the insert effect have various effect parameters that can be adjusted to make detailed changes to the character of the effect By editing the effect parameters you can obtain the desired sonic result For some effect modules you can also change the effect type For example the MODULATION DELAY effect module of the MIC algorithm provides 13 effect types such as CHORUS ENSEMBLE FLANGER etc When you change the effect type the effect parameter arrangement also changes Effect MODULATION module DELAY v CHORUS ENSEMBLE FLANGER Effect type Depth Effect Rate parameters Resonance Manual This section explains how to edit the effect type and effect parameters for the currently selected patch NOTE The content of the algorithm itself
98. insert effect When you press this key the current position is shown on the second line of the display In the default condition of a project the insert effect insert position is Input If another position is selected turn the dial to select Input 2 Press the EXIT key to return to the main screen 3 Hold down the SHIFT key in the pad section and press pad 4 INSERT EFFECT While you hold down the SHIFT key pad 4 INSERT EFFECT is lit The first line of the display shows the currently selected algorithm and the second line shows the patch effect program number and name ZOOM HD8 HD16 EFFECT TUNER INSERT EFFECT Algorithm i LLEBH Ri I Piin Patch number Patch name A combination of effect modules that can be used simultaneously is called an algorithm The insert effect of the HD8 HD16 has 8 lt lt 179 9 gt gt different algorithms for different applications Patches can be saved individually NOTE If pad 4 INSERT EFFECT does not light although the SHIFT key is pressed the insert effect is set to the bypass off condition Off is shown on the first line of the display Press the pad again to light it 4 Use the cursor up down keys to select an algorithm for the insert effect The following algorithms are available CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM BASS These algorithms are suitable for recording guitar bass MIC An algorithm suitable
99. is currently loaded the lowest numbered project will automatically be loaded after the erase operation has been completed Changing the project name This operation lets you edit the name of the currently loaded project 1 Refer to steps 1 3 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication NAME on the second line of the display Then press the ENTER key The current project name is shown on the display Project Harme PR TELS bs 2 To edit the name use the cursor left right keys to move the cursor flashing part to the character you want to change and turn the dial or use the pads keys of the pad section to select a character For details on the entry procedure and available characters see page 37 To return to the main screen after editing the name press the EXIT key several times Protecting a project This operation lets you write protect the currently loaded project which disables project storing and editing When protect is On the following operations will be not be possible e Erasing a project Editing or recording on the recorder Changing the V take Editing a patch including module on off Recording or editing a rhythm pattern or rhythm song Saving deleting scenes making marker settings etc Creating a phrase loop ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Projects Creating editing a drum kit 1 Refer to steps 1 3 of Basic procedure to bring up the indicatio
100. is necessary to first select a string number and then tune the strings one by one 1 Connect the guitar or bass that you want to tune to a high impedance compatible INPUT jack and press the ON OFF key for the input to which the instrument is connected so that the key is lit in red On the HD8 the INPUT jack 1 is high impedance compatible On the HD16 the INPUT jacks 1 and 2 are high impedance compatible Verify that the Hi Z switch is set to On 2 Hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 4 INSERT EFFECT several times until the pad is out Tuner type GUITAR The insert effect is bypassed and the display indication changes as follows 3 Press the ENTER key to activate the tuner function and use the cursor left right keys to select the tuner type While the tuner function is active the cursor left right keys serve to switch the tuner type Tuner types and notes for each string are listed in the table below For example when you select the tuner type GUITAR the display shows the following information Tuner type dlia Somni oma E EE e P E um Lh String Target note for string number String number 4 Play the indicated string as an open string and perform tuning HINT You can change the reference pitch default setting center A 440 Hz The procedure is the same as when using the chromatic tuner 5 Use the cursor up down keys to select other s
101. is shown During recording you can use the cursor left right keys to call up and edit the Source level and panning Chorus 1 3 level and panning and the Feeling parameter The settings will be reflected in the recorded result ZOOM HD8 HD16 HINT When playing the harmony the drum bass track will also be played Use the faders as required to adjust the level 12 when recording has progressed to the point where you want harmony generation to stop press the STOP W key The indication Harmonize appears on the second line of the display 13 e To carry out harmony generation press the ENTER key The audio data of the specified range are written When the process is complete the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Generating a 1 part harmony from a specified range of audio data You can specify a Key and Scale and shift the pitch of the audio data by a third up or down to create a 1 part harmony This is called the Duo Harmony function The pitch shifted audio data can be either added to the source material or written to another track V take For example when Key C and Scale Major is specified and shift upwards is selected for the Duo Harmony function the following harmony will be created Source track Key Scale C Major Shift direction up
102. key in the pad section and press pad 9 KIT PROG so that the pad lights up When the pad is lit the scale and key range selection screen for the bass program is shown 4 necessary change the scale and key range settings To change the scale type use the cursor left right keys To change the key range turn the dial When the setting is completed press the EXIT key to return to the rhythm pattern selection screen 5 Hold down the REC 9 key and press the PLAY gt key A four beat pre count one measure is heard and rhythm pattern recording starts During recording a click sound metronome indicating the current tempo beat setting is heard The current position in the rhythm pattern is shown on the display in measures beats ticks HINT The beat and the volume of the pre count clicks can be changed p 124 Hit the pads while listening to the metronome Your performance on the pads will be recorded as a bass sequence according to the quantization setting The duration for which you hit the pads will also be recorded When you reach the end of the pattern the unit automatically returns to the first measure and real time input continues To change the scale and key range during real time input Hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 9 KIT PROG to bring up the scale and key range selection screen Press the cursor left right keys for the scale or turn the dial for the key range To
103. key so that the key goes out The auto punch in out function is turned off and the In point and Out point settings are discarded 42 Recording several tracks on a master track mixdown function This section explains how to play recorded audio tracks as well as drum bass track sounds and record them as a stereo mix on a master track mixdown About the master track The master track is a set of stereo tracks that is separate from the normal tracks The most common use of the master track is as a track on which the end result of a mixdown process is recorded The contents of the master track can then be used to create an audio CD When you switch the master track to the recording condition the signal after passing the MASTER fader the same signal as available from the MASTER OUTPUT jacks is sent to the master track The HD8 HD16 offers one master track for each project Similar to the regular tracks the master track also has ten virtual tracks V takes This allows you to record different mixes on several V takes and select the optimum take later It is possible to convert the contents of the master track into a stereo WAV file If you copy this file via the USB interface to a computer you can use it to create a CD with the software and CD R RW drive of the computer The illustration below shows the signal flow for recording on the master track of the HD8 MASTER OUT
104. of a rhythm pattern 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN so that the pad lights up The rhythm pattern selection screen appears 2 Turn the dial to select the rhythm pattern to use as copy source 3 Press the FUNCTION key twice The rhythm pattern number rhythm pattern name from which to copy is shown Copy source rhythm pattern number name 4 Press the ENTER key The rhythm pattern that will be used as copy destination is shown Coes Lao Ha das Frets Copy destination rhythm pattern number name NOTE When you select an existing rhythm pattern as destination it will be overwritten with the content of the copy source 5 Turn the dial to select the number of the rhythm pattern to use as copy destination and press the ENTER key The indication Copy appears on the display 6 To execute the copy process press the ENTER key When the copy operation is completed the display returns to the rhythm pattern selection screen with the copy destination as the selected pattern By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time 7 Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key ZOOM HD8 HD16 Deleting a rhythm pattern This section explains how to delete all data from a specified rhythm pattern returning it to the blank state NOTE Once deleted a rhythm pattern cannot be
105. of all pads is erased from the drum sequence stoneart DRUM BASS MUTE De FUNCTION Bass sequence 8 When you have finished real time recording press the STOP W key Rhythm pattern recording will stop Press the PLAY gt key to hear the pattern that you recorded 95 Reference Rhythm Drum sequence step input For step input you enter each note separately while the rhythm pattern is in the stop condition This makes it easy to enter even complex drum patterns or bass lines that might be difficult to achieve with real time input For drum sequence step input you specify the step length interval to next note or rest using the quantize value Then you enter notes and rests When you hit a pad and then press the REPEAT STEP key playing note information is entered at that point and the step advances by an interval corresponding to the current quantize value The intensity with which you hit the pad is also recorded If you only press the REPEAT STEP key no playing information is entered but the step advances by an interval corresponding to the current quantize value This becomes a rest see illustration below 1 Atthe rhythm pattern screen select an empty rhythm pattern number If necessary set the bar length time signature and quantize value p 92 2 Press the RHYTHM status key repeatedly until the key is l
106. of the display Pressing the ENTER key once more returns the module to the active condition HINT lt lt CEID only When editing a patch of the 8xCOMP EQ algorithm it is not possible to turn the effects for all channels on and off together However when the setting for the respective effect is shown you can turn it off for the current channel by pressing the ENTER key NOTE The modules included in TOTAL cannot be turned off 9 Repeat steps 4 8 as necessary to edit other modules 10 e To adjustthe patch level the final volume of the patch use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication TOTAL on the first line and the indication Patch Level on the second line of the display and then turn the dial The patch level can be adjusted in the range from 1 to 30 11 When you have finished editing press the EXIT key The insert effect patch select screen appears again NOTE Keep in mind that if you select another patch without first storing the edited patch the changes will be lost If you want to keep the results of your editing session refer to the following section 132 Storing swapping insert effect patches A patch that you have edited can be stored in any location of the same algorithm You can also store an existing patch in another location to create a copy of that patch Interchanging the position of patches swapping is also possible T Atthe patch select screen or edit sc
107. on the HD8 HD16 2 To supply phantom power to a condenser mic use the INPUT jack s and set the respective 48V switch to On engaged 3 16 Monitor system DIGITAL OUT Headphones QO REC LEVEL 1 Headphones 4 To prevent damage to the speakers of your monitor system turn off the power of the system or turn the volume all the way down before making connections 5 The PHONES jacks carry the same signal as the MASTER OUT connectors The output level can be adjusted with the knob below the jack ZOOM HD8 HD16 audio components or amplified speakers etc Connections 4 Monitor system audio components or amplified speakers etc r Synthesizer or sampler etc Headphones Dynamic or condenser microphone Headphones 3 oO Oleole ole oje oje oeo L Headphone amplifier DIGITALOUT wer eur 2 INPUTS INPUTS Wer nour s ASTER OUT PHONES sverto SUEOUT s e e e e HOS 9 e Em o 4 Headphones 6 lt lt only gt gt The STEREO SUB OUT jack normally carries the same signal as the MASTER OUT connectors You can t
108. on the second line of the display then press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 3 To change the number of pre count beats use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication COUNT on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The current pre count setting is shown d Pre count beats The following settings are available Off The pre count is turned off 1 8 A pre count of 1 8 beats is heard Special A special pre count as follows is heard et tp ft sd 4 Turn the dial to make a selection When the setting is complete press the EXIT key twice to return to the main screen 5 To change the volume of the pre count use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication VOLUME on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Recorder The current pre count volume is shown Pre count volume Turn the dial to set the volume 0 15 7 When the setting is complete press the EXIT key to return to the main screen If you initiate the recording procedure in this condition the selected number of pre count beats will be heard at the selected volume 49 Reference Track Editing This section explains how to edit audio data contained on the audio tracks or the master track There are two major types of editing functions specifying a range within a track for e
109. one go In addition to the regular stereo output the HD16 also provides a STEREO SUB OUT which can be used to supply a separate mix for example for monitoring during recording or to send a signal to a separate effect device Bounce function allows mixdown of all tracks The bounce function makes it easy to consolidate multiple tracks into one or two tracks with just a few keystrokes Play all tracks add the drum bass sound and bounce the result onto two empty V takes If you select the master track as bounce target internal mixdown is possible without using up any of the regular audio tracks Rhythm function provides guide rhythm or accompaniment The built in rhythm function offers more than 400 types of accompaniment patterns from the internal drum bass sound generator What s more you can create your own original patterns using real time or step input Patterns can be used as a guide rhythm during recording or programmed together with chords to create an entire rhythm song In addition to conventional step input the HD8 HD16 features an innovative concept called FAST developed by ZOOM which lets you quickly build songs by using simple formula Instead of the built in drum sound generator a part of an audio track or an audio file from a CD ROM can also be used Add special effects to a song or play patterns and songs with your very own sound ZOOM HD8 HD16 7 Introduction Phrase loop function for pasting audio material Usin
110. recording track track 1 has been selected 1 MASTER INPUT 1 Track 2 For stereo tracks the parameters for left and right are set to the same values except for the recording target V take and phase selection This is useful for recording from stereo sources such as synthesizers or CD players 28 HINT Normally you can select up to two tracks simultaneously To select two mono tracks press the first status key of an odd even numbered pair so that it is lit in red and then hold down that key and press the other key so that it also is lit in red Also if the input signal is mono selecting a pair of stereo tracks as target will ensure that the left right spread added by certain insert effect settings is preserved in recording e lt lt QEID only gt gt You can also record 8 tracks simultaneously p 46 2 Set fader 1 and the MASTER fader to 0 dB Then adjust the volume of the monitoring system while playing your instrument 3 To begin recording press the ZERO M4 key to return to the beginning of the song Then hold down the REC 9 key and press the PLAY gt key ZERO REW FF ES 4 The REC key and PLAY gt key light up and a pre count of 4 beats is heard Then recording will begin Record your instrument play while listening to the guide rhythm from the rhythm section STOP 3 gr E eu SCRUB HINT
111. restored Use this function with care 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN The rhythm pattern selection screen appears 2 Turn the dial to select the rhythm pattern to delete 3 Press the FUNCTION key The display indication changes as follows Make sure that the rhythm pattern number name shown is that of the pattern you want to delete DELETE PHTTERH Ha B f Rhythm pattern number name to erase 4 Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 5 To execute the delete process press the ENTER key once more When the delete operation is completed the display returns to the rhythm pattern selection screen By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key Creating a rhythm song The HD8 HD16 allows you to save up to 10 rhythm songs per project Each rhythm song can have up to 999 rhythm pattern measures By specifying the rhythm pattern playing sequence and adding chord and tempo information you can create a rhythm song The following two methods are available for entering rhythm ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm pattern information Step input With this method you create rhythm patterns one by one by specifying a pattern and the number of measures Input can be performed at any point in th
112. returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time HINT To paste the same range repeatedly use the phrase loop function 2 p 67 Moving a specified range of data You can move the audio data of a specified range to a specified position on a specified track V take This action will overwrite the existing data at the destination location The move source data will be erased Move source track 3 Move p E Move target track 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing and select the MOVE command Select the move source track V take and press the ENTER key The display for specifying the move start point appears For information on switching the display units see page 51 2 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section of the counter and turn the dial to specify the move start point 3 Press the ENTER key The second line of the display now lets you specify the move range end point 4 Use the same procedure as in step 2 to specify the move range end point 52 If you press the PLAY key at this point the specified range will be played 5 Press the ENTER key The first line of the display now shows Move Destination and the second line Trackxx yy where xx is the track number and yy
113. right keys to bring up the indication SEQUENCE PLAY on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows showing the number and name of the currently selected playlist In this condition you can select a playlist If there are no existing playlists the display shows Empty Playlist number Playlist name ZOOM HD8 HD16 5 Turn the dial to select the playlist for which you want to register projects and press the EDIT key The screen for registering projects in the playlist appears The indication End of List denotes the end of the playlist When the playlist is empty the indication End of List appears at the beginning of the list Track 1 Turn the dial to select the project to register at the beginning of the project The display indication changes as follows Playback number Position in the sequence where the project will be played Sequence number Total number of of displayed playlist registered projects Le 1 4274 Ho 1 PRE Project number and project name Number and name of the project registered in the playlist HINT You can use the cursor up down keys to check the duration of the V take selected for the master track of the registered project in minutes seconds and milliseconds NOTE Projects in which an unrecorded V take is selected for the master track cannot be registered in a playlist If the name of a desi
114. screen By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key Assigning a name to a rhythm song You can edit the name of any rhythm song as follows 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm song selection screen appears 2 e Turn the dial to select the rhythm song whose name you want to edit and press the EDIT key The rhythm song edit menu appears a 4 ee 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication NAME on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key In this condition the selected rhythm song name can be changed 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring the cursor to the character to change and use ZOOM HD8 HD16 the dial and the pads keys of the pad section to select a character For details on entering characters see page 37 5 Repeat step 4 until the name is as desired Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Importing a rhythm pattern rhythm song from another project This section explains how to selectively or globally import rhythm pattern data and rhythm song data from another project that was saved on the hard disk NOTE The import process will overwrite existing rhythm patterns rhythm songs in the currentl
115. sound 4 Detune original sound doubling 12 Complete fourth up original sound complete fifth down original sound 5 Original sound 1 octave higher 13 0 Hz original sound 1 octave up 6 1 octave higher original sound 14 1 octave up gt 0 Hz original sound 7 Original sound 2 octaves lower 15 0 Hz original sound 1 octave up original sound 8 2 octaves lower original sound 16 1 octave up original sound 0 Hz original sound ZNR module Threshold ZOOM original noise reduction for reducing noise in playing pauses without affecting the overall tone Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description T Adjusts ZNR sensitivity For maximum noise reduction set value as high as possible Threshold Of 1 30 without causing the sound to decay unnaturally Volume Pedal module Min Volume Volume Pedal Allows volume adjustment with the expression pedal Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Min Volume 0 10 Adjusts the minimum volume when using the expression pedal for volume control 182 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Appendix BASS algorithm COMP LIMITER module oo For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms EFX module Position Resonance Dry Mix Auto Wah z E z chide This effect varies the wah action according to the intensity of
116. status keys and the dial to select the track V take to use as move destination and press the ENTER key The indication Move appears on the display If audio data exist at the move destination the indication Overwrite is shown When the move operation is performed these data will be overwritten 3 To execute the move operation press the ENTER key once more When the move operation is completed the unit returns to the V take selection menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time HD16 only Moving V takes of tracks 1 8 to tracks 9 16 You can move the contents of the selected V takes for tracks 1 8 to tracks 9 16 in a single operation This action will overwrite any existing data on the destination V takes The data on the move source V takes will be erased This function is convenient to move V takes recorded with the 8 track recording function to tracks 9 16 to create room for recording more instruments 1 Reterto steps 1 6 of Basic steps for V take editing and bring up the indication MOVE V TAKE on the display ZOOM HD8 HD16 2 Use the cursor left right keys to select Track1 Track8 as source and press the ENTER key When you select Track1 Track8 as move source the indication MOVE V TAKE on the first line of the display changes to 8TRACKS MOVE When
117. stretch compress effect becomes the editing end point 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing and select the TIME STRETCH command Select the track V take for time stretch compress and press the ENTER key The indication Time Stretch Dst appears on the first line of the display In this condition you can select a track V take on which to place the audio data after time stretch compress E 2 Use the cursor left right keys or the status keys to select the target track and use the dial to select the V take number The display indication changes as follows Stretch ratio Tempo i 108 BE This screen lets you specify the ratio for time stretch compress in two units as listed below Stretch ratio 96 Expresses the length of the track after time stretch compress Tempo BPM Sets the tempo beats per minute after time stretch compress using the tempo set in the rhythm song as reference In the default condition the current tempo of the rhythm section is shown 3 Use the cursor left right keys to select the ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Track Editing unit for making the time stretch compress setting The selected unit flashes 4 Turn the dial to make the time stretch compress setting When you change one item the other item also changes accordingly The setting range of 50 150 for the stretch compress ratio cannot be
118. switch to a drum sequence during real time input Press the RHYTHM status key repeatedly until the key is lit in green To pause real time input Press the REC key during recording so that the key flashes You can now switch the range and scale or tap the pads to check which note is assigned to each pad To resume recording press the REC 6 key once more so that the key is again permanently lit ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm HINT Instead of tapping the pads you can also input a bass pattern by using an external MIDI controller connected to the HD8 HD16 s MIDI IN connector After concluding real time input you can change the quantize setting and then record on top of the existing sequence Changing the quantize value will not affect the existing playing information Z To edit the recorded contents during real time input proceed as follows To erase the performance of a specific pad While holding down the FUNCTION key press the pad whose note you want to erase While you are holding down both the FUNCTION key and the pad the notes of the corresponding pad is erased from the rhythm pattern Bass sequence ix g De rM 7 2 a d e e To erase the performance of all pads While holding down the FUNCTION key press the RHYTHM status key While you are holding down both keys the performance
119. that is effect module combination and placement cannot be edited 1 On the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 4 INSERT EFFECT so that the pad lights up The insert effect algorithm and patch select screen appears 2 Use the cursor up down keys to select the algorithm with the patch to edit and then turn the dial to select the patch ZOOM HD8 HD16 HINT If the indication Empty appears instead of the patch name all modules for the patch are set to Off By editing such a patch you can create your own settings from scratch 3 Press the EDIT key The first line of the display shows the currently selected effect module This means that the patch can now be edited Effect module c or EL 4 Use the cursor left right keys to select the effect module to edit The indication shown on the first line for the various effect modules changes as shown in the table below The table applies to the case when the effect module is On When the effect module is Off the indication Off appears on the second line of the display HINT To edit the ZNR VOLUME PEDAL module bring up the indication TOTAL on the first line of the display n the DUAL MIC algorithm the modules assigned to the L and R channels can be edited separately The indication L on the first line of the display means that the module for the left channel is selected The
120. the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication COPY on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key ZOOM HD8 HD16 The display indication changes as follows 5 Turn the dial to select the kit file to use as copy source and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows HINT When a file with the same name is present in the same folder on the hard disk a 2 symbol appears on the display This is a warning that the file cannot be created You must first change the name from this screen For details on entering characters See page 37 Note that available characters are limited You can change the name of the kit file later p 116 6 To execute the copy process press the ENTER key once more Deleting a kit file You can delete no longer needed kit files from the current project HINT Once you delete the kit file it cannot be recovered Use this operation with care 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN or pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Press the PROJECT UTILITY key The rhythm utility menu screen appears 3 Verify that the indication KIT FILE is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm L T T C
121. the dial to select the On setting 169 Reference Other Functions DIGITAL PROTECT Off ct BH DIGITAL PROTECT On TE TI HD8 HD16 DIGITAL OUT jack HD8 HD16 DIGITAL OUT jack Mixdown Mixdown Y Y oo MD DAT recorder MD DAT recorder Digital Digital copying is gt lt copying is y possible y not possible oo MD DAT recorder MD DAT recorder 5 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Switching the level meter display type The level meter on the top panel can indicate the level of the signal after passing through the faders post fader or the signal before passing through the faders pre fader You can change the setting as follows HINT lt lt GEID only gt gt When sending the signal of a given track inputto the STEREO SUB OUT jack the signal before the fader is sent By switching the level meter to the pre fader setting you can monitor the signal level sent to the STEREO SUB OUT jack 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The indication REC UTILITY appears on the first line of the display and PROJECT
122. the function transport section A menu for editing audio data in V take units appears 5 Repeatedly press the FUNCTION key to call up the desired command The following editing commands are available ERASE V TAKE Frase the audio data on a specified track V take COPY V TAKE Copy the audio data of a specified track V take to another track V take ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Track Editing MOVE V TAKE Move the audio data of a specified track V take to another track V take HINT lt lt Gram gt gt When you have called up MOVE V TAKE and use the cursor left right keys to select Track1 Track 8 as source you can move the contents of tracks 1 8 to tracks 9 16 in one operation The first line of the display shows 8TRACKS MOVE in this case EXCHANGE V TAKE Exchange the audio data of a specified track V take with the data of another track V take IMPORT V TAKE Import any track V take from another project from a CD ROM R RW disc inserted in the CD R RW drive or import an audio file WAV AIFF from the internal hard disk HINT If necessary you can also change your selection of track and V take from this screen Press the ENTER key The subsequent steps will differ depending on which command was selected in step 5 See the following sections for the respective commands 7 When the editing command has been executed repeatedly press the EXIT key
123. the input signal will be sent straight to the MASTER fader In this condition the following parameters can be adjusted 76 Input signal panning Send return effect intensity HINT lt lt Gram only In the 8 track recording mode you can set the panning value and send level for each input Track mixer Serves to process the playback signals of the recorder audio tracks and the sound of the drum bass track and to mix these signals to stereo The mixer allows you to adjust the volume with faders and set panning and EQ for each track The track mixer lets you adjust the following parameters for each track Track volume Track panning Track phase e V take used for the track audio tracks only High frequency range EQ boost cut amount Mid frequency range EQ boost cut amount Low frequency range EQ boost cut amount Send return effect intensity Stereo link 5 p 82 settings mono audio tracks lt lt only gt gt Signal level sent to STEREO SUB OUT jack HINT On stereo tracks and the drum track parameter settings except phase and V take number audio tracks only are linked for the L R channels ZOOM HD8 HD16 Recorder section GLE Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 r Tracks 7 8 From directly after MASTER fader Master track 4 To directly before MASTER fader Ba
124. to return to the main screen NOTE After executing an edit command for rewriting the audio data on a track the original data cannot be restored To retain the condition before editing use the capture and swap functions p 65 for that track Erasing a V take You can erase the audio data on a specified V take The V take is returned to the non recorded condition Erase IN 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for V take editing to select the track V take to erase and bring up the indication ERASE V TAKE on the display Then press the ENTER key The indication Erase appears on the display 2 To execute the erase operation press the 61 Reference Track Editing ENTER key once more When the erase operation is completed the unit returns to the V take selection screen By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Copying a V take You can copy the audio data of a specified V take to any other V take This action will overwrite any existing data on the destination V take The data on the copy source V take will be unchanged Copy source track Copy destination track 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for V take editing to select the track V take to copy and bring up the indication COPY V TAKE on the display Then press the ENTER key A screen f
125. to the condition of step 5 press the EXIT key If necessary listen to the V take to verify that the correct V take is selected NOTE Unrecorded V takes of the master track cannot be selected Z Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows CD Tracki Burry The indication CD Trackxx is shown on the first line of the display where xx is the track number When adding to a CD R RW disc this indication lets you check which track of the project will be written 8 To carry out the write process press the ENTER key once more By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time When writing is complete the display shows Complete 9 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times By repeating steps 2 8 you can add audio data to the disc 139 Reference Creating a CD HINT When adding tracks a blank of 2 seconds will automatically be inserted between tracks on the disc As long as the finalizing operation has not been performed the CD R RW disc cannot be played on an ordinary CD player For information on how to play an unfinalized CD R RW disc on the HD8 HD16 refer to page 143 Creating an audio CD by album This method involves creating a list for the audio CD called an album which combines multiple projects saved on the hard disk The CD R RW disc is then written in a
126. was finalized Discs created using CD RW media may not be playable on an ordinary CD player Cannot write audio data to CD R RW disc If the disc was already finalized no more data can be added to it Cannot perform backup Check whether audio data have already been written to the CD R RW disc Such a disc cannot be used for backup Cannot read a backup spanning several discs When a project backup spans several discs insert disc number 1 When the entire hard disk was backed up insert the first disc that contains data of the desired project Other problems Cannot save a project The project cannot be saved if the write protect setting is on Turn protect off p 153 Cannot read an audio file from CD ROM or CD R RW Check whether the audio file has the correct extension WAV or AIF 178 An audio file from a CD R RW that has not been finalized cannot be read Cannot record an external recorder connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack Check whether the digital input has been selected as recording source on the external recorder Also make sure that the external recorder has locked to the sampling frequency of the input signal Make sure that the external recorder supports the S P DIF audio format Cannot create a new project or copy a project If the display indicates Project Full the project memory has been used to maximum capacity Delete unneeded projects to free up memor
127. when a project contains a number of songs that were recorded live you can set a mark at the beginning of each song so that these will be recorded as different tracks on the CD This will enable easy searching and jumping between tracks NOTE To use the marker based track separation function at least two marks including the project start mark 00 must be set 1 Load the project that you want to split into multiple tracks and set marks at the points where the tracks should be separated Marker based track separation can only be enabled or disabled for the entire project Delete any unnecessary marks beforehand 2 Perform steps 1 7 of Creating an audio CD by album select the disc at once DAO write method and bring up the album screen Hi 3 Use the cursor left right keys and the dial to register projects for the album 4 Use the cursor left right keys to select a project that is to be divided into multiple tracks 5 Press the MARK key in the control section Marks contained in this project will be used as PQ subcodes 142 The indication PQ and a marker icon appear on the second line of the display By pressing the MARK key again you can return to the previous condition The marker enable disable selection can be made at any time while the album screen is shown If the mark function is enabled for the project registered as track 1 of the audio CD the following indication app
128. will be erased and replaced by the copy source phrase Take care not to accidentally delete a phrase 6 To carry out the copy process press the ENTER key once more The phrase is copied and the phrase screen appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time 72 Deleting a phrase You can return a phrase to the blank empty condition as follows NOTE Once deleted a phrase cannot be restored Use this function with care 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key in the display section The indication REC UTILITY appears on the first line of the display and PROJECT is shown on the second line 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication PHRASE on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The phrase screen appears on the display 3 Turn the dial to select the phrase to erase 1 1 4 Press the FUNCTION key in the function transport section once to bring up the indication DELETE PHRASE on the first line of the display Then press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 5 To carry out the delete process press the ENTER key The phrase is deleted and the phrase screen appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time ZOOM H
129. will be repeated ZOOM HD8 HD16 NOTE When a backup spans several discs the discs must be used in the same order for restore Be sure to note the disc number on the case and label of the disc HINT When the disc has been ejected it is possible to abort the backup operation To do this press the EXIT key while the Insert indication is shown The indication will change to Cancel Press the ENTER key to terminate the process 10 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Saving all projects to CD R RW disc You can save all projects on the hard disk to CD R RW media for backup If the total size of all projects is larger than the capacity of one CD R RW disc the backup will automatically extend over multiple volumes with lower numbered projects being placed PRJ 000 Disc 1 PRJ 001 on lower numbered discs PRJ 000 5 e 00N PRJ 002 gt Disc 2 BRJG03 PRJ 002 004 Backup HD8 HD16 PRJ 002 PRJ 003 Disc 3 PRJ 004 NOTE Also if projects were saved in one operation restoring will be on a single project basis l Insert a CD R RW disc into the integrated CD R RW drive To back up projects use a blank CD R RW disc or a CD RW disc that has been completely erased 2 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 1 CD R RW The menu for various CD R RW functions appears ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Creating a CD
130. without waiting for the end of the phrase If one measure of the phrase is shorter than one measure of the rhythm song there will be a blank until the measure where playback switches to the next phrase 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 measure beat Phrase A Measure x2 Phrase B Measure x1 Adjust Bar amp Length When you select this setting the phrase length is adjusted so that the measures of the rhythm song and the phrase are matched Pitch will not change ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Phrase Looping 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 measure beat Phrase A Measure x2 Phrase B Measure x1 NOTE When selecting Adjust Bar or Adjust Bar amp Length verify that the Measure x parameter for each phrase is set to a suitable number of measures If the setting is inappropriate the rhythm song and phrase will not synchronize properly f Adjust Bar amp Length is selected and the expansion contraction ratio exceeds a certain range 50 150 the indication Out of Range appears and the results may not be as expected 11 Press the ENTER key The indication Create appears on the display 12 e To carry out the phrase loop writing process press the ENTER key once more The phrase loop is written When the process is completed the display reverts to the phrase screen By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time
131. you press the ENTER key in this condition the destination tracks are shown NOTE When 8TRACKS MOVE is shown on the first line of the display and you have pressed the ENTER key the destination is fixed to Track9 Track16 The move source will the currently selected V takes of tracks 1 8 and the move destination will be the currently selected V takes of tracks 9 16 3 Press the ENTER key The indication Move appears on the display If audio data exist at the move destination the indication Overwrite is shown When the move operation is performed these data will be overwritten 4 To execute the move operation press the ENTER key once more When the move operation is completed the unit returns to the V take selection menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Exchanging V takes You can exchange the audio data of two specified V takes Exchange 1 Reterto steps 1 6 of Basic steps for V take editing to select the track V take to exchange and bring up the indication EXCHANGE on the display Then press the ENTER key A screen for selecting the exchange destination track V take appears on the display ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Track Editing 2 Use the cursor left right keys status keys and the dial to select th
132. you the option of using on samples on a CD ROM disc or parts of an audio track as building blocks 7 L TOM1 TOM2 TOM3 EN ow TUNER SEND RETURN EFFECT L 4 5 D CRASH RIDE OPEN HAT x 1 FORS 2 3 KICK SNARE CLOSED HAT CONTROL SURFACE 0 A bass program is a single bass sound such as an electric bass or acoustic bass which can be played as a scale with the pads on the top panel or via an external MIDI keyboard The HD8 HD16 has 11 bass programs You can choose one of these and play it manually or use it as a sound source for pattern play 6 9 1 85 2 3 EU PROG F o to 1 3 ZOOM HD8 HD16 The rhythm section of the HD8 HD16 lets you select a drum kit or a bass program and play it with the pads You switch the sound with the RHYTHM status key When the key is lit in green the drum kit is selected When it is lit in red the bass program is selected RHYTHM status key MASTER DRUM BASS MUTE MIX DOWN PLAY Lit in green Drum kit Lit in red Bass program RHYTHM MASTER RHYTHM fader The output signal from the drum kit drum track and the output signal from the bass program bass track are sent to the internal mixer where you can independently adjust the volume panning balance EQ and other parameter
133. 06 48 103 Note d eae oe ida bet 97 98 Pad play information 94 95 PIOIGBEUU es ore d Run 152 Rhythm pattern information 103 Specified data range 52 61 EV6DE rS 102 ar Factory initialize 172 173 53 Fader section 8 14 Fader section HD16 15 FAST input Phrase lgOD ou caes ed rto Rec 73 Rhythm song vg 104 Finalize 2555455 24 144 Foot switch function 169 Function transport section 15 BH Hard disk maintenance Basic 171 Format hard 173 System file 172 Test repair internal hard disk 172 Harmony generate 57 HARMONY 57 Import A dio ODs 145 Audio 63 Kit file sees a ern Aes 115 Pate ices in EE 136 68 ans deed os 143 Rhythm song rhythm pattern 111 Sample tee ds eae hed 121 neige aha 158 WAV AIFF file 70 Importing an audio CD into a project Sr hos Wad aba aye AR NIS 145 2 41 Input 76 Input section 8
134. 1 2 Asian Loops Ry 05 1C Asian percussion loop 1 3 Ry 05 1D Asian percussion loop 2 Ry 05 1E Asian percussion loop 3 Sg 01 1A Industrial drum loop Sg 01 1B Industrial break Sg 01 1C Industrial G amp B break Hardcore Loop Sg 01 1D Industrial guitar Sg 01 2A Big beat drum loop Sg 01 2B Big beat bass loop Sg 01 2C Big beat FX loop Sg 02 1A Hiphop track 1 1 Sg 02 1B Hiphop track 1 2 Sg 02 2A Hiphop track 2 1 Sg 02 2B Hiphop track 2 2 Sg 03 1A Drum loop Sg 03 1B Bass loop Sg 04 1A Dub drum loop Sg 04 1B Dub bass loop Sg 04 1C Dub guitar loop Sg 04 2A Dub drum loop Sg 04 2B Dub bass loop Sg 04 2C Dub guitar solo loop Drum Loops Beats Variation Latin Loops Control Variations Drum Bass Loops Reggae Variations 206 ZOOM HD8 HD16 EB 01 1A Old funk loop 1 EB 01 1B Old funk loop 2 EB 02 1A Old school bass loop 1 EB 02 1B Old school bass loop 2 EB 03 1A Old House bass loop EB 03 1B Pops bass loop EB 04 1A Funk bass loop 1 EB 04 1B Funk bass loop 2 EB 05 1A Dark bass loop 1 1 EB 05 1B Dark bass loop 1 2 EB 06 1A Funk bass loop 1 1 EB 06 1B Funk bass loop 1 2 Guitar Gt 01 1A Acoustic guitar loop on A maj Gt 01 1B Acoustic guitar loop on A mi
135. 10 3 Press the PLAY key The selected rhythm pattern will begin playing repeatedly If there are recorded audio tracks these will also start to play To listen to the rhythm pattern only turn the faders for the audio tracks down 4 To adjust the volume of the drum bass track operate the RHYTHM fader The RHYTHM fader controls either the drum track or the bass track The selection is made by pressing the RHYTHM status key When the RHYTHM status key is lit in green the fader controls the drum track When the RHYTHM status key is lit in red the fader controls the bass track Select the desired setting and then operate the fader 5 To mute the drum track and bass track repeatedly press the RHYTHM status key When the RHYTHM status key is out both the drum track and the bass track are muted To cancel the muting press the key again so that it is lit ZOOM HD8 HD16 6 To stop rhythm pattern playback press the STOP key 7 Toreturn the main screen press the EXIT key HINT During rhythm pattern playback it is also possible to play rhythm section sounds by hitting the pads Changing the tempo You can change the tempo of the rhythm pattern HINT The tempo set here applies to all rhythm patterns A rhythm song for which no tempo information is programmed also will use this tempo 1 Press the TEMPO key The display indication changes as follows 2 Turn the dial to
136. 2 LLL B Lr input track signal to the SUB OUT jack In the default condition of a project the STEREO SUB OUT jack carries the same signal as the MASTER OUT connectors Therefore it can be used as an extra headphone jack If required the signal level and panning of the signal sent to the STEREO SUB OUT jack can be controlled individually for each input or track creating a mix that is different from that of the MASTER OUT connectors This is convenient to create a monitoring mix or to send only the signal from a specific track input to an external effect HINT For the audio tracks and drum bass track the signal immediately before the fader is sent to the STEREO SUB OUT jack e For inputs 1 8 the signal after the REC LEVEL control is sent to the STEREO SUB OUT jack 1 Connect a monitor system or external effect to the STEREO SUB OUT jack Use the STEREO SUB OUT control to adjust the signal at the STEREO SUB OUT jack to a suitable level HINT For connection to a system with stereo inputs use a Y cable stereo plug x 1 mono plug x 2 If you connect the two mono plugs of the Y cable to separate effects the STEREO SUB OUT jack functions as two AUX OUT jacks In this case you can set the panning value of the signal sent from the track input to the STEREO SUB OUT jack fully to L or R to select the send target 2 From the main screen press the TRACK PARAMETER key in the control section The trac
137. 2 will begin Record your instrument play while listening to the guide rhythm and track 1 4 When you have finished recording track 2 press the STOP lil key 5 check the recorded content press the ZERO M4 key to return to the beginning of the song and press the PLAY gt key The guide rhythm of the rhythm section and tracks 1 2 will be played back Adjust faders 1 2 as necessary to adjust the level balance 6 To stop playback press the STOP W key HINT To redo the recording repeat steps 3 5 You can also start rerecording from partly into the track and use the punch in punch out function to redo a limited passage only 41 7 When you are satisfied with the recorded content press status key 2 until it is lit in green You can now record more tracks in the same way HINT Even when all tracks have been filled you can still use the bounce function also called ping pong recording to move the contents from multiple tracks onto 1 or 2 tracks Then you can select another V take for the bounce source tracks and record more p 44 30 Step 4 Mixing When you have finished recording all tracks you can use the built in mixer to adjust parameters such as volume level EQ equalizer and panning stereo left right positioning to create a pair of stereo tracks 4 1 Turning off the input and rhythm section In order to keep unwanted signals from being included in the mix you should tu
138. 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication BACK UP on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows Z Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication ALL SAVE on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display shows the space required for the backup of all projects in MB megabytes otal 1 do m i 1 1 i 5 Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows To execute the backup press the ENTER key To cancel press the EXIT key instead When you press the ENTER key backup starts from the project with the lowest number The display shows the disc number the project number and the indication Burning Disc number 4 F Disci Burning 4 1 Project currently being saved When the backup is finished the display indication changes to Complete If the backup size is larger than the capacity of one CD R RW disc the disc will be ejected after it has been filled up and the display indication changes as follows 147 Reference Creating a CD The right side of the display shows the number of the project that has been only partly backed up Insert the next CD R RW disc and press the ENTER key The backup operation resumes If more than two discs are required the above steps will be repeat
139. 3 to select the insert target tracks again When 8x COMP EQ algorithm is selected You can select eight continuous tracks Track 1 8 or Track 9 16 as insert location Also if you have selected track 9 16 you can set different high pass filter compressor EQ values for odd even numbered tracks e When an algorithm other than 8x COMP EQ is selected You can select one of eight mono tracks Track 1 Track 8 or two mono tracks one stereo track Track 1 2 Track 15 16 as insert location 6 While playing the song turn the dial to select the patch The insert effect can now be used to post process the specified track When the effect is applied the track output level may change Use the respective fader to readjust the level as necessary HINT lt lt GEID only gt gt When the 8x COMP EQ algorithm is selected settings and effect on off switching can be done individually for each channel 2 p 128 7 e When you have checked the effect stop the song and press the EXIT key to return to the main screen HINT If the insert effect is applied to the track output it is not possible to also apply it to the input or before the MASTER fader However by using the bounce function p 44 to record the track V take on another empty V take you can turn the post processed effect sound into audio data and then apply the insert effect at another position 33 Quick Tour Step 5 Mixdown When the mix i
140. 6Beat02 HRKs1FA RnBs1Vb DANCs1FB JAZZs1VA A 16Beat03 HRKs1VB RnBs1FB DANCs2VA JAZZs1Va a 16Beat04 HRKs1FB RnBs2VA DANCs2Va JAZZs1FA 16Beat05 HRKs2VA RnBs2Va DANCs2FA JAZZs1VB N 16Beat06 HRKs2Va RnBs2FA DANCs2VB JAZZs1Vb 16Beat07 HRKs2FA RnBs2VB DANCs2Vb JAZZs1FB 16Beat08 HRKs2VB RnBs2Vb DANCs2FB AFROs1VA N 16 109 HRKs2Vb RnBs2FB HOUSs1VA AFROs1Va 16Beat10 HRKs2FB MTNs1VA HOUSs1FA AFROs1FA N N 16Beat11 MTLs1VA MTNs1Va HOUSs1VB AFROs1VB N 16Beat12 MTLs1FA MTNs1FA HOUSs1FB AFROs1Vb N A 16 0501 MTLs1VB MTNs1VB TECHs1VA AFROs1FB N a 16FUS02 MTLs1FB MTNs1Vb TECHs1FA REGGs1VA 16 0503 FUSs1VA MTNs1FB TECHs1VB REGGs1Va N A 16FUS04 FUSs1Va FUNKs1VA TECHs1FB REGGs1FA 04JAZZ01 FUSs1FA FUNKs1Va DnBs1VA REGGs1VB N 04JAZZ02 FUSs1VB FUNKs1FA DnBs1Va REGGs1Vb 04 2203 FUSs1Vb FUNKs1VB DnBs1FA REGGs1FB A 04JAZZ04 FUSs1FB FUNKs1Vb DnBs1VB LATNs1VA N DANCE FUSs2VA FUNKs1FB DnBs1Vb
141. 7 7 To stop playback press the STOP W key To redo the recording repeat steps 3 5 8 When you are satisfied with the recorded content press status key 1 until it is lit in green The recording standby condition of track 1 is canceled HINT Recorded content can be copied deleted or edited p 50 By switching to another V take for the track you can record again on the track without erasing the current recording p 61 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Quick Tour FF gt gt key Moves the current position forward in 1 second steps Movement speed can be increased by holding down the FF gt gt key and pressing the REW 44 key PLAY gt key Starts recorder playback from the current position REC key If you press this key while holding down the PLAY gt key recording starts Pressing the key during playback causes punch in and pressing the key during recording causes punch out Step 3 Overdubbing In this step you will learn how to record another instrument on track 2 while listening to the content you recorded in step 2 Adding parts in this way is called overdubbing 3 1 Making settings for input sensitivity and insert effect As in step 2 adjust input sensitivity and recording level and make settings for the insert effect 1 Connect the next instrument you want to record and press the ON OFF key so that it is lit in red 2 Adjust input sensitivity and recordin
142. 8 117 Copying 119 Deleting a 120 Importing a sample from an external source 121 Editing various settings of the rhythm section 124 Basic procedure 124 Changing the length of the pre count 124 Changing the metronome volume 125 Adjusting the sensitivity of the pads 125 Checking the remaining amount of memory 125 Swapping the left right pan position 125 Reference Effects 126 About the 126 Insert effect mer eR ah 126 Send return 126 Using the insert 127 About insert effect patches 127 Changing the insert location of the insert effect 128 Selecting the patch for the insert effect 129 Editing the insert effect patches 130 Storing swapping insert effect patches 132 Editing the name of an insert effect patch 132 Applying the insert effect only to the monitor signal 133 Using the send return 134 About the send return effect patches 134 Selecting a send return effect 134 Editing a send return effect patch
143. ACO BASS SIM algorithms Volume Pedal module Volume Pedal For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms ZOOM HD8 HD16 189 Appendix Send return effect CHORUS DELAY module Chorus LFO Type Depth Rate Pre Delay EFX Level Mixes a variable pitch shifted compon ent to original sound resulting in full bodied resonating tone Delay Time Feedback Hi Damp Pan EFX Level Rev Send Delay effect with max setting 2000 ms Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description LFO Type Mono Stereo Sets LFO phase to mono or stereo Depth 0 100 Adjusts effect depth Rate 1 50 Adjusts modulation rate Pre Delay 1 30 Adjusts pre delay time EFX Level 0 100 Adjusts effect sound level Rev Send 0 30 Adjusts delay sound reverb send level Time 1 2000 Adjusts delay time Feedback 0 100 Adjusts feedback amount Hi Damp 0 10 Adjusts intensity of delay sound high range damping Pan T RE Adjusts delay sound panning REVERB module Simulates the acoustics of a concert hall Simulates the acoustics of a room Pre Delay Decay EQ High EFX Level Hall and Room have the same parameters Spring Simulates a spring reverb Plate Simulates a plate reverb Pre Delay Decay EQ High EFX Level
144. At the screen that appears press the ENTER key so that the pad goes out The HD8 HD16 operates in mass storage mode only 6 To return to normal recorder operation cancel the current mode so that the main screen returns again ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Other Functions This section explains various other functions of the HD8 HD 16 Playing several projects continuously sequence play The HD8 HD16 lets you line up the master tracks from multiple projects saved on the hard disk and play them continuously in a specified order sequence play This is handy to record several projects on an external recorder or to use the HD8 HD16 for accompaniment during a live performance To use sequence play you create a playlist which specifies the order of projects Up to 10 different playlists can be created You can also import playlist information into an album used for creating an audio CD Creating a playlist Register projects in a playlist as follows 1 Verify that the V take you want to play is selected for each project s master track 2 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The indication REC UTILITY appears on the first line of the display and PROJECT is shown on the second line 3 Verify that PROJECT is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The project menu for various project related functions appears 4 Use the cursor left
145. Atthe rhythm pattern screen select an empty rhythm pattern number 2 Press the RHYTHM status key repeatedly until the key is lit in red 3 Hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 9 KIT PROG so that the pad lights up When the pad is lit the scale and key range selection screen for the bass program is shown 4 necessary turn the dial to change the scale and key range Use the cursor left right keys for the scale type and the dial for the key range Press the EXIT key to return 5 Press the REC 6 key isplay indication changes as follows In this condition step input is possible Quantize value Duration value 11 11 6235 iii The first line of the display shows the quantize value and the duration value and the second line shows the current position in measures beats ticks Bass sequence step input Quantize setting quarter note Quantize setting 8th note Duration setting quarter note Duration setting 8th note Y Y Quantize setting quarter note Duration setting quarter note Quantize setting 8th note Duration setting 16th note weeny 9 Pad Pad 1 Pad Pad i Pad 5 m x 5 T As j H 9 As m ZOOM HD8 HD16 97 Reference Rhythm 6 Use the cursor up down keys to select the quantize value The value selected here becomes the duration of 1 step
146. BEC6 DUMBEKI DUMBEK2 DUMBEK3 DYSTICK EXCWBLI EXCWBI2 EXRIMI EXRIM2 EXRIM3 EXSN909 EXTMBRB FLEXI FLEXI2 GUIRODN GUIROL GUIROS GUIROUP RIMOI HIAGOGO HIBONGO HICNGI ZOOM HD8 HD16 6PERCUS HICNG2 HIGH Q HITIMBA JGBELL JINGLE LOAGOGO LOBONGO LOCNG LOTIMBA MARACAS METAL MTCUICA MTHICNG MTRBELL MTRCLIK MTRCLK MTSRDO MTTRAGL OPCUICA OPSRDO OPTRAGL SHAKER SHAKERI SHAKER2 SHAKER3 SHAKER4 SHAKERS SHAKER6 SHAKER7 SHAKERS8 SHAKER9 SLAP SQRCLK STICKS SYNCNGA SYNCOWI SYNCOW2 TABLAI TABLAIO TABLAII TABLA2 TABLA3 TABLA4 TABLAS TABLA6 TABLA7 TABLA8 TABLA 1 2 4 TAMBRIN TIMBALI TIMBAL2 TRNGLEI TRNGLE2 6PERCUS Appendix VIBRAI VIBRA2 VIBSLAP WDBLKH WDBLKL WHISLI WHISL2 808CLAP 909CLAP 909SNAP CLAPPER CLAPTRAP EXCLAPI EXCLAP2 EXCLAPB 203 Appendix INOUTBB TRONIC3 ANVIL INSECT TRONIC4 BASSSLD JARHEAD TRONICS BELL KISHIMI UFO BELLCOW KISSER 8EXTRA UP BIGHIT KLUNCH URGENCE BITWHIP KUE
147. CH LEVEL MODULATION DELAY COMP LIMITER PRE EB gt MOD DELAY 2m MIC MICPRE DE ESSER COMP LIMITER EFX ZNR VOLUME PEDAL SBANDEQ PATCH LEVEL MODULATION DELAY COMPLIMITER L COMP LIMITER DUAL MIC MIC PRE L 3EHMD EG L DELRu L MICPRE ZNR VOLUME PEDAL 3BAND EQ DELAY PATCH LEVEL COMP LIMITER ISOLRTOR COMP LIMITER ISOLATOR EG gt NOD DELAY TOTAL ZNR VOLUME PEDAL 3BAND EQ MODULATION DELAY PATCH LEVE E He h 8 x COMP EQ E MER VOLUME PEDAL PATCH LEVE COMPLo F i HORMAL IZER MASTERING ULTIBAND COMP Lo Fi NORMALIZER ZOOM HD8 HD16 pIMEHSION RESO a s 7 ZNR VOLUME PEDAL 3BAND EQ DIMENSION RESONANCE PATCH LEVEL 131 Reference Effects nzemble E rirm i Effect parameter Setting value HINT To reselect the effect type repeatedly press the cursor up key to bring up the effect type name and then turn the dial 7 Turn the dial to change the setting value For details on the effect types that can be selected for each effect module and on the effect parameters of each type refer to the information in the appendix of this manual 8 To toggle the effect module on or off bring the indication for the module on the display and then press the ENTER key When the effect module is turned off the indication is shown on the second line
148. D By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time 7 Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Backup and restore This section explains how you can use the CD R RW drive in the HD8 HD16 to back up a project to a CD R RW disc and how to restore a project from a disc backup You can either create backups for individual projects or save all projects in a common operation Saving a single project to CD R RW disc You can select any project and save it on a CD R RW disc for backup HINT If the size of the project is larger than the capacity of the CD R RW disc you can create a backup spanning multiple volumes 1 Insert a CD R RW disc into the integrated CD R RW drive To back up a project use a blank CD R RW disc or a CD RW disc that has been completely erased 2 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 1 CD R RW The menu for various CD R RW functions appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication BACK UP on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 4 Verify that SAVE is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows In this condition you can select the project to be backed up 146 Project number Project name 5 Turn t
149. D8 HD16 Writing a phrase loop to a track Phrases contained in the phrase pool can be played in a specified order repeated automatically and written as a phrase loop to a specified track V take After writing the phrase loop the target track V take will contain actual audio data which can then be played and edited in the same way as regular audio data Phrase A Phrase B Phrase Phrase D V take lt L7 Write Audio data Using FAST input for the phrase loop When creating a phrase loop the FAST Formula Assisted Song Translator method developed by ZOOM can be used to specify phrase sequence and number of plays The keys and pads of the pad section are used for FAST input as described below TEMPO key Serves for entering the multiplication symbol x the addition symbol the opening bracket and the closing bracket REPEAT STEP ce 1 D TOM1 TOM2 1 SEND RETURN EFFECT 1 CRASH RIDE OPEN HAT m m Cr 1 1 Kick SNARE CLOSED HAT CONTROL SURFACE Cre REPEAT STEP key Pads 1 9 Serve to enter the phrase number and repetition count Cai The basic rules for creating a phrase loop are as follows Select the phrase Use the REPEAT STEP key and pads 1 9 to select a phrase number from 0 99 Line up phrases Use th
150. DI Time Code MTC messages used for synchronization will be transmitted Refer to steps 1 4 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication MTC on the display and press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to select one of the following settings 24 24 frames second 25 25 frames second 29 97 29 97 frames second non drop 30 30 frames second non drop When the HD8 HD16 is running MTC messages with the respective frame per second setting are sent out Off Transmission off MTC messages will not be transmitted MTC message output is based on recorder time information When using MTC to synchronize MIDI devices the HD8 HD16 always functions as MTC master Set up the other device to operate as MTC slave which receives MTC messages and functions accordingly An example for synchronizing the HD8 HD16 with a sequencer is shown below MTC slave MTC MIDI IN Sequencer MTC master MIDI OUT connector HD8 HD16 HINT MTC allows more precise synchronization than MIDI Timing Clock messages When MTC transmission is enabled Timing Clock Song Position Pointer and Start Stop Continue messages will all be disabled ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference MIDI Selecting the port to send receive MIDI messages You can select whether MIDI messages are output and received via the MIDI IN OUT connectors or the USB port The steps for this operation are different f
151. ENTER key You can now select the target pattern Turn the dial to select the import target and press the ENTER key The indication Import appears on the second line of the display Proceed to step 6 6 To carry out the import process press the ENTER key When all patterns songs have been imported the rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears again If a single pattern was imported the display of step 5 returns again To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time 111 Reference Rhythm The HD8 HD16 stores information about samples assigned to the pads of a drum kit and about settings such as pad volume and panning in so called kit files When a kit file is loaded in the rhythm section all samples and pad settings stored in the file will become active and can be used as a drum kit For information on how to load kit files see page 89 You can also edit the settings in a kit file to create your own original drum kit This section describes how to work with kit files Creating a kit file The create your own drum kit from scratch it is convenient to start with a blank kit file 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN or pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears
152. EP Release Release To return to the previous screen press the EXIT key HINT The roll play function is also convenient during rhythm pattern real time input 7 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key once more ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm Playing a bass program with the pads When playing a bass program with the pads you can specify the scale of Major or Minor By switching the key and range used by the scale you can cover more than four octaves NOTE The bass program does not allow multiple tones to be played simultaneously When you hit a pad the sound of the immediately preceding pad will cease and only the sound of the new pad is heard 1 Select the bass program to play p 90 2 Press the RHYTHM status key repeatedly until the key is lit in red While the RHYTHM status key is lit in red the pads can be used to play a bass program 3 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key in the pad section and press pad 9 KIT PROG so that the pad lights up When the pad is lit the scale and key range selection screen for the bass program is shown Bass program name Scale type Key range Z Use the cursor left right keys to change the scale type You can select either Major or Minor for the scale When E is selected as the key the pads function as shown below depending on the scale type Major MB BG Minor CERE allel
153. EP key in the rhythm section to bring up the following indication on the display When you turn the dial at this screen the interval for roll play can be set as follows 2 4 16 4 quarter note x 2 16 s 23 B cete dotted quarter note s N aues half triplet note quarter note default dotted eighth note 4 quarter triplet note 4 i eighth note s sen eighth triplet note HO unes sixteenth note s sisse sixteenth triplet note s 1 22 iode thirty second note Hs 1 tick 1 48 of quarter note ZOOM HD8 HD16 When you hit a pad while pressing the REPEAT STEP key the pad plays repeatedly at the specified interval roll play For example you can repeat a kick drum at quarter note intervals or play a hihat in sixteenth note units To stop roll play release the pad If you release the REPEAT STEP key first roll play continues also when you release the pad To stop roll play in this case press the pad once more mat 4 4 SYNC quarter note Pad 1 Pad 1 KICK KICK Hit once more emm Release You can also set a different interval for different pads For example when you select a quarter note interval for pad 1 and an eighth note interval for pad 2 the following play results Pad 2 ma JJ J Ji dd uJ SYNC quarter note SYNC eighth note Pad 1 Pad2 1 2 KICK SNARE O ONTROL SURFACE EPEAT STEP EPEAT ST
154. Entry MSB Control 38 38 Data Entry LSB 98 98 NRPN LSB Change 99 99 NRPN MSB 3 Prog x x Change True p 3 4 4 System Exclusive x x 3 3 3 Qtr Frame x x System Song Pos x x Song Sel x x Common Tune x x 3 3 3 System Clock Real Time Commands 3 Aux Local ON OFF x x All Notes OFF x x Mes Active Sense x x sages Reset x x 3 3 Notes po fp at Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Yes Mode OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO No ll Symbols Numerals 8 track recording HD16 only 46 Loc ethan usse meta ern ea 104 Js eee esca tru E pet n uet 104 SH feos ete EA te uds 104 X DR PEE 104 A pointi esee eee Rx 39 A B repeat 39 AIFF file iiei aita Ree 63 70 127 All 173 Auto
155. Hard Disk Recording Studio HDS HD16 DCN meore moura waster our 5 D e P e econ 9 P HID 1G Disk Recording Studio 2 E an say m mm um n steno suour E N PUNGI ome om rower CONTROLIN Us Mibi our PLU Wer MASTER OUT 9 OO 6 9 zl e Efe e ie PHONES PHONES 2 E ERE na 15726 RHYTHM MASTER 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 T T s
156. IN OUT between the HD8 HD16 and the other device o If a computer is connected via the MIDI IN OUT connectors MIDI or the USB port the HD8 HD16 can be used as a control interface surface for DAW software 9 Loop the cable of the AC adapter around the hook as shown in the diagram before connecting it to the 12V C uS jack This will prevent the plug from being pulled out if the Computer AC adaptor cable is accidentally pulled ZOOM HD8 HD16 17 Installing the CD R RW Drive To install the separately available CD R RW drive into a HD8 HD16 model without preinstalled CD R RW drive proceed as follows Caution Before installing the drive make sure that all cables and the AC adapter are disconnected CD R RW drive bay Right side panel 1 Turn the HD8 HD16 over and remove the blank panel from the drive mounting section on the right side panel To remove the blank panel pull out the groove in the center 2 Remove the fastening screws of the bottom plate and remove the bottom plate Take care not to lose the screws as these will be needed again for reassembly 3 Turn the CD R RW drive over and insert it into the drive mount bay ZOOM HD8 HD16 Installing the CD R RW Drive Power cable Flat cable Rear panel side 4 Plug the power cable and flat cab
157. ION key and the pad the performance of the corresponding pad is erased from the rhythm pattern 94 STORE DELETE T COPY INSERT Drum sequence gt Snare a 2 e DA DDO DA D Snare 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 To erase the performance of all pads While holding down the FUNCTION key press the RHYTHM status key While you are holding down both keys the performance of all pads is erased from the drum sequence DRUM BASS MUTE STORE DELETE COPY INSERT e Snare 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 When you finished real time recording press the STOP W key Rhythm pattern recording will stop Press the PLAY gt key to hear the pattern that you recorded NOTE When you select an empty pattern and record it the pattern name Pat xxx where xxx is the pattern number is automatically assigned You can edit this pattern name as necessary p 100 Bass sequence real time input For real time input of a bass sequence you play the pads of the HD8 HD16 1 Atthe rhythm pattern selection screen select an empty rhythm pattern number or a rhythm pattern for which only a drum sequence has been input 2 Press the RHYTHM status key repeatedly until the key is lit in red While the RHYTHM status key is lit in red the pads can be used to play a bass program ZOOM HD8 HD16 3 Hold down the SHIFT
158. KO9 TRIPO2 AFRO07 HRKO2 FUNK10 TRIPO3 AFROO8 HRKO3 FUNK11 04 LATNO1 HRK04 FUNK12 AMBO 1 LATNO2 HRKO5 HIPO1 AMBO2 LATNOS HRKO6 02 LATN04 HRK07 4 LATNOS MTLO1 04 BALDO1 LATNO6 MTLO2 05 BALDO2 LATNO7 MTLOS 06 BALDOS LATNO8 04 07 BALD04 LATNO9 THRSO1 08 BALDO05 LATN10 502 09 BALDO06 LATN11 1 10 BALDO7 LATN12 2 HIP11 BALDO08 BOSSAO01 FUSO1 HIP12 BALDO9 BOSSA02 0502 BALD10 SAMBAO1 FUSOS HIP14 BALD11 SAMBAO02 FUS04 HIP15 BLUSO1 MidE01 0505 16 BLUSO2 MidE02 N DININI YIM m YM NI YM MLM YM NM D DN YM D NI NI NI DN NI NINI N NI NI sm MH MH D N NIN 0506 ZOOM HD8 HD16 HIP17 BLUSOS MidE03 HIP18 NIN MLM MH mim MY MY nmm NINI NI MH MH MH MH MH NINI MH NINI MH NINI DINI III MH MH NI NI NINININI NINI N NINI NY BLUS04 N NI N N DINI NINI NINI DININI N D YM YM YM N DINI NINI NY NINI NINI NI N D MH YM MYM DNI DINI N NINI NINI NINI
159. Level parameter to zero you can mute the respective part 8 To adjust the speed with which the created harmony parts will reach the target pitch use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication Feeling on the second line of the display and turn the dial The setting range for the Feeling parameter is 0 30 The larger the value the smoother the transition to the harmony 9 Press the cursor down key The display indication changes as follows At this screen you can specify the start point in time units measures beats ticks or by using marks To return to the previous screen press the cursor up key Time l Hkk Hki kikiki Baa 081 81 88 f f Mark Measures beats ticks 10 use the cursor left right keys and the dial to specify the start point for harmony generation You can also use the MARKER M 9 keys ZERO M4 key REW 44 gt gt keys to locate the point By pressing the PLAY key in this condition you can check what the result will sound like when the function is executed HINT The manual and automatic punch in punch out functions gt p 41 can also be used at this point 1 1 To start harmony generation hold down the 9 key and press the PLAY gt key Recording starts The display indication changes as follows When the second line of the display reads Chord the chord of the current rhythm pattern rhythm song
160. ND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MIDI is a registered trademark of Association of Musical Electronics Industry AMEI All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners All trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned in this manual are for identification purposes only and are not intended to infringe on the copyrighted properties of their respective owners USAGE AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 2 Introduction deeds 7 Overview Sie ie ERR RR EET 7 Features of the 16 7 Getting to Know the HD8 HD16 9 Recorder T iu tno cate d Ru 10 Rhythm section 10 ree Cig cd Thee uter Ee qe 11 Effects 54 nei peeves GARI RIDALS 11 Names 12 HD8 12 HD16 Top 13 HD8 HD16 Rear 14 HD8 HD16 Right Side Panel 15 Connections a ae aba ELA Rud 16 Installing the CD R RW Drive 18 Power 20 Turning 20 Turning power off shutdown 20 Listening to a Demo Song 21 Selecting the demo 21 Playing the demo song
161. O BASS SIM algorithms ZOOM HD8 HD16 183 Appendix MOD DELAY module Chorus Ensemble Flanger Pitch Vibe Step Cry Exciter Air Wide Delay Analog Delay Reverse Delay ARRM Pitch For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms ZNR module ZNR For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms Volume Pedal module Volume Pedal For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms MIC algorithm COMP LIMITER module Rack Gomp For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms EFX module Tremolo Phaser Ring Modulator For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms Slow Attack Fix Wah MIC PRE module Type Tone Level De Esser This is a preamplifier for using an external microphone Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Type Vocal AousticGt Flat Selects preamp characteristics Tone 0 10 Adjusts tonal quality Level 1 100 Adjusts signal level after passing module De Esser Off 1 10 Controls the de esser setting Low Cut Off 80 240Hz Controls a filter for reducing low frequency noise often picked up during mic recording 184 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Appendix SBAND EQ module
162. OOM HD8 HD16 4 Turn the dial to change the setting to a value from 1 3 5 When the setting is complete press the EXIT key several times to return to the main screen Checking the system version To check the system software version of the HD8 HD16 proceed as follows 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The indication REC UTILITY appears on the first line of the display and PROJECT is shown on the second line 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SYSTEM on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SYSTEM VERSION on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The current system version is shown To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Other Functions Hard disk maintenance This section describes how to test and restore the integrity of data on the internal hard disk of the HD8 HD16 and how to perform other hard disk maintenance functions Basic maintenance procedure The procedure for hard disk maintenance is the same for most operations The basic steps are described below 1 Turn power to the HD8 HD16 off While holding down the CLEAR key in the control section turn power on again The HD8 HD16 starts up in HDD uti
163. SFX sound using ARRM creates a wave that rolls back to you 39 Bottom Twang those lower strings with this sound 40 49 Empty ACO BASS SIM algorithm No Patch name Description 0 Ensemble Gorgeous sound with deep ensemble effect 1 Delay LD Lively acoustic guitar sound for lead playing 2 Chorus Chorus sound runs the gamut from side guitar to lead guitar 3 FineTune Delicate detune creates sonic depth 4 Air Aco Air sound creates a miking effect 5 Standard Standard bass sound with many uses 6 CompBass Bass sound comes to live with compressor and exciter 7 WarmBass Bass sound with warm and round feeling 8 Flanging Flanging sound covers a lot of ground from 16 beat phrases to melody playing 9 Auto Wah Funky bass making good use of auto wah 10 19 Empty BASS algorithm No Patch name Description 0 SVT Walk the high road of rock Great for finger picking or flatpicking 1 BASSMAN Vintage rock sound for any occasion 2 HARTKE Hartke simulation with all the glitz and glitter 3 SUPER B Choose this for guitar unison play and solo play 4 SANS A Edgy sound with a strong core is a good match for flatpick 5 TUBE PRE All rounder tube sound always comes in handy 6 Attack Compression sound effective for slap and flatpick playing 7 Wah Solo Solo sound with distortion and a touch of wah Pitch shift is the secret ingredient 8 Talk amp Cry Typical
164. T When power to the HD8 HD16 is turned on the project that was last worked on will be loaded automatically ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Projects Creating a new project This operation creates a new project 1 Refer to steps 1 3 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication NEW on the second line of the display Then press the ENTER key The name and number of the project to create are shown on the display Project number H ex Project name The number of the newly created project is assigned automatically choosing the lowest free project number and a default name of PRJxxx where xxx is the project number will be assigned The project name is shown with the first character flashing This indicates that you can change the project name HINT If the recorder is stopped and the main screen is shown you can call up the above screen simply by pressing the NEW PROJECT key 2 If necessary edit the project name For details on entering characters see page 37 The project name can also be edited later p 153 3 Press the ENTER key to create the project After the new project has been created it is loaded automatically and the unit returns to the main screen By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time 151 Reference Projects Checking the project size available hard disk capacity This operatio
165. TI C 40 ii 2L BD Z Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication DELETE on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows Da ma 22 Eunos 5 Turn the dial to select the kit file to delete and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 6 To execute the delete process press the ENTER key once more Importing a kit file from another project You can import a kit file that was created as part of another project into the current project To do this proceed as follows 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN or pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Press the PROJECT UTILITY key The rhythm utility menu screen appears UTILITY 1 5 Li 3 Verify that the indication KIT FILE is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows EIT FILE 1 6 115 Reference Rhythm 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication IMPORT on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows In this condition you can select the project from which to import the kit file Source project nu
166. TUFFSNR HUGE CRSPYSNR VEBYSR ILLKICK DAYSNARE VO SDI KALIKICK DEEP SD VO SD2 LIVE BD DIGALGM VO SD3 LONGKICK DIGALGS VO SDA OPSRDO DRY SD VO SDS5 PAPAKICK DRY SDH PUNCH EASTSNR PUSHKICK EDGESNR RESO BD FATFUNK REVDROP FNKYSNR ROUNDKIK FUNK SMASHKIK FUNKSNR STAGE FUNKUP STANDRD GMRIM STD BDI HARSHSNR STD BD2 HIGHSDI STD BD3 HITSNARE STDO BD JNGLSNR STEAMKIK LECTRIP ZOOM HD8 HD16 201 Appendix 202 808_1 808_2 808_3 ACO TMI ACO TM2 ACO TM3 AMBI2 AMBI3 BENDTMI BENDTM2 BENDTM3 BRSHTMH BRSHTML BRSHTMM DRY TMI DRY TM2 DRY TM3 ELECTOI ELECTO2 ELECTO3 GATEI GATE2 GATE3 HARDTMI HARDTM2 HARDTM3 HI_808 HI_909 HI_TECH HI TOM HIDRVTM HIELECTM HIPWRTM LIVETMI LIVETM2 LIVETM3 LO 808 LO 909 LO TECH LO TOM LODRVTM LOELECTM LOPWRTM MDDRVTM MDELECTM
167. The current insert position is shown on the display 2 Turn the dial to select the insert position To select the output of mono track x 1 as insert position select Track 1 Track 6 lt lt GPID Track 1 Track 8 gt gt select the output of mono track x 2 as insert position select Track 1 2 Track 7 8 lt lt BIB Track 1 2 Track 15 16 gt gt To select the position immediately before the MASTER fader select Master The status key of the selected track or the MASTER status key lights up in orange These keys can also be used to select the insert position If you press the adjacent status keys of an odd numbered and even numbered input in succession mono track x 2 is selected ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Effects 3 When the insert position selection is completed press the EXIT key to return to the main screen Selecting the patch for the insert effect This section explains how to select the patch for the insert effect 1 On the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 4 INSERT EFFECT so that the pad lights up The following screen appears on the display At this screen you can select the algorithm and patch for the insert effect Algorithm name Patch number Patch name 2 Use the cursor up down keys to select the algorithm to use The second line of the display shows the patch that is currently selected in that
168. Time signature Root Chord root Chord Chord type Tempo Tempo Drum Volume Drum sequence volume Bass Volume Bass sequence volume HINT When an item other than Event is selected and no information is input for the current position the arrow lt is shown before the item name for example Pattern This indicates that information input at a preceding point continues to be valid 4 Press the FUNCTION key The indication Insert is shown on the second line of the display Rhythm pattern number to insert Rhythm pattern name to insert Number of measures to insert In this condition you can insert rhythm pattern information 5 Turn the dial to select the rhythm pattern that you want to insert HINT To check the currently selected rhythm pattern press the PLAY gt key Use the cursor up down keys to specify the number of measures to insert If you specify more measures than the original length of the rhythm pattern the rhythm pattern will be repeated If you specify fewer measures the song will switch to the next rhythm pattern before the current pattern has finished playing 7 To finalize the setting press the ENTER key The rhythm pattern information will be input at the current location and the display reverts to the original screen The EOS indication is moved back by the number of measures that were inserted By pressing the PLAY key while this dis
169. Track 2 Track 3 Captured data of track 1 Nr Swap operation for track 1 Recorder Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Captured data of track 1 NOTE Capture is performed on a track by track basis Captured track data will be erased from the hard disk when another project is loaded or when the power is turned off Capturing a track You can capture the audio data of any specified track 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The indication UTILITY appears on the first line of the display and PROJECT is shown on the second line 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication CAPTURE SWAP on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 65 Reference Track Editing 3 Use the status keys or the dial to select a track for capture The status key for the currently selected track is lit in orange It is also possible to select the master track In this case the indication shows Master and the MASTER status key is lit HINT A track for which an unrecorded V take is selected cannot be captured f a track that is already captured is selected the indication Swap appears on the first line of the display 4 Press the ENTER key The indication Capture appears on the display 5 To carry out the capture op
170. Y gt key to check the phrase during editing 7 Repeat steps 5 6 to complete the phrase If desired press the EXIT key several times to return to the phrase screen and edit another phrase 8 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Copying a phrase You can copy a phrase to any other phrase number Any phrase at the copy destination will be overwritten erased This is convenient to use one phrase as a starting point and save it with different parameter settings 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key in the display section The indication UTILITY appears on the first line of the display and PROJECT is shown on the second line 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication PHRASE on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The phrase screen appears on the display Ho 1 PHag1 a81 71 Reference Phrase Looping 4 Press the FUNCTION key in the function transport section twice to bring up the indication COPY PHRASE on the first line of the display Then press the ENTER key The screen for specifying the copy destination phrase number appears 5 Turn the dial to select the phrase number for the copy destination and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows opas NOTE If a phrase already exists at the copy destination number it
171. Y URGENT BLOQI LGSCRTCH WARBLE BLOQ2 MAJOR7 WHOOSH BLOQ3 MINOR7 WINDOWN BLOQ4 MOKUGYO BREATBB MUTE BROKENI MUTEGTRI BROKEN2 MUTEGTR2 BFY_GATE BROKEN3 MUTEGTR3 DLY_HEAD BROKEN4 MUTEGTR4 DRTYBEAT C_MON 5 HERO CHITRP MUTEGTR6 HIPHITZ CHIT1 NERVY HIPHOP CHIT2 OEDO SCRPSCP CHIT3 OMSHIT TMB_GRV CHIT4 OODAIKO TRP_SPC CHITS OVERFLOW CHORD1 PARTIAL CHORD2 PECKER CHORD3 PHWIKET CHORD4 PLASTIC CHORDS PLUCKTNE CLANG2 8EXTRA POP 8EXTRA CLOCK PSYCHODB CRASHBB RACHET CRUNCH RAMROD CRUSHI RESONANT CRUSH2 RTTLBELL CRUSH3 SCRAPE CRUSH4 SCRATCH CRUSHS SCRATCH2 CUDAIKO SCRATCH3 CYMBOLIC SCRATCH4 D_CLOSE SCRCH1 D_OPEN SCRCH2 DIGIBLCK SCRUB DIGIFLEX SHNCRSH DIRTI SLIDING DIRT2 SMEAR DIRT3 SONAR DIRT4 SPACE DRIZZLE SQENCE DUNKLE STSCRTCH ELCKITTY SWIPE ENGINE TEARUP FACEDOWN TEMPLE FLANGE THWACK FLITSWP TICKER GAMELAN TONEGATE HEY TRMBLING HICRASH TRONICI HLLYWOOD TRONIC2 204 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Appendix MIDI note number chart Pad 1 KICK 2 SNARE 3 CLOSED HAT 4 CRASH 5 RIDE 6 OPEN HAT 7 TOM1 8 TOM2 9 TOM3
172. a passive type electric guitar or other instrument with high output impedance the Hi Z switch 1 should be set to ON 3 Press the ON OFF key for input 1 so that the key lights up ON OFF Lit In this condition input 1 is active ON 4 While playing your guitar adjust the GAIN control 1 to adjust the input sensitivity Make the adjustment so that the PEAK indicator 1 flickers slightly when you play your instrument at its loudest volume 5 While playing your guitar adjust the recording level by turning the REC LEVEL control If the CLIP indicator lights up at high playing levels you should turn down the recording level CLIP indicator 6 Press status key 1 repeatedly until the key is lit in red PLAY MUTE REC 27 PLAY MUTE REC Lit 22 A track for which the status key is lit in red is in the recording standby condition 7 Operate the fader for track 1 to adjust the input signal monitor level In the recording standby condition status key lit in red the respective level meter shows the input signal level For tracks in playback mode status key lit in green the respective level meter shows the track playback level Level meter Current signal level HINT When you press the PLAY gt key of the HD8 HD16 in a new project a rhythm pattern will start to play in sync with the audio track To turn off the rhythm accompaniment press the RHYTHM status key repeatedly unt
173. a project 152 Changing the project 153 Protecting a 153 Reference 154 About MIDI oe vena 154 What you do using 154 Making MIDI related settings 155 Basic 155 Setting the drum kit bass program MIDI channel 155 Turning Timing Clock messages on or off 156 Turning Song Position Pointer messages or off 156 Turning Start Stop Continue messages on or off 156 Turning MIDI Time Code MTC messages on or off 157 Selecting the port to send receive MIDI messages 157 Using the SMF 158 Reading an SMF into a 158 Selecting the SMF output destination 158 SME 159 Reference USB 161 What you do with the USB port 161 Supported operating systems 161 File transfer to and from a computer 161 Operating DAW Software From the HD8 HD16 163 Selecting the connector to use for control surface 163 Switching to control surface mode 163 Using Mass Storage Mode and Control Surface Mode Simult
174. a time Generating harmony from a specified range of audio data You can use chord information programmed in the rhythm pattern rhythm song to shift the pitch of the audio data and create a 3 part harmony chord root third fifth Whether the rhythm pattern or rhythm song is used as source of chord information depends on the mode selected for the rhythm section rhythm pattern mode or rhythm section mode The pitch shifted audio data can be either added to the source material or written to another track V take For example when G Major gt C Major D Major are programmed in a rhythm song the following harmony is created ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Track Editing Source track GMajor CMajor D Major 4 o e e 4 Ln ud Generate harmony Write target track Source track G Major C Major D Major 9 9 o L pin HINT Depending on the pitch of the source material and the rhythm pattern rhythm song setting the results of this command may be unpredictable When generating harmony using the rhythm song chords must be programmed for the rhythm song beforehand When no conversion is programmed as chord type in the rhythm song no harmony can be created at this point When generating harmony using chord information of the rhythm pattern the harmony is created for the sa
175. al sound sources In this example the SMF playing information is sent only to the MIDI OUT connector ZOOM HD8 HD16 External SMF CH 1 16 eA sound MIDI OUT source Rhythm song Internal sound Rhythm pattern source Drum kit bass program NOTE When an SMF is played in the above condition the rhythm song or rhythm pattern of the HD8 HD16 will be played at the same time If you do not want to play the drum bass sound set the RHYTHM status key to OFF or select an empty rhythm song rhythm pattern The next diagram shows a setting example for using the HD8 HD16 as an SMF player with a combination of internal and external sound sources In this example MIDI channel 9 of the SMF playing information is sent to the bass program MIDI channel 10 to the drum kit and the other MIDI channels to the MIDI OUT connector CH 1 8 11 16 External CH 9 10 sound MIDI OUT source Rhythm song Internal sound Rhythm pattern When an SMF is played in the above condition the SMF playing information and the rhythm song or rhythm pattern information of the HD8 HD16 will sent to the internal drum kit bass program at the same time If you want to use the drum kit bass program only for the SMF you must first select an empty rhythm song rhythm pattern f the SMF contains Program Change or Control Change
176. algorithm NOTE lt lt GEID gt gt When you switch to 8x COMP EQ from another algorithm the insert position becomes Input 1 8 Track 1 8 or Track 9 16 depending on the immediately preceding setting Make sure once more that the desired insert position is selected 3 Turn the dial to select the patch The new patch is called up immediately HINT The indication Empty appears instead of the patch name if the patch is empty Selecting such a patch will not have an effect 4 i you want to temporarily turn the insert effect off hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 4 INSERT EFFECT so that the pad goes out The insert effect setting changes to The first line of the display shows Off and the second line shows ENTER S TUNER To turn the insert effect on again hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 4 INSERT EFFECT once more 129 Reference Effects HINT If you press the ENTER key in the bypass condition the tuner function will be called up p 167 5 Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key The flow of the signal that passes through the insert effect will change as shown below depending on the insert location and the destination of the signal after passing the effect Signal flow with insert effect at input Using mono input insert effect on mono input mono track EFFECT Using stereo input or mono input x 2 insert effect on mono
177. and press the pad Make sure that the insert effect is sent to the desired location p 128 Send return effect does not work Make sure that pad 5 CHORUS DELAY or pad 6 ZOOM HD8 HD16 REVERB is lit If it is out hold down the SHIFT key and press the pad Make sure that the send level for each track is raised 2 p 79 Problems with the rhythm section Cannot hear rhythm pattern playback Make sure that the RHYTHM status key is lit in green or red Try operating the RHYTHM fader To adjust the drum track volume cause the RHYTHM status key to be lit in green and then lower and raise the RHYTHM fader For the bass track do the same with the RHYTHM status key lit in red Make sure that you have not selected a blank rhythm pattern pattern name Empty If an original drum kit is selected make sure that samples are properly assigned to the pads for that drum kit Cannot hear rhythm song playback n the case of a new project all rhythm songs will be empty so you will hear no sound Either create a new rhythm song or load a project for which a rhythm song has been created When using Control Change signals sent from an external MIDI device the drum or bass volume may be lowered Set the MIDI channels for drum and bass to OFF or check the setting at the external MIDI device Cannot get loud sounds when you hit the pads If the pad sensitivity has been set to Soft
178. and the rhythm pattern edit menu appears again 99 Reference Rhythm 7 Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Assigning a name to a rhythm pattern When an empty rhythm pattern is selected for input the pattern name Pat xxx where xxx is the pattern number is automatically assigned You can edit this pattern name as necessary 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN The rhythm pattern selection screen appears 2 Turn the dial to select the rhythm pattern for which to change the name and press the EDIT key The rhythm pattern edit menu appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication NAME on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key In this condition you can edit the rhythm pattern name 4 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing position to the character you want to change and turn the dial to select a character For information on character input refer to page 37 5 Repeat step 4 until the name is as desired return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Editing rhythm patterns This section explains how to copy existing rhythm patterns or erase them to return them to the blank condition Copying a rhythm pattern You can copy a rhythm pattern to another pattern number This 100 is useful if you want to create variations
179. aneously 164 Reference Other Functions 165 Playing several projects continuously sequence play 165 Creating a 165 Playlist 166 Using the tuner function 167 6 Using the chromatic 167 Using other tuner types 168 Changing the function of the foot switch 169 Preventing digital copying of a master disc or master tape 169 Switching the level meter display type 170 Adjusting the display contrast 170 Checking the system 171 Hard disk 171 Basic maintenance 171 Test restore integrity of data on internal hard disk Scan Disk 2 5 sik Rn e eh 172 Returning system file data to factory default Factory 2 172 Returning the entire hard disk to the factory default All Initialize deen ele Fa 173 Hard disk maintenance using the supplied CD ROM cn we 173 174 Troubleshooting 176 Problems during playback 176 Problems during recording 176 Problems
180. annot synchronize with external MIDI device Make sure that the MIDI cable is correctly connected from the MIDI OUT connector of the HD8 HD16 to the MIDI IN connector of the external device Synchronization with an external MIDI device is only possible by using the MIDI clock or MTC output from the HD8 HD16 The HD8 HD16 cannot synchronize to a MIDI clock or MTC supplied by an external device When synchronizing on the timing clock MIDI clock make sure that output is enabled for Timing Clock Song Position Pointer and Start Stop Continue messages at the HD8 HD16 2 p 156 When synchronizing on the MTC MIDI Time Code make sure that MTC output is enabled at the HD8 HD16 gt p 157 Make sure that the external MIDI device is set to receive MIDI clock or MTC and synchronize to it Make sure that the external MIDI device is in playback stand by mode 177 Troubleshooting Cannot load SMF from CD ROM or CD R RW disc Verify that the file is a Format 0 SMF Make sure that the SMF file name has the proper extension MID An SMF located on an unfinalized CD R RW cannot be loaded Cannot play SMF Make sure that the SMF playback setting is On gt 159 Problems with CD R RW drive Cannot play audio CD created with HD8 HD16 on ordinary CD player Check whether the disc was finalized On some older CD players CD R discs will not play properly as audio CDs even if the disc
181. appears on the display ZOOM HD8 HD16 STORE DELETE COPY INSERT 3 Repeatedly press the SELECT key until the parameter to adjust is shown The display shows the selected parameter The SELECT key gives access to the following track parameters Parameter Setting range Description Adjusts high EQ HI GAIN 12 1208 frequency range boost cut EQ MID GAIN frequency range boost cut EQ LOW GAIN 9 12 12 low frequency range boost cut CHORUS DELAY Adjusts level of signal SEND LEVEL 0 100 sent from track input to chorus delay effect REVERB SEND Adjusts level of signal a 0 100 sent from track input LEVEL to reverb effect SUB OUT SEND Adjusts level of signal LEVEL 9 0 100 sent from track input lt lt GEID only gt gt to STEREO SUB OUT jack Adjusts panning for the track input For PAN L100 R100 stereo tracks this adjusts the left right balance Parameters marked with can be switched on and off The currently selected track parameter is shown by the lit parameter select indicator to the left of the display ZOOM HD8 HD16 Quick Tour OEQ HIGH EQ MID O EQ LOW Lit ODLY SEND OREV SEND O SUB SEND Parameter select indicators 4 Turn the parameter knob for the track whose parameter value you want to adjust The display switches to the track that is being
182. ar the sample assigned to a pad Select the pad At the display of step 3 press the FUNCTION key twice to bring up the indication CLEAR SAMPLE on the first line of the display Then press the ENTER key twice HINT When a sample is cleared from a pad all pad parameters revert to the default 10 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm Making pad parameter settings Volume panning and other parameters can be set for each pad in the drum kit 1 Press the RHYTHM status key repeatedly until the key is lit in green 2 From main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 9 KIT PROG so that the pad lights up The display indication changes as follows T T Pad bank number Sample assigned to pad Pad number 3 Press the EDIT key A menu for various pad settings appears 4 Use the cursor left right keys to select one of the following items Level This lets you set the pad output level in the range from 0 15 Pan This lets you set the left right positioning of the pad sound when using stereo playback The setting range is L63 fully left to R63 fully right This parameter setting is independent of the track parameter for panning When you adjust the track parameter for panning the overall stereo balance will be shifted while keeping the relative positioning of the pad intact Voice Group Selects the type
183. ars again ZOOM HD8 HD16 By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time HINT The imported sample is saved in a folder called OUSER in the SAMPLER folder immediately under the root directory top level folder of the internal hard disk Importing an audio file from a CD ROM or the WAV_AIFF folder 1 Perform steps 1 5 of Importing a sample from an external source and select the CD ROM or WAV_AIFF FOLDER parameter Then press the ENTER key The HD8 HD16 searches for WAV AIFF files in the specified location When a file is found its name appears on the display When a folder on a CD ROM R RW disc is selected the indication Folder is shown at the left side of the display Folder name In this case turn the dial to select the folder and press the ENTER key to show files in that folder To return to one level higher press the EXIT key 2 Turn the dial to select the audio file to import 3 When the file is selected press the ENTER key The following steps will differ depending on the sampling frequency of the selected audio file Sampling frequency is 44 1 kHz The indication Create Sample appears on the first line of the display Press the ENTER key once more to import the file Sampling frequency other than 44 1 kHz A selection screen for choosing whether to perform conversio
184. as pre existing samples see illustration below The following types of audio material can be imported into the sample pool Any audio track from a project You can select any track V take from the currently loaded project and specify a range for use as a sample Audio file stored on CD ROM R RW disc A stereo or mono audio file sampling frequency 8 48 kHz 8 bit or 16 bit WAV AIFF file stored on a CD ROM R RW disc inserted in the CD ROM R RW drive can be used as a sample Audio files copied from a computer via the USB port to the WAV AIFF folder on the internal hard disk of the HD8 HD16 can also be used NOTE All imported audio files will be played at a sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz When using an audio file that was recorded with a different sampling frequency convert it to 44 1 kHz during importing as required Discs not compliant with the ISO 9660 Level 2 standard cannot be used CD R RW discs with unfinalized sessions cannot be used When importing samples some steps are similar for each action These are as follows 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN or pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears Reference Rhythm 2 Press the PROJECT UTILITY key The rhythm utility menu screen appears LiL PTTL hoe u Bouma E E SEIT FILE 3 Use the
185. as shown below This is called event information When the rhythm song is in the input condition you can move the current position with the cursor keys etc and use the cursor up down keys to call up and enter or edit event information see below 1 Bring up the rhythm song selection screen and turn the dial to select the rhythm song for which you want to add other information 2 Press the REC 0 key The REC key lights up and rhythm song step input becomes possible 3 Use the cursor up key to bring up the indication Event on the first line of the display This screen lets you check which event information is entered at the current point The symbol after Event such as Pt or TS denotes the type of event Entered event type Available events and their symbols are listed in the table below ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm NOTE Time signature information can be entered only at the beginning of a measure f no tempo information is input for the rhythm song the tempo currently set for the rhythm section will be used To ensure that a rhythm song will always play with the same tempo be sure to enter tempo information at the beginning of the song 4 Move to the location at which you want to input a new event For details on how to move the current location refer to page 106 5 Use the cursor up down keys to select the type of e
186. ase use the locate function once again to go to a point that is earlier than the In point 7 rehearse the auto punch in out process press the PLAY gt key The recorder will begin playing When you reach the In point the track on which you are punching in out will be muted When you reach the Out point muting will be defeated You will always be able to monitor the input signal during this time Performing this action will not delete or record anything on the track To change the positions of the In point or Out point press the AUTO PUNCH IN OUT key so that the key goes out and then repeat steps 3 and 4 When you are finished rehearsing move again to a location earlier than the In point 8 To actually perform auto punch in out hold down the REC 6 key and press the PLAY gt key The recorder will begin playing When you reach the In point recording will begin automatically punch in When you reach the Out point recording will end automatically and playback will resume punch out 9 When you are finished recording press the STOP W key 10 To listen to the recorded result repeatedly press the status key for the track on which you recorded until the key is lit green Then move to a location earlier than the In point and press the PLAY gt key To re do the punch in punch out recording repeat steps 5 9 11 When you are satisfied with the recording press the AUTO PUNCH IN OUT
187. ass with built in preamp or a synthesizer or other component with line level output or to connect a mic or direct box you can use any INPUT jack NOTE When a low impedance instrument is connected to a high impedance compatible INPUT jack the respective Hi Z switch must be set to Off disengaged To supply phantom power to a condenser mic or direct box set the respective 48 V switch to On engaged 25 Quick Tour 42 7 48V al Q 48V switch INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 IN 48V HI 48V Hi av LON 48V switches orm orm onm HINT When the 48V switch of the HD8 is set to On phantom power is supplied to both INPUT 1 and 2 lt lt GEID gt gt When on of the 48V switches of the HD16 is set to On phantom power is supplied to the respective INPUT only 2 From the main screen press the input 1 ON OFF key so that the key lights up in red GAIN UNE Mic PEAK ON OFF Red The ON OFF keys in the input section control the status of the respective input When a key is lit the corresponding input is turned on NOTE To record the output of a synthesizer or other stereo component in stereo connect the L and R output to a pair of odd even numbered INPUT jacks and press the corresponding ON OFF keys so that both keys are lit 3 While playing the instrument use the GAIN control 1 to adjust sensitivity gt Fl
188. aster 3 Meter display section 4 Fader section 7 Function transport section HD8 1 Input section HD8 2 Output section INPUT jacks 1 2 MASTER OUT jacks yeu NT MASEROUT AG 9 9 J A 5 Hi Z f N N Hi Z switch Q 48V switch PHONES controls 1 2 wa ES PRONEST PHONES 7 GAIN controls 1 2 REC LEVEL control PEAK indicators 1 2 H T 7 90 0 ON OFF PHONES jacks 1 2 ania ON OFF keys indicator HD8 3 Meter display section eta MID e FQ Low SEND REV SEND PAN Level meters 1 6 7 8 RHYTHM MASTER Parameter select indicators Display 12 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Names of Parts 016 Top Panel GPITS 1 Input section 2 Output section 5 Control section 6 Pad section 3 Meter display section 4 Fader section 7 Function transport section HD16 1 Input section HD16 2 Output section Hi Z switches 1 INPUT jacks 1 MASTER OUT jacks MASTER OUT PHONES jack 48V switches 1 8 LS SS SS SS PHONES STEREO SUB OUT REC LEVEL i NA
189. at you have edited can be stored in any location of the same algorithm You can also store an existing patch in another location to create a copy of that patch Interchanging the position of patches swapping is also possible 1 patch select screen or edit screen press the FUNCTION key once to store the patch or twice to swap the patch prsne segre eme gees gamsa gann ses segue sms g E riii Patch u 2 Verify that the indication STORE PATCH or SWAP PATCH is shown on the first line of the display and press the ENTER key 3 Turn the dial to bring up the patch to store or swap on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The indication Store or Swap appears on the second line of the display 4 To carry out the store swap operation press the ENTER key When the store swap operation is completed the send return effect patch select screen appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time HINT e Patches that you have stored are saved on the hard disk as a part of the project e Patch data included in another project can be loaded into the current project p 136 135 Reference Effects Editing the name of a send return effect patch This section explains how to edit the name of the patch that is currently selected for a send return effect 1 Atthe sen
190. ating an audio CD by album HINT You can create up to ten playlists but only one can be included in an album 1 Perform steps 1 7 of Creating an audio CD by album and bring up the album screen on the display Track 1 2 Press the PROJECT UTILITY key in the control section The display indication changes as follows In this condition you can select the playlist 1 10 to include in the album ort Flaslist Playlist number 3 Turn the dial to select the playlist and press the ENTER key The indication Import appears on the second line of the display 4 To import the playlist information press the ENTER key The procedure is carried out and the album screen returns HINT After importing playlist information you can edit the album as normal ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Creating a CD Playing an audio CD To play an audio CD inserted in the CD R CD RW drive proceed as follows This method can also be used to audition a CD R CD RW disc which has not been finalized yet NOTE ACD R CD RW disc which has not been finalized can only be played with this method Mixed mode CDs or copy controlled CDs cannot be played l Insert an audio CD into the integrated CD R RW drive 2 From main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 1 CD R RW The menu for various CD R RW functions appears 3 Verify that AUDIO CD is shown on the
191. attern Drum sound source You can arrange rhythm patterns in the desired order of playback and program chords and tempo to create the rhythm accompaniment for an entire song This is called a rhythm song Up to 10 rhythm songs can be created among which one is selected for editing playback Instead of the built in drum sound source part of an audio track or an audio file from a CD ROM can also be played with the pads or integrated in a rhythm pattern or rhythm song This lets you create your very own sounds or special effects to a rhythm pattern rhythm song HINT You can process the drum bass sound and imported sound with the insert effect and record it on an audio track of the recorder Mixer The signals from audio tracks and the drum and bass sounds drum bass track are sent to the built in mixer channels for individual adjustment of volume and tone and to create a stereo mix For each track audio track drum track bass track parameters such as volume panning and 3 band EQ can be controlled independently The resulting stereo mix can be recorded on the master track or sent to an external recorder via the MASTER OUT and DIGITAL OUT connectors ZOOM HD8 HD16 Getting to Know the HD8 HD16 Effects The HD8 HD16 provides two types of effects insert effect and send return effect These effects which can be used simultaneously have the characteristics described below Insert effect
192. ay 3 Press the PROJECT UTILITY key once more The phrase utility menu appears on the display 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication CREATE on the second line of 74 the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows This screen lets you select a track V take for writing the phrase loop 5 Use the cursor left right keys the status keys and the dial to select the track V take to which to write the phrase When track 8 of the HD8 or track 16 of the HD16 is selected turning the dial further to the right selects tracks in odd numbered even numbered pairs 1 2 5 6 etc or the master track Pressing two status keys for odd even numbered tracks together selects the tracks as two mono tracks When a stereo track two mono tracks or the master track is selected the V take currently selected for the two specified tracks or the master track becomes the writing target NOTE e By repeatedly pressing the status key of a stereo track you can select the odd numbered track even numbered track and stereo track f the phrase is mono and the selected write target track is stereo the same data will be written to both tracks f the phrase is stereo and the write target track is mono the left and right channels of the phrase will be mixed when the data are written to the track When V take which already contains audio data is selected the
193. ch From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 4 INSERT EFFECT to bring up the insert effect patch select screen Then use the cursor up down keys and the dial to select the algorithm and patch to use as import target The import source can be selected from the patches of the same algorithm Importing a specific send return effect patch From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 5 CHORUS DELAY or pad 6 REVERB to bring up the send return effect patch select screen Then use the dial to select the patch to use as import target 2 At the insert effect select screen or send return effect select screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The display changes as follows 3 Press the ENTER key A screen for selecting ALL import all patches or PATCH import single patch such as shown below appears P 4 Use the cursor left right keys to select ALL or PATCH and press the ENTER key In this condition you can select the source project ZOOM HD8 HD16 Project number Project name 5 Turn the dial to select the import source project and press the ENTER key The subsequent steps differ depending on which selection was made in step 3 When ALL was selected Verify that the indication Import is shown on the display and proceed to step 6 When PATCH was selected The import source patch appears on the dis
194. control waveform Down Frequency changes from maximum to minimum according to control waveform Hi Frequency changes from patch setting to maximum according to control waveform Lo Frequency changes from minimum to patch setting according to control waveform Table 3 Table 4 Setting value Description Setting value Description Setting value Description Setting value Description Up Saw Rising sawtooth wave Tri Triangular wave Eighth note 1 bar 1 measure Up Fin Rising fin wave TrixTri Squared triangular wave Quarter note 2 bars 2 measure DownSaw Falling sawtooth wave Sine Sine wave Half note 3 bars 3 measure DownFin Falling fin wave Square Square wave Dotted half note 4 bars 4 measure PREAMP module FD Clean Clean sound of Fender Twin Reverb 65 model favored by guitarists of many music styles VX Clean Clean sound of combo amp VOX AC 30 operating in class A JC Clean Clean sound of Roland JC series with built in chorus which gives a broad clear tone HW Clean Clean sound of legendary all tube Hiwatt Custom 100 from Britain UK Blues Crunch sound of 30 watt combo amp Marshall 1962 Bluesbreaker US Blues Crunch sound of Fender Tweed Deluxe 53 TweedBass Crunch sound of Fender Bassman a bass amp with a strong presence BG Crunch Crunch sound of Mesa Boogie MkIII combo amp MS 1959 Crunch sound of legendary Marshall 1959 MS Drive High gain so
195. ct Bass Seq for pitch compensation the note in the octave closest to the source material is selected If the Source and the bass track pitch are far apart the results may be unpredictable 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication Scale on the second line of the display then turn the dial to select the scale type The scale type selections are Major Minor and Chromatic When you select Chromatic pitch compensation is performed to the nearest semitone conab ic 56 The following illustrations show pitch compensation for the same melody using D Major and Chromatic Pitch compensation D Major Pitch compensation Chromatic 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication Speed on the second line of the display then turn the dial to select the speed with which the pitch is adjusted The setting range is 0 30 Smaller values result in faster compensation speed For a natural effect select a fairly high value HINT By selecting a very high pitch compensation speed you can produce a robotic voice from a vocal source 5 Press the cursor down key The display indication changes as follows At this screen you can specify the start point in minutes seconds milliseconds measures beats ticks or by using marks To return to the previous screen press the cursor up key
196. cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SAMPLE FILE on the second line of the display then press the ENTER key The sample selection screen appears 4 Press the PROJECT UTILITY key once more The sample import menu appears In this condition you can select the sample import source 5 Use the cursor left right keys to choose one of the following options and press the ENTER key e TAKE Import a specified range of audio data from any track V take in the currently loaded project WAV AIFF FOLDER Import an audio file WAV AIFF from the internal hard disk When importing files from a computer copy the audio files into a folder named AIFF immediately under the root directory top level folder of the internal hard disk The files must have the extension for WAV files or for AIFF files Sample pool Audio file Sample Sample Sample CD ROM R RW Sample Sample Sample 1 1 1 L IIT L7 Projects ZOOM HD8 HD16 121 Reference Rhythm CD ROM Import an audio file WAV AIFF from a CD ROM R RW disc inserted in the CD R RW drive To import a sample from a CD ROM R RW disc insert it into the CD R RW drive The subsequent steps will differ depending on the type of source See the following
197. d line of the display Then turn the dial to select the scale type and the pitch shift direction The following settings are available e Major Up Create harmony a major third up Minor Up Create harmony a minor third up Major Down Create harmony a major third down Minor Down Create harmony a minor third down Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication Feeling on the display Then turn the dial to select the speed with which the 59 Reference Track Editing created harmony will reach the target pitch The setting range is 0 30 The larger the value the smoother the transition to the harmony 7 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication Source Level on the display and turn the dial to set the volume for the edit source The setting range is 0 127 A setting of 100 results in an unchanged level oggi Ed When the SOURCE LVL parameter is set to zero the edit source will be muted and only the generated harmony is written to the track 8 set the pan value for the edit source use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication Source Pan on the display and then turn the dial to adjust panning for the source The setting range is L100 fully left to R100 fully right NOTE When the destination is a mono track the pan setting will have no effect
198. d return effect patch select screen select the patch whose name you want to change 2 Press the EDIT key The selected patch can now be edited 3 Repeatedly press the cursor down key to bring up the indication Patch Name on the first line of the display The name of the selected patch can now be edited A cursor flashing square indicates the character that can be changed 4 Use the cursor left right keys to move the cursor to the character you want to change and turn the dial or use the pads keys of the pad section to select a character For details on entering characters see page 37 5 To confirm the new name do the store operation For details on store operation see page 135 The patch is stored overwritten with the new name and the insert effect patch select screen appears again NOTE Keep in mind that the name will revert to the previous name if you switch to another patch without storing the edited patch name 136 Importing patches from another project If required you can import all patches or specified patches of the insert effect or send return effect from another project that is already saved on the hard disk NOTE Keep in mind that importing patches in this way will overwrite patches in the current project Take care not to accidentally erase patches that you wish to keep 1 Select the patch to use as import target Importing a specific insert effect pat
199. dial to select the kit file whose name you want to change and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows In this condition you can change the name of the selected kit file Kit File Hare HINT When a file with the same name is present in the same folder on the hard disk symbol appears on the display This is a warning that the file cannot be created Use the cursor left right keys to bring the cursor to the character to change and use the dial and the pads keys of the pad section to select a character For details on entering characters see page 37 Note that ZOOM HD8 HD16 available characters are limited 7 Repeat step 6 until the name is as desired 8 When the name entry is completed press the EXIT key Using samples This section describes how to change various settings for samples used by drum kits and how to import parts of audio tracks or audio files on CD ROM discs as samples Making various sample settings The drum sounds samples used in the drum kits of the HD8 HD 16 are stored as files in a number of folders on the hard disk You can specify properties such as the playback range and name of a sample and add a fade in fade out effect When making sample file parameter settings some steps are similar for each action These are as follows 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN or pad 8 SONG so that
200. different scenes per project can be stored Scene data stored in memory are saved on the internal hard disk as part of the currently selected project Saving a scene This section explains how to save the current settings as a scene 1 Press the SCENE key in the control section The display shows the currently selected scene number and name Scene number Scene name 2 Turn the dial to select the scene number 0 99 in which the data will be saved If you select a number where scene data are already saved the existing data will be erased and overwritten by the new data 3 Press the FUNCTION key The scene name is shown with the cursor flashing square on the first character In this condition you can specify a name for the scene HINT The default name is SCENExx where xx is the scene number 4 Use the cursor left right keys to move the cursor to the character you want to change and turn the dial or use the pads keys of the pad section to select a character For details on entering characters see page 37 5 To carry out the store process press the ENTER key The scene settings are saved If you wish to cancel the process press the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key to return to the previous screen Toreturnto the main screen press the EXIT key Recalling a scene This section explains how to recall a scene that was saved to memory 1 Press the SCENE key in the cont
201. diting and editing an entire V take Editing a range of data The procedure for specifying a range within a track and then performing an editing action is explained below Basic steps for range editing When performing editing for a specified range of data some steps are similar for each action These are as follows 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The display indication changes as follows 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication TRACK EDIT on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The track edit menu containing various editing commands appears on the display EDIT 1 18 3 Use the cursor left right keys to select the desired command from the following options e COPY Copy a specified range of audio data MOVE Move a specified range of audio data e ERASE Erase a specified range of audio data TRIM Retain only a specified range of audio data and erase the rest e FADE I O Fade in out Perform fade in fade out over a specified audio data interval REVERSE Reverse a specified range of audio data 50 TIME STRETCH Change the duration of the entire audio data on a track without changing the pitch PITCH FIX Apply pitch compensation to a specified range of audio data HARMONY Harmony Generate Add 3 part harmony to a specified range of audio data DUO HARMONY Add 1 part harmony to a spec
202. drive since your sight can be damaged ZOOM HD8 HD16 Usage Precautions Electrical interference For safety considerations the HD8 HD 16 has been designed to provide maximum protection against the emission of electromagnetic radiation from inside the device and protection from external interference However equipment that is very susceptible to interference or that emits powerful electromagnetic waves should not be placed near the HD8 HD106 as the possibility of interference cannot be ruled out entirely With any type of digital control device the HD8 HD16 included electromagnetic interference can cause malfunctioning and can corrupt or destroy data Care should be taken to minimize the risk of damage Cleaning Use a soft dry cloth to clean the HD8 HD106 If necessary slightly moisten the cloth Do not use abrasive cleanser wax or solvents such as paint thinner or cleaning alcohol since these may dull the finish or damage the surface Backup The data of HD8 HD106 can be lost because of malfunction or incorrect operation Backup your data Copyrights Except for personal use unauthorized recording from copyrighted sources CDs records tapes video clips broadcast material and so on is prohibited ZOOM Corporation does not bear any liability for injunctions regarding the copyright law infringement Please keep this manual in a convenient place for future reference ZOOM HD8 HD16 USAGE A
203. e addition symbol to line up phrases For example entering 0 1 2 will result in the following phrase sequence being written TT gt Repeat phrases Use the x multiplication symbol to specify phrase ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Phrase Looping repetitions x takes precedence over For example entering 0 1 x 2 2 will result in the following phrase sequence being written Phrase 0 Phrase 1 Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Link multiple phrases Use the opening bracket and closing bracket symbols to link a group of phrases for repetition and then use the x multiplication symbol to specify the repetition count For example entering 1 2 x 2 3 will result in the following phrase sequence being written gt Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Ph An example for entering the formula O 1 2 x 8 is shown below e Press three TEMPO foun a times 2 r ome ress four TEMPO Eu times e Press once lt amp 73 Reference Phrase Looping HINT If the formula does not fit on two lines the indication scrolls by one character each If you use the cursor keys to move the input position the line scrolls
204. e Top 0 10 Adjusts characteristic acoustic guitar string resonance Body 0 10 Adjusts characteristic acoustic guitar body resonance Color 1 4 Adjusts characteristics of dedicated electroacoustic guitar preamp 3Band EQ module Bass Treble This is 3 band equalizer Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Bass 12dB 12dB Adjusts low frequency boost cut Middle 12dB 12dB Adjusts mid frequency boost cut Treble 12dB 12dB Adjusts high frequency boost cut Level 2 100 Adjusts signal level after passing module MOD DELAY module Chorus Depth Rate Tone Mix Mixes a variable pitch shifted component to the original si gnal resulting in full bodied r esonating sound Ensemble Depth Rate Tone Mix Chorus ensemble with three dimensional movement Flanger Depth Rate Resonance Manual Produces a resonating and strongly undulating sound Pitch Shift Tone Fine Balance Shifts the pitch up or down Vibe Depth Rate Tone Balance Effect with automatic vibrato Step Depth Rate Resonance Shape Special effect that changes the sound in a staircase pattern Cry Range Resonance Sense Balance Varies the sound like a talking modulator Exciter Frequency Depth Low Boost Enhances the sound outline
205. e EE 91 Reference Rhythm 5 To change the key range of the scale turn the dial The key selected here is the note assigned to pad 1 When you change the key the notes assigned to all other pads will also shift accordingly The range for specifying the key is Cl to B4 which corresponds to more than four octaves 6 Hit the pads to play the bass program The volume of the bass program sound can be adjusted with the RHYTHM fader 7 To switch the scale and key range during play repeat steps 3 4 You can change the scale and key range during rhythm pattern and rhythm song playing When you press the EXIT key the rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears again 8 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key 92 Creating an original rhythm pattern This section explains how you can create your own original rhythm patterns There are two ways of doing this real time input where you record your play on the top panel pads and step input where play is stopped and you enter the sounds one by one Preparations Before starting to record you must make various settings for the rhythm pattern such as number of measures and time signature and quantize value shortest unit for recording By default an empty rhythm pattern has a 4 4 time signature and a duration of 2 measures NOTE After you have started the rhythm pattern input procedure you can no longer change the time signatu
206. e You can also copy audio files via the USB port from a computer to the hard disk of the HD8 HD16 and then use such files as a phrase Project Phrase pool Phrase JO Phrase Phrase CD ROM R RW Phrase Audio track Phrase NOTE e After loading all audio files are played with a sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz If necessary files with other sampling frequencies can be converted resampled to 44 1 kHz Discs that do not comply to ISO 9660 Level 2 specifications will not be recognized e CD R or CD RW discs that have not been finalized will not be recognized S Phrase from another project You can load any phrase from a project stored on the internal hard disk of the HD8 HD16 HINT It is not possible to directly load an audio track from an audio CD as a phrase You must first read it into a track 1 16 of the HD8 HD16 gt p 145 and then load the audio track into the phrase pool Once you have loaded phrases into the phrase pool you can specify various parameters such as playback range and volume level and then you can specify a playback sequence and number of times each phrase is played The result can then be written to any track V take as a phrase loop Project Phrase pool 3 Phrase PI rase hrase rase hrase io track ZOOM HD8 HD16 67 Reference Phrase Looping Loading a phrase This section describes
207. e by the computer for easy transfer of audio files Copy files from the computer to the HD8 HD106 and take them to a studio for adding vocals or guitar solos or copy files from the HD8 HD16 to the computer further processing with DAW software Suddenly the scope of personal recording has become much wider E Use as control surface for DAW software The HD8 HD16 incorporates a control surface function for operating DAW software installed on a computer When connected via MIDI or USB the controls of the HD8 HD16 can act as transport keys adjust the volume etc 8 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Getting to Know the HD8 HD16 The HD8 HD106 is internally divided into the following five sections Recorder Records and plays back audio signals Rhythm section Uses the internal drum bass sound source to play rhythms Mixer Mixes the signals from the recorder and the drum bass sound source into a stereo signal for output via the output jacks and for mixdown on dedicated master tracks Effects Process input signals recorder playback signals or drum bass sound source signals in various ways to achieve various sound characteristics CD R RW drive Allows creating an audio CD or backing up recorded contents Also serves for importing audio material from a CD or CD ROM inserted in the drive The following diagram shows the relationship and signal flow between each section
208. e of the computer 52 Gr MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI OUT po MIDI interface Computer 4 Switch the HD8 HD16 to mass storage mode or control surface mode To use both modes simultaneously you must first switch the HD8 HD16 to one of the modes 5 Depending on the current mode proceed as follows If mass storage mode is selected Hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 2 CONTROL 164 SURFACE At the screen that appears press the ENTER key so that the pad is lit If control surface mode is selected Hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 3 USB At the screen that appears press the ENTER key so that the pad is lit When both modes are used simultaneously the display will give priority to the control surface mode However the icon indicating that the hard disk is in the online state will be shown on the second line of the display Icon indicating the online condition 5 To cancel one of the modes proceed as follows To cancel mass storage mode First cancel the online condition at the computer Then hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 3 USB At the screen that appears press the ENTER key so that the pad goes out The icon indicating the online condition disappears and the HD8 HD16 operates in control surface mode only To cancel control surface mode Hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 2 CONTROL SURFACE
209. e or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Disposal of Old Electrical amp Electronic Equipment Applicable in European countries with separate collection systems This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household waste Instead it shall be handed over to the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly you will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources For more detailed information about recycling of this product please contact your local city office your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product ZOOM CORPORATION ITOHPIA Iwamotocho 2chome Bldg 2F 2 11 2 Iwamoto cho Chiyoda ku Tokyo 101 0032 Japan Web Site http www zoom co jp HD8 HD 16 5000 1
210. e song It is also possible to switch to another pattern while the previous pattern is still playing This mode is suitable for specifying patterns in detail FAST Formula Assisted Song Translator This method uses simple formulas to specify rhythm pattern playback from start to end The result is written to the song in a single operation Because input midway through a song is not possible with this method it is most suitable for cases where the configuration of the entire song has been decided beforehand HINT There is no difference in the completed rhythm song due to input method that was used This means that you can first create a rough version of a song using FAST and then perform detailed editing using step input Selecting a rhythm song Select the rhythm song for editing or playing as follows HINT In the default condition of a project all rhythm songs are empty 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm song selection screen appears Rhythm song number Rhythm song name Ere ta Current position measure beat tick indication Pattern information p 102 or chord information 105 during playback Cursor left right keys Switch between pattern information and chord information 2 Turn the dial to select a rhythm song number from O 9 101 Reference Rhythm 3 To return to the main screen
211. e the copy process press the ENTER key When the copy is executed the EOS marker is shifted back by the number of copied measures By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time 9 Press the STOP W key The unit returns to the rhythm song selection screen To return to the main screen press the EXIT key Transposing the entire rhythm song You can transpose the bass sequence of the rhythm song in semitone units 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Turn the dial to select the rhythm song to transpose 3 Press the EDIT key The rhythm song edit menu appears 4 Verify that the indication TRANSPOSE is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm The display indication changes as follows 2 5 Turn the dial to select the transpose setting 6 0 6 and press the ENTER key The default setting is 0 no transpose operation When you select for example a setting of 6 the rhythm song will be transposed by six semitones up When you press the ENTER key the indication Transpose appears on the display 6 Press the ENTER key once more to execute the transpose operation The transpose operation is carr
212. e the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication BAR LENGTH on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The current bar length is shown Number of measures HINT When a finished rhythm pattern is selected the bar length indication is enclosed in brackets This shows that the number of measures is already set and cannot be changed 7 Turn the dial to select the number of measures The setting range is 1 99 measures When the setting is complete press the EXIT key twice to return to the rhythm pattern selection screen 8 To change the time signature of the rhythm pattern use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication TIME SIGNATURE on the ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm second line of the display and press the ENTER key The current time signature setting is shown Time Signature 4 4 beat HINT When a finished rhythm pattern is selected the time signature indication is enclosed in brackets This shows that the time signature is already set and cannot be changed 9 Turn the dial to select the time signature The setting range is 1 8 1 4 8 4 When the setting is complete press the EXIT key twice to return to the rhythm pattern selection screen Drum sequence real time input For real time input of a drum sequence you play the rhythm pattern on the pads of the HD8 HD16 1 Atthe rhythm pattern screen select an emp
213. e track V take to use as exchange destination and press the ENTER key The indication Exchange appears on the display 3 To execute the exchange operation press the ENTER key once more When the exchange operation is completed the unit returns to the V take selection menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Importing audio data to a V take You can import audio data into any track V take of the currently selected project Any audio data on the destination V take are overwritten by the imported data Besides V takes from other projects data that can be imported include WAV AIFF files located on a CD ROM or CD R RW disc or on the internal hard disk Before importing a WAV AIFF file from a CD ROM R RW disc or the internal hard disk the following preparations are necessary When importing a WAV AIFF file from a CD ROM R RW disc Insert the CD ROM or CD R RW disc with the WAV AIFF file into the CD R RW drive of the HD8 HD16 When importing a WAV AIFF file from the internal hard disk Copy the WAV AIFF file from a computer into a folder named IMPORT immediately under the folder PROJxxx where is the project number located in the root directory top level folder of the internal hard disk For details see page 161 The file must have the extension WAV for WAV files or AIF for AIFF files 1
214. ears pmke he TEE 1 d When you divide a project the number of tracks on the album will increase and tracks corresponding to subsequent projects will be renumbered For example if four marks are set for the project the tracks on the audio CD will be allocated as follows Y VS Project 2 Project 1 marker based marker based separation enabled separation disabled Audio track Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 numbers The subsequent steps for creating the audio CD are as described in the previous section NOTE f the tracks have not been separated as expected press the EXIT key repeatedly to return to the main screen and check whether marker information has been created properly for the project f marks are too close together the indication ERROR Track is Short appears on the display and marker based separation cannot be enabled for that project The maximum number of tracks per album is 99 If you attempt to enable marker based separation for a project and this causes the number of tracks to exceed 99 the indication ERROR Too Many Tracks appears and marker based separation cannot be enabled ZOOM HD8 HD16 Including a playlist in an album The HD8 HD106 lets you register the master tracks of multiple projects in a list playlist for continuous playback in a sequence p 165 It is possible to include playlist information when cre
215. easures beats ticks and minutes seconds milliseconds 4 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section and turn the dial specify the start point HINT By holding down the STOP ll key and pressing the PLAY gt key you can perform scrub playback of the V take of the specified track p 40 The playback range of the sample can be fine tuned also after importing Therefore it suffices if you make a rough selection here fyou specify a point where there are no audio data the second line of the display shows 5 Press the ENTER key The import end point is shown on the second line of the display 6 Specify the end point using the same procedure as in step 4 When you press the PLAY We key at this point the specified range is played 7 To complete the import source selection press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows Sample name HINT Whenasample with the same name is present in the same folder on the hard disk a symbol appears on the display This is warning that the file cannot be created You must first change the name from this screen For details on entering characters See page 37 Note that available characters are limited You can change the name of the sample later p 119 8 To execute the import process press the ENTER key once more When the process is complete the sample selection screen appe
216. eated kit file is loaded all pads are empty 3 Press the EDIT key You can now change the sample assigned to the pad 4 Use the cursor up down keys to select the pad bank and then press the pad to which you want to assign the sample This pad is now selected for the following steps 5 To assign the sample press the FUNCTION key once to bring up the indication LOAD SAMPLE on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows This screen lets you specify the folder where the sample is stored Folder name ZOOM HD8 HD16 HINT For information on the folder structure of the HD8 HD16 see page 208 To assign a sample imported from an external source select the folder OUSER under the SAMPLER folder in the root directory of the hard disk Turn the dial to select the folder that contains the desired sample and press the ENTER key Samples contained in the selected folder are shown Sample name 7 Turn the dial to select the sample to assign By pressing the PLAY We key at this point you can listen to the selected sample 8 Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows HINT With the cursor up down keys you can toggle the indication on the first line of the display between sample name and sample size 9 Press the ENTER key once more The sample is assigned to the pad To cle
217. ecify the end point of the range in the same way as described in step 4 If you press the PLAY P key at this point the specified range will be played ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Phrase Looping 7 When you have fully specified the import source press the ENTER key The indication Import appears on the display 8 To carry out the import process press the ENTER key again The phrase is imported When the import process is completed the phrase menu appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Importing a phrase from a different project You can import any phrase contained in the phrase pool of another project stored on the hard disk NOTE When you import a phrase from the phrase pool of another project you cannot specify a range If necessary edit the phrase playback point after importing the phrase The following procedure will not allow you to first listen to the phrase Confirm file phrase name and number before you start the procedure 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic phrase loading steps to select PHRASE as import source Then press the ENTER key The indication Project Select appears on the first line of the display and the project name is shown on the second line Project number Project name 2 e Turn the dial to select the source project and press the ENTER key The display no
218. ecorded repeatedly To change the pad bank during real time input Hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 9 KIT PROG to bring up the pad bank selection screen Turn the dial to select the pad bank Press the EXIT key to return To switch to a bass sequence during real time input Press the RHYTHM status key repeatedly until the key is lit in red To pause real time input Press the REC key during recording so that the key flashes You can now switch pad banks or tap the pads to check which sound is assigned to each pad To resume recording press the REC 6 key once more so that the key is again permanently lit HINT e You can use step input to add to a rhythm pattern that was created using real time input e After concluding real time input you can change the quantize setting and then record on top of the existing sequence Changing the quantize value will not affect the existing playing information e Instead of tapping the pads you can also input a pattern in real time by using an external MIDI controller connected to the HD8 HD16 s MIDI IN connector For a list of pads and corresponding MIDI note numbers refer to the appendix at the end of this manual 7 To edit the recorded contents during real time input proceed as follows To erase the performance of a specific pad While holding down the FUNCTION key press the pad whose sound you want to erase While you are holding down both the FUNCT
219. ection The selected rhythm pattern is played repeatedly in sync with the recorder operation The TEMPO key flashes according to the current tempo setting HINT e During play the pads corresponding to the currently produced sound of the drum kit pitch of the bass program are flashing You can also tap the pads to play the drum sounds bass notes When the RHYTHM status key is lit in green the drum kit sound can be played with the pads When the key is lit in red the bass program sound can be played with the pads 4 Turn the dial or use the cursor up down keys to select a pattern to use as guide rhythm or Upto 511 rhythm patterns can be used in a project 475 of these are preprogrammed For the other patterns Empty is shown When you turn the dial to select another rhythm pattern while a pattern is playing the new pattern will start after the current pattern has finished When you select a new pattern with the cursor up down keys the new pattern begins playing immediately In this example we will select a simple rhythm pattern as guide rhythm for use during recording If you select for example the rhythm pattern number 510 a quarter note metronome sound is heard ZOOM HD8 HD16 5 To change the tempo press the TEMPO key in the rhythm section to bring up the tempo indication on the display and then turn the dial to change the value Tempo value The tempo value can be set in 0 1 BPM step
220. ed NOTE When a full backup spans several discs restoring a single project requires you to first insert the disc on which it is saved Be sure to note the disc number and the projects saved on the disc on the case and label of the disc HINT When the disc has been ejected it is possible to abort the backup operation To do this press the EXIT key while the Insert indication is shown The indication will change to Cancel Press the ENTER key to terminate the process 7 Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Loading a project from CD R RW disc To restore a project saved on CD R RW disc to the hard disk of the HD8 HD106 proceed as follows NOTE Also when you have backed up all projects in a single operation restore is performed only for single projects 1 Fromthe main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 1 CD R RW The menu for various CD R RW functions appears 2 Usethe cursor left right keys to bring up the indication BACK UP on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication LOAD on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The tray of the CD R RW drive opens and the display indication changes as follows 148 4 Insert the CD R or CD RW where the project is saved into the CD R RW drive Inse
221. eed as follows When using Windows From the Start menu select My Computer and verify that the HD8 HD106 hard disk is shown as a local disk When using a Macintosh Verify that the HD8 HD106 hard disk has been mounted as a local disk on the desktop 161 Reference USB 4 Double click on the HD8 HD16 hard disk shown on the computer The content of the HD8 HD16 hard disk is shown In mass storage mode the following operations are possible Creating a project backup on the computer On the HD8 HD16 project data are stored in folders named PROJxxx where xxx is the project number created under the root directory top level folder of the hard disk Each project therefore has its own folder To back up a project copy the respective folder to the hard disk of the computer using drag and drop Restoring a project from the computer To restore a project that was backed up copied to the hard disk of the computer copy the respective folder on the hard disk of the computer to the hard disk of the HD8 HD16 If a folder with the same name exists on the HD8 HD16 hard disk that folder will be overwritten Exporting audio data from the HD8 HD16 to the computer To use audio data recorded on the HD8 HDI6 on the computer open the respective project folder PROJxxx where xxx is the project number under the root directory to display the contents of the next lower level Audio data are stored as WAV fi
222. eiving MIDI messages sent from an external MIDI device This connector is used mainly to receive Note messages from an external MIDI device in order to play the drum kit bass program or pad sampler MIDI OUT connector Serves for transmitting MIDI messages from the HD8 HD16 Note messages that represent the content played by a rhythm pattern or rhythm song are transmitted from this connector as well as synchronization information for use by an external MIDI device USB port Like the MIDI IN OUT connectors this port can be used to send and receive MIDI messages This lets you play the rhythm section drum kits bass programs from a sequencer on a computer or send synchronization information from the HD8 HD 16 to the sequencer HINT Sending and receiving MIDI messages via USB is possible only under Windows XP and later and MacOSX 10 2 and later The function is available without having to install driver software 154 What you can do using MIDI On the HD8 HD16 you can use MIDI for the following functions Receive and send play information You can use an external MIDI keyboard or a computer to send play information Note On Off messages to the MIDI IN connector or the USB port of the HD8 HD16 to play various sounds of the rhythm section When creating a rhythm pattern you can use an external MIDI keyboard instead of the pads on the HD8 HD16 to input play information You can send Note On Off messages from t
223. endix 1 2 Female vocal 9 A Capla For a cappella group 8 5 6 Vocal duo 7 8 Overall vocal 10 19 Empty MASTERING algorithm No Name Comment 0 PlusAlfa Enhances the overall power 1 All Pops Conventional mastering 2 StWide wide range mastering 3 DiscoMst For club sound 4 Boost For hi fi finish 5 Power Powerful low range 6 Live Adds a live feel 7 WarmMst Adds a warm feeling 8 TightUp Adds a hard feeling 9 1930Mst Mastering with 1930 s sound 10 LoFi Mst Lo fi mastering 11 BGM Mastering for background music 12 RockShow Makes a rock style mix live 13 Exciter Lo fi mastering with slight distortion in mid and upper range 14 Clarify Emphasizes high end range 15 VocalMax Brings vocals to the foreground 16 RaveRez Special sweep effect using sharp filter 17 FullComp Strong compression over full frequency range 18 ClearPWR Power tuning with emphasized midrange 19 ClearDMS Enhances clarity and spaciousness 20 Maximizr Boosts overall sound pressure level 21 29 Empty 196 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Send return Effect Appendix CHORUS DELAY No Name Comment 0 Vocal Chorus adding color to vocals 1 GtChorus Chorus for weak guitar sound 2 Doubling Versatile doubling 3 Ech
224. eration press the ENTER key once more When capture is completed the indication Swap Trackxx where xx is the track number appears on the display This indicates that the track has been captured and can be swapped if necessary By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times HINT By repeating steps 3 5 you can capture multiple tracks Swapping a track You can swap the current data of a track with the captured data 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The indication REC UTILITY appears on the first line of the display and PROJECT is shown on the second line 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication CAPTURE SWAP on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key 3 Use the status keys or the dial to select a track that was captured When you select a captured track the indication Swap appears on the first line of the display 66 HINT If you select a track that was not captured the indication Capture appears 4 Press the ENTER key The indication Swap appears on the display 5 To carry out the swap operation press the ENTER key once more When the operation is completed the audio data of the selected track will have been replaced by the previously captured aud
225. eration press the ENTER key The editing result is written to the track When the process is complete the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time ZOOM HD8 HD16 Editing using V takes Recorded audio data can also be edited in V take units This is convenient for example to exchange the data on two V takes or delete a V take that is no longer needed The procedure is explained in this section Basic steps for V take editing When editing audio data in V take units some steps are similar for each action These are as follows 1 From the main screen press the TRACK PARAMETER key in the control section Various track parameters can now be selected 2 Use the cursor up down keys to bring up the indication Trackxx yy where xx is the track number and yy the V take number on the first line of the display Now you can select the V take 3 Use the cursor left right keys or the status keys to select the target track and use the dial to select the V take number The status key for the currently selected track is lit in orange It is also possible to select the master track In this case the track number indication shows Master HINT Pressing the status key for a stereo track repeatedly selects the odd numbered track and even numbered track in sequence 4 Press the FUNCTION key in
226. essing the REC key 5 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Other Functions Preventing digital copying of a master disc or master tape When mixing down to a DAT recorder MD recorder or similar via the DIGITAL OUT jack you can prevent digital copies third generation copies from being made from your completed master disc or tape onto another digital recorder The procedure is as follows 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The indication UTILITY appears on the first line of the display and PROJECT is shown on the second line 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SYSTEM on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication DIGITAL PROJECT on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The current digital copy setting is shown The available settings are as follows Off default setting Digital copying from your master tape to another digital recorder is permitted e On SCMS Serial Copy Management System data will be added to the digital signal that is output from the DIGITAL OUT jack It will not be possible to make digital copies third generation copies from a master tape or master disc that contains this data 4 Turn
227. et in step 6 HINT The intensity with which you hit the pad is also recorded in the drum sequence e f you hit several pads during input multiple sounds will be recorded at the same position 8 To enter a rest press only the REPEAT STEP key If you press the REPEAT STEP key by itself the position advances by one step duration of quantize value but no play information is recorded Drum sequence step input Quantize setting quarter note Quantize setting sixteenth note 3t 3 7 1 EAT STEP 5 1 ICK 5 KICK 1 i 5 1 D RE 1 5 f t5 P y D 7 96 ZOOM HD8 HD16 9 Repeat steps 6 8 while changing the step length as necessary to enter the desired rhythm pattern When you reach the end of the pattern the unit automatically returns to the first measure letting you enter more instrument sounds When you use the REPEAT STEP key to move step by step through a recorded rhythm pattern the pad recorded at the respective position lights up You can edit the recorded content as follows To delete an entered note Repeatedly press the REPEAT STEP key to move to the position that you want to erase Then hold down the FUNCTION key and press the respective pad The note recorded at that point is erased and the pad goes out
228. exceeded 5 Press the PLAY gt key The stretched compressed track is played from the beginning of the V take If you continue playback to the end of the V take all audio data of that track V take are stretched or compressed HINT It is also possible to change the stretch compress ratio during playback Athe point where you want the time stretch compress function to end press the STOP key The indication Stretch appears on the second line of the display 7 To execute the time stretch compress operation press the ENTER key When the time stretch compress operation is completed the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time HINT When wishing to apply time stretch compress only to a part of the song such as a drum pattern or guitar riff use the copy function or trimming function to create a V take of the desired length first Compensating the pitch of a specified range This editing command lets you specify a KEY and SCALE and align all audio data in a specified range to the nearest note in that scale PitchFix Instead of the scale it is also possible to use a bass sequence from the bass track as reference for pitch compensation HINT The edited audio data after pitch compensation will overwrite the existing data NOTE For pitch shift to operate correctly the audio data should re
229. ey The display for specifying the reverse start point appears For information on switching the display units see page 51 SLart GRRE AES 2 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section of the counter and turn the dial to specify the reverse start point 3 Press the ENTER key The second line of the display now lets you specify the reverse end point 4 Use the same procedure as in step 2 to specify the reverse end point If you press the PLAY key at this point the specified range will be played 5 Press the ENTER key The indication Reverse appears on the second line of the display 6 To execute the reverse operation press the ENTER key When the reverse operation is completed the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time ZOOM HD8 HD16 Changing the duration of an entire track You can change the duration of the entire audio data on a track without changing the pitch time stretch compress The stretched or compressed data can be written over the old data on the same track or pasted on another track while leaving the source data unchanged Time stretch compress E ABCDE NOTE The editing start point for time stretch compress is always from the beginning of the V take The point where you stop playback when checking out the time
230. f parameters can be specified and made active or inactive Group Item EQ HI EQ MID EQ LO TRACK PARAMETER CHORUS DELAY SEND REVERB SEND PAN Play Mute INSERT EFFECT rua Input source CHORUS DELAY Patch number REVERB Patch number ALL FADER Fader position MASTER FADER MASTER fader position For example after you have programmed a sequence of automatic scene changes you may want to disable only the TRACK PARAMETER group and set the EQ and panning parameters manually for each track 1 Press the SCENE key in the control section and then press the PROJECT UTILITY key in the display section The display changes as follows In this condition you can select whether the scene controls the fader action 2 Turn the dial to set fader permission to On or Off 3 To exclude other groups except for the fader from scene control press the key or pad for the respective group Except for the fader scene control for the other groups can be enabled or disabled by pressing one of the keys or pads listed below in the condition of step 1 TRACK PARAMETER group Status key for the track to enable disable except MASTER status key INSERT EFFECT group Pad 4 INSERT EFFECT 85 Reference Mixer e CHORUS DELAY group Pad 5 CHORUS DELAY e REVERB group Pad 6 REVERB MASTER FADER group MASTER status key When a group is enabled the respective
231. f the display and press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to select one of the following settings On Transmission on Timing Clock information will be transmitted when the HD8 HD16 is running default setting Clock Off Transmission off Timing Clock information will not be transmitted Timing Clock will be output according to the tempo of the rhythm pattern rhythm song that is playing In order for the external MIDI device to play back in synchronization at an appropriate tempo you will need to specify the tempo of the rhythm pattern rhythm song Also to synchronize the measure indication at the HD8 HD16 and the MIDI device the time signature of the rhythm pattern rhythm song must be set NOTE Timing Clock information will be transmitted even if the drum bass track is muted RHYTHM status key is out HINT When using MIDI Timing Clock messages transmitted from the HD8 HD16 to synchronize the operation of an external MIDI device you should also turn on transmission for Song Position Pointer and Start Stop Continue messages as well as Timing Clock When transmitting Timing Clock from the HD8 HD16 it is recommended to turn the drum kit bass program MIDI channels OFF Synchronization may become unstable if MIDI Timing Clock and other MIDI messages are being transmitted simultaneously 156 Turning Song Position Pointer messages on or off You can specify whether Song Position Pointer message
232. finished the display indication changes to Complete and the CD R RW disc is ejected If the backup spans multiple discs the CD R RW disc will be automatically ejected after the data have been loaded and the display indication changes as follows When this message is shown insert the next CD R RW disc and press the ENTER key The load operation resumes Repeat this operation until the last disc of the project has been read NOTE If the backup of the project spans multiple discs be sure to insert the discs in the correct order Otherwise the project data will not be read correctly HINT When the disc has been ejected it is possible to abort the backup operation To do this press the EXIT key while the Insert indication is shown The indication will change to Cancel Press the ENTER key to terminate the process 9 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Creating a CD 149 Reference Projects This section describes how to perform operations for entire projects About projects On the HD8 HD16 the data needed to reproduce a song you create are managed in units called projects By loading a project from the hard disk you can always go back to exactly the same condition that existed when the project was saved A project contains the following information Audio data recorded on V takes 1 10 of all audio trac
233. for brass section 16 ShortPla Short reverb 17 RealPlat Spring reverb simulation 18 Dome Reverb of a Domed stadium 19 VinSprin Simulates analog spring reverb 20 ClearSpr Clear reverb with short reverb time 21 Dokan Simulates the reverberation of a clay pipe 22 29 Empty ZOOM HD8 HD16 197 Appendix Rhythm Pattern In Song columns No 35 234 normal patterns and fill in ones are gathered up on a style basis to ease rhythm song programming z o Name ROCKs2VB INDTs1FA HIPs1Vc BALDs1Vb Variation 08Beat01 ROCKs2Vb INDTs1VB HIPs1VD BALDs1FB 08Beat02 ROCKs2FB INDTs1Vb HIPs1Vd BLUSs1VA 08Beat03 ROCKs3VA INDTs1FB HIPs2VA BLUSs1Va 08Beat04 ROCKs3FA POPs1VA HIPs2Va BLUSs1FA 08Beat05 ROCKs3VB POPs1Va HIPs2VB BLUSs1VB 08Beat06 ROCKs3FB POPs1FA HIPs2Vb BLUSs1Vb 08Beat07 ROCKs4VA POPs1VB HIPs2FB BLUSs1FB 08Beat08 ROCKs4Va POPs1Vb HIPs2VC CNTRs1VA oN o a A wow 08Beat09 ROCKs4FA POPs1FB HIPs2Vc CNTRs1Va 08Beat10 ROCKs4VB RnBs1VA HIPs2VD CNTRs1FA 08Beat11 ROCKs4Vb RnBs1Va DANCs1VA CNTRs1VB 08Beat12 ROCKs4FB RnBs1FA DANCs1FA CNTRs1Vb N 16Beat01 HRKs1VA RnBs1VB DANCs1VB CNTRs1FB 1
234. g drum bass track as recording source Recording on 8 tracks simultaneously 8 track recording mode lt lt HD15ET1 Es This section explains how to use the 8 track recording mode which allows up to eight tracks to be recorded simultaneously lt lt This function is available only in the gt gt About 8 track recording In 8 track recording mode the signals from the INPUT jacks 1 8 can be recorded directly onto tracks 1 8 This is convenient to record the performance of an entire band in a single session using separate tracks for the various parts or for picking up a drum performance with multiple mics In 8 track recording mode inputs 1 8 and tracks 1 8 correspond to each other When the status key of a track is lit in red the signal of that input can be recorded on the track When the status key is out or lit in green the signal from the respective input is not recorded and sent directly to a point immediately before the MASTER fader The insert and send return effects are available also in 8 track recording mode ZOOM HD8 HD16 66666968 V VV M Status keys Red Red Red Red Red RedGreen Green or out ro LLL LL PEL 8 track recording mode recording on tracks 9 10 15 16 the master track is not possible The auto punch in out and bounce functions are also not available
235. g level in the same way as in step 2 1 3 To use the insert effect for recording select the algorithm and patch in the same way as in step 2 2 4 When the setting is complete press the EXIT key to return to the main screen 3 2 Selecting a track and recording Now you re ready to record the second instrument on track 2 while playing the content of track 1 and the guide rhythm 1 Repeatedly press status key 2 until the key is lit in red Track 2 is now in the recording standby condition Verify that the status key 1 is lit in green and the RHYTHM status key is lit in green or red 29 Quick Tour HINT If the RHYTHM status key is lit in green the RHYTHM fader can be used to adjust the drum track If the key is lit in red the fader adjusts the bass track 2 Setthe MASTER fader to 0 dB and use fader 2 to adjust the monitoring level If necessary set the recorder to playback and operate faders 1 2 and the RYTHM fader to adjust the monitor level balance between tracks HINT For tracks in the recording standby condition status key lit in red the level meter can be used to check the input signal level For tracks in playback mode status key lit in green the level meter shows the playback signal level 3 To begin recording press the ZERO M4 key to return to the beginning of the song Then hold down the REC 9 key and press the PLAY gt key After the pre count recording on track
236. g recorded audio data or audio files picked up from a CD ROM disc you can create phrase loops for example of drum licks and guitar riffs The playback order and repetition count of loop material can be programmed with the FAST method and written to any track V take as audio data Mixer section supporting automated operation The internal digital mixer can handle the playback signal from the audio tracks plus the drum and bass sound The level panning and EQ settings of each channel can be saved as separate scenes A saved scene can be switched automatically at a desired point in a song Versatile effects In terms of internal effects the HD8 HD 16 provides an insert effect that can be inserted into a specified signal route and a send return effect that is used via the mixer send return loop The effects can be used in a variety of ways either modifying the tone in real time while recording a track or for mastering during track playback for mixdown and bounce CD R RW drive lets you create audio CDs or backups The integrated CD R RW drive lets you write audio data saved on the master track onto a CD R RW disc to produce an audio CD The drive is also convenient to back up data that you have recorded USB port as standard equipment The HD8 HD106 can be directly connected to a computer via the USB port This lets you not only send and receive MIDI information it also allows having the HD8 HD16 recognized as external storag
237. g the drum bass sequence volume level Normally the playback volume of the rhythm pattern can be adjusted with the RHYTHM fader for the drum and bass If necessary the volume levels can also be individually programmed for each rhythm pattern 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN so that the pad lights up The rhythm pattern selection screen appears 2 Turn the dial to select the rhythm pattern for which to set the volume and press the EDIT key The rhythm pattern edit menu appears FHTTERH EDIT L3 IECIT TE m 8 22 E funme 148 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication DRUM LEVEL on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key This screen allows you to specify the drum sequence volume The display shows the current volume setting 1 15 Drum 15 min oon 4 Turn the dial to select the desired setting and then press the EXIT key The setting is entered and the rhythm pattern edit menu appears again 5 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication BASS LEVEL on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key This screen allows you to specify the bass sequence volume The display shows the current volume setting 1 15 Turn the dial to select the desired setting and then press the EXIT key The setting is entered
238. g the low range and passing high frequencies COMP LIMITER 1 8 Rack Comp For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION Limiter ACO BASS SIM algorithms 3BAND EQ 1 8 3Band EQ Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Frequency 80 240Hz Adjusts cutoff frequency Volume Pedal module Volume Pedal For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms MASTERING algorithm COMP Lo Fi module Xover Lo Xover Hi Sense Hi Sense Mid Sense Low Mix High Mix Mid Mix Low 3Band Comp Compressor that divides the signal into three frequency bands and allows individual adjustment of compressor sensitivity and mixing ratio for each band Character Color Distortion Tone EFX Level Dry Level Lo fi effect purposely degrades sound quality Lo Fi Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Xover Lo 50Hz 16kHz Adjusts low to mid crossover frequency Xover Hi 50Hz 16kHz Adjusts mid to high crossover frequency Sense Hi 0 24 Adjusts high range compressor sensitivity Sense Mid 0 24 Adjusts mid range compressor sensitivity Sense Low 0 24 Adjusts low range compressor sensitivity Mix High Off 24 6 Adjusts high range mixing ratio Mix Mid Off 24 6 Adjusts mid range mixing ratio Mix Low Off 24 6 Adjusts low range mixing rati
239. g to constantly lit and the repeat end location point B is set NOTE If you specify a point B that is located earlier than point A the section from points A will be played repeatedly 3 To redo the A B point setting press the A B REPEAT key so that it goes out and then repeat the procedure from step 1 4 To begin repeat playback press the PLAY gt key When point B is reached the recorder jumps back to point A and playback continues 5 To stop repeat playback press the STOP lil key Even after pressing the STOP Bl key to stop playback you can perform repeat playback again as many times as desired as long as the A B REPEAT key is still lit 6 To turn off repeat playback press the A B REPEAT key The key goes out and repeat playback will be turned off The A B point locations also will be cleared 39 Reference Recorder Finding a desired location scrub preview function The HD8 HD 16 provides a scrub function that lets you search for a desired location while repeatedly playing a short section before or after the current point This is convenient to accurately find the point at which a specific sound starts or stops When the scrub function is on you can use the preview function that plays 0 7 seconds before or after the current point By using the scrub and preview functions together you can find the desired location quickly and accurately Using scrub previe
240. ght keys to move to the point where the respective rhythm pattern information is input and then turn the dial to select the new rhythm pattern ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm Select pattern D Y PATTERN A Vv PATTERN A PATTERN D PATTERNC By turning the dial at a point where no rhythm pattern information is input lt Pattern is shown you can add new rhythm pattern information for this point In any case the newly selected rhythm pattern information will be valid until the point where the next rhythm pattern information is input Inserting a rhythm pattern in a song Move to the point you want to insert the rhythm pattern and perform steps 4 7 A new rhythm pattern is inserted at the current location and all subsequent patterns are shifted back by the duration of the inserted pattern Insert PATTERN D Y PATTERN A Vv PATTERN A PATTERNB PATTERND PATTERNC Erasing entered rhythm pattern information Use the cursor left right keys to move to the position of the rhythm pattern information that you want to erase and press the FUNCTION key twice This brings up the indication Event Erase Then press the ENTER key When rhythm pattern information was erased the previous pattern will remain valid until the point where the next rhythm pattern information is input
241. gorithm insert location of the insert effect 1 while the main screen is displayed press the INPUT SOURCE key in the control section 2 Turn the dial to bring up the track to which you want to apply the insert effect on the second line of the display The status key of the selected track lights up in orange If the drum track is selected the RHYTHM status key is lit in green If the bass track is selected the key is lit in red HINT The insert position can also be selected with the status keys To select a mono track x 2 hold down one status key while pressing the other one 3 Press the EXIT key to return to the main screen 4 While the main screen is displayed hold down the SHIFT key in the pad section and press pad 4 INSERT EFFECT While you hold down the SHIFT key pad 4 INSERT EFFECT is lit The display indication changes as follows and the second line shows the currently selected patch ZOOM HD8 HD16 Quick Tour NOTE If pad 4 INSERT EFFECT does not light although the SHIFT key is pressed the insert effect is set to the bypass off condition Off is shown on the first line of the display Press the pad again to light it 5 Use the cursor up down keys to select the algorithm for the insert effect lt lt GEIB only gt gt With the HD16 the number and combination of tracks for insertion changes as follows If necessary repeat steps 1
242. gorithm suitable for microphone recording of vocals etc DUAL MIC An algorithm with two entirely separate channels for mono input x 2 and mono output x 2 LINE An algorithm suitable for recording line level output instruments such as synthesizer or electric piano Algorithm CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM DUAL MIC lt lt only 8xCOMP EQ MASTERING Reference Effects lt lt gt gt 8x COMP EQ This is an algorithm with eight separate inputs output channels available only in the HD16 Separate high pass filter HPF compressor and EQ settings are possible for each channel MASTERING An algorithm suitable for processing the final stereo mix signal The arrangement of effect modules and the signal flow for each algorithm is shown in the diagram below HINT Depending on the selected algorithm the input output configuration of the effect will differ For some insert position settings two input signals or the stereo output of an effect may be mixed to mono p 130 lt lt CEID gt gt With the 8x COMP EQ algorithm the VOLUME PEDAL module is shared by all eight channels Each effect module comprises two aspects namely the effect type and the effect parameters Effect type and parameter settings for an effect module are collectively referred to as a patch COMP LIMITER Patch ZNR MODULATION PATCH gt DELAY LEVEL gt
243. he HD8 HD16 via the MIDI OUT connector or the USB port when hitting the pads or when playing a rhythm song rhythm pattern These can be used to play an external MIDI sound source Send sync information The MIDI OUT connector or the USB port of the HD8 HD16 can supply MIDI Timing Clock MIDI Clock and MIDI Time Code MTC information to a MIDI sequencer or other external MIDI device Playback and other transport operations as well as locate operations can be synchronized Send receive control change information Via the MIDI IN connector or the USB port the HD8 HD16 can receive Control Change messages from an external MIDI device to control the level of the drum bass track Via the MIDI OUT connector or the USB port the HD8 HD16 can send out Control Change messages according to drum bass level information contained in a rhythm song SMF playback The HD8 HD16 can read SMFs Standard MIDI Files from a CD ROM R RW disc and load the contents into a project Once loaded an SMF can use internal or external sound sources and perform playback in sync with the recorder section or rhythm section SMF player function ZOOM HD8 HD16 Making MIDI related settings This section explains how to make MIDI related settings Basic procedure The procedure is the same for most settings The basic steps are as follows 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key in the pad section and press pad 7 PATTERN or pad 8
244. he V take currently selected for the recording track default setting e 1 10 The bounce result will be recorded on the V take of the recording track with the specified number 4 Turn the dial to specify the recording destination V take 5 Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Executing bounce recording This example explains how to bounce the contents of tracks 1 8 lt lt GEID 16 gt gt and the drum bass track onto V take 10 of tracks 7 8 lt lt GEIB 15 16 gt gt 1 Refer to Making bounce settings and set the bounce target track to Play 2 Referto Making bounce settings and select V take 10 for the bounce target track 3 From the main screen press the status keys of tracks 7 8 lt lt 15 16 gt gt repeatedly so that the keys are lit in red Tracks 7 8 lt 15 16 gt gt are now ready for recording 4 Press the BOUNCE key in the control section The key lights up and the bounce function is turned on While the key is lit the tracks V takes selected in steps 2 3 are selected as recording targets 5 Set the recorder to playback and adjust the mixing balance of the various tracks The individual settings for level balance panning and effects all have an influence on the mixed signal that is sent to the bounce target tracks During recording adjust levels while watching the MASTER level meter to make sure that no signal clip
245. he dial to select the project and press the ENTER key This selects the project that will be backed up The display now shows the space required for the backup in MB megabytes 6 Press the ENTER key The name of the folder to be used for backup appears A folder is a hierarchical unit that will be created on the backup media when the backup is executed All data for one project are stored in the same folder When the backup is executed a new folder is created on the CD R RW disc with the name PRJxxx where xxx is the project number This name can be edited 7 To change the store destination folder name use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section and then turn the dial to change the character For details on entering characters see page 37 Note that available characters are limited 8 Press the ENTER key The indication Save appears on the second line of the display 9 To execute the backup press the ENTER key To cancel press the EXIT key instead When the backup is finished the display shows Complete If the project size is larger than the capacity of one CD R RW disc the disc will be ejected after it has been filled up and the display indication changes as follows When this message is shown insert the next CD R RW disc and press the ENTER key The backup operation resumes If more than two discs are required the above steps
246. he level is too high Set the recording level as high as possible but avoid settings that cause the CLIP indicator to light HINT The setting of the REC LEVEL control parameter can be checked by pressing a TRACK PARAMETER key and then pressing the cursor down key so that the indication REC LVL is shown This will call up the precise level setting on the display 5 it you will be recording the sound through the insert effect proceed as follows 1 Press the INPUT SOURCE key in the control section and turn the dial to set the insert position to Input When the setting is complete press the EXIT key to return to the main screen 2 Hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 4 INSERT EFFECT HINT If you want to bypass the insert effect hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 4 INSERT EFFECT once more In the project default condition the insert effect is bypassed 8 Use the cursor up down keys to select an algorithm and turn the dial to select the patch effect program to use 78 NOTE The level of the signal sent to the recording track is affected not only by the REC LEVEL control setting but also by the settings of the insert effect parameters If you switch insert effect patches or edit the parameters you should once again check whether the recording level is appropriate 6 Repeatedly press the status key for the recording destination track until the key is lit in red The i
247. he mastering effect for processing the stereo mix NOTE While the insert effect is inserted immediately before the MASTER fader you cannot use the effect for processing during recording or for post processing of a track To apply the insert effect to the stereo mix proceed as follows Changing the insert location of the insert effect 1 From the main screen press the INPUT SOURCE key in the control section The current insert effect position is shown on the display 2 Turn the dial to bring up the indication Master on the second line of the display Now the insert effect is inserted immediately before the MASTER fader 3 Press the EXIT key to return to the main screen Selecting a patch for the insert effect 4 While the main screen is displayed hold down the SHIFT key in the pad section and press pad 4 INSERT EFFECT The algorithm and patch selected for the insert effect are shown on the display Standard 5 Use the cursor up down keys to select MASTERING as the algorithm ZOOM HD8 HD16 While playing the song turn the dial to select the patch You can edit the patch to modify the effect further p 130 NOTE If the signal sounds distorted when the mastering effect is applied make sure that there is no distortion in the playback sound of individual tracks and lower all fader settings as necessary 7 When yo
248. he root specified for the rhythm song are different the bass sequence phrase will be transposed according to the root input for the rhythm song If the original chord type of the rhythm pattern and the chord type specified for the rhythm song are different the bass sequence phrase will be converted according to the chord type input for the rhythm song Depending on the phrase there may be no change 1 Bring up the rhythm song selection screen and turn the dial to select the rhythm song for which you want to add chord information 2 Press the REC key The REC key lights up and rhythm song step input becomes possible 3 Use the cursor up down keys to bring up the indication Root on the first line of the display At a point where rhythm pattern information is already input the chord information E root E chord type no conversion is automatically assigned E icut Chord root Chord type 105 Reference Rhythm 4 Turn the dial to specify the note name C B that will be the root of the chord The following screen shows an example of changing the chord root to A 5 To specify the chord type press the cursor down key once to bring up the indication Chord on the first line of the display Turn the dial to select the chord type You can choose from the following chord types Description Display Description No conversion
249. herefore also use it as a second headphone jack By changing an internal setting the jack can be made to carry a mix that is separate from MASTER OUT with level pan adjustments for each track input allowing use as a monitor send or effect send The output level can be adjusted with the knob below the jack gt 1 0 You can connect the separately available foot pedal ZOOM FP 01 FP 02 to this jack for adjusting the effect 7 The DIGITAL OUT connector carries the same parameter value signal as the MASTER OUT connectors but in digital format 16 bit 44 1 kHz 1 1 You can connect the separately available foot switch ZOOM FS 01 to this jack for playback start stop z control or for punch in punch out control Expression pedal Digital recorder MD recorder or OPTICAL DAT recorder or similar IN 02 Foot switch Rear panel 7 10 11 1 d a excom me ZOOM CORPORATION mot w cuna CE Sion ROA sii amp FO 8 8 By connecting the MIDI IN OUT connectors to another AC adapter MIDI device or a computer with MIDI interface you can pu exchange MIDI information between the HD8 HD16 and the other device If you connect the HD8 HD16 to a computer via the USB MIDI MIDI port you can exchange audio files and MIDI information
250. hythm 100 Rhythm 0 109 5 119 Specified data 51 lys 62 HD DADGAD e s 168 DAO Disc at once 140 210 Delete Character 37 Kit file 5 2 esr sec 115 Phrases ut xe P EE eS 72 Rhythm pattern 101 Rhythm 0 110 du elvai 120 Demo 0 21 Digital copy prevention 169 140 Drum 87 Assigning samples to pads 112 Importing samples from an external source 121 Setting parameters 113 Drum sequence 87 Drum volume 102 Duo harmony 59 Effect 127 Effect parameters 127 Insert 179 Send return 190 Effect type 127 Effects ol 126 Insert 11 Mastering 4 Send return 11 End of song 102 EOS e tien sheet 102 Erase 2254 eR RESI ERES 52 CD RW 144 Chord information 1
251. hythm song playback 108 Editing a rhythm song This section explains how to edit a rhythm song that you have created Copying a specified range of measures Part of a rhythm song can be copied in measures and inserted into another location This is convenient when you want to repeat a portion of a rhythm song Copy Y 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PATTERN PATTERN A PATTERN A PATTERN B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 PATTERN A PATTERN B PATTERN A PATTERN A PATTERN B Copy 1 2 3 4 PATTERN A PATTERN B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PATTERN A PATTERN B PATTERN A PATTERN B 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Turn the dial to select the rhythm song edit 3 Press the REC 09 key 4 Repeatedly press the FUNCTION key to bring up the indication Copy Start on the display Hi il Copy source start point 5 Turn the dial to select the copy source start measure and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows letting you specify the copy source end point ZOOM HD8 HD16 Copy source end point 6 Turn the dial to select the copy source end measure and press the ENTER key The screen for selecting the copy destination appears Copy destination start point Z Turn the dial to select the copy destination start measure 8 To execut
252. ickers occasionally The GAIN control serves to adjust the input sensitivity of the respective INPUT Adjust the control so that the PEAK indicator in the input section lights up occasionally when you play the instrument at the loudest level 26 4 While playing the instrument use the REC LEVEL control to adjust the recording level The REC LEVEL control modifies the signal level going to the recorder after passing the insert effect Set the level so that the CLIP indicator does not light during play peaks REC LEVEL G CLIP indicator To check the level press the status key for the record target track so that the key is lit in red The level meter for that track now shows the recording level 2 2 Applying the insert effect The signal supplied to the HD8 HD16 can be modified with the insert effect This effect can be applied to the input to any track or immediately before the MASTER fader The insert effect actually is a multi effect unit that contains a number of single effects effect modules such as compressor distortion and delay connected in series The following steps show how to select an algorithm and apply the insert effect to the guitar signal connected to the INPUT 1 jack l From the main screen press the INPUT SOURCE key in the control section PROJECT TRACK UTILITY PARAMETER CY i Jo The INPUT SOURCE key serves to select the insert position for the
253. ied out and the rhythm song edit menu appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time NOTE When the transpose function is used the chord information root entered for the rhythm song will be rewritten To return to the previous state perform transpose once more in the opposite direction 7 Toreturnto the main screen press the EXIT key several times Copying a rhythm song You can copy the contents of any rhythm song in a project to any other rhythm song number This is useful to create variations of a song NOTE When you execute the copy the contents of the destination rhythm song will be completely erased and overwritten by the copy source rhythm song Take care not to accidentally erase a song that you wish to keep 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Turn the dial to select the rhythm song to copy 3 Press the FUNCTION key twice The display indication changes as follows This screen lets you check rhythm song number rhythm song name that will be 109 Reference Rhythm used as copy source SOMG I la ET p m mem reat SLIMOOETZ Copy source rhythm song number rhythm song name 4 Press the ENTER key In this condition you can select the rhythm song to be used as copy target
254. iem RIED 82 Using the solo function 83 Saving recalling mixer settings scene function 84 Saving scene 84 Recalling a scene 84 Switching scenes 84 Deleting certain parameters from a scene 85 Reference Rhythm 87 About the rhythm 87 Drum kits and bass 87 Rhythm patterns 87 Rhythm Song siiis cee gr veda es 88 Rhythm pattern mode and rhythm song mode 88 Playing rhythm 88 Selecting a rhythm 88 Changing the 89 Changing the drum kit bass program 89 Using the pads to play drum bass sounds 90 Creating an original rhythm pattern 92 Preparations IERI 92 Drum sequence real time 93 Bass sequence real time 94 Drum sequence step 96 Bass sequence step 97 Entering rhythm pattern chord information 98 Changing the drum bass sequence volume level 99 ZOOM HDG HD16 Contents Assigning a name to a rhythm pattern 100 Editing rhythm
255. ified range of audio data 4 Press the ENTER key The screen for selecting the track and V take for editing appears The display shown below is an example for selecting the COPY command in step 3 5 Use the cursor up down keys or the status keys to select the track and use the dial to select the V take number On this screen V takes that are not currently selected can also be selected for editing When track 8 of the HD8 or track 16 of the HD16 is selected pressing the cursor right key selects tracks in odd numbered even numbered pairs 1 2 5 6 etc or the master track Master indication appears instead of track number This applies to commands other than PITCH FIX HARMONY and DUO HARMONY NOTE You can also press the status keys for two adjacent odd even numbered mono tracks together to select these tracks Repeatedly pressing the status keys for stereo tracks selects the odd numbered track even numbered track and stereo track in sequence When a single track has been selected as editing source for a command other than HARMONY DUO HARMONY the ZOOM HD8 HD16 editing target will also be a single track When two tracks or the master track have been selected as editing source the editing target will also be two tracks or the master track The currently selected V take for each track will be the target 6 Press the ENTER key The subsequent steps will differ
256. il it goes out 8 To start recording press the PLAY gt key while holding down the REC 0 key EE SCRUB HINT A four beat pre count is heard and recording starts Play your instrument to record 9 When recording is complete press the STOP key The REC key and PLAY We key go out and recording stops 10 To check the recorded contents press the ZERO M4 key and then press the PLAY gt key Le gt Ce 11 To cancel the recording standby condition press the status key 1 so that the key is lit in green ZOOM HD8 HD16 Now let s use your HD8 HD16 to do some serious recording Connect an instrument or microphone and follow the instructions below to get a feel for what the unit can do This Quick Tour describes the five steps that cover the entire process of recording tracks and completing a song Step 1 Preparations Shows how to create a new project select a guide rhythm and perform other steps necessary for recording Step 2 Recording the first track Shows how to record the first track while using the insert effect Step 3 Overdubbing Shows how to record further tracks while listening to a track already recorded overdubbing Step 4 Mixing Shows how to adjust the level panning and EQ of each track apply the send return effect and mix the recorded tracks down to a pair of stereo tracks Step 5 Mixdown Finally the completed stereo mi
257. indication R means that the module for the right channel is selected Reference Effects e lt lt gt gt In the 8x COMP EQ algorithm there is one high pass filter compressor EQ per channel You can control the respective effect on off settings separately The number of the channel that is currently being set appears on the first line of the display NOTE lt lt GEID only The 8xCOMP EQ algorithm does not include the ZNR module 5 To change the effect type of the currently selected effect module turn the dial For effect modules which comprise multiple effect types the name of the currently selected effect type is shown on the second line of the display When you turn the dial in this condition the effect type changes If the contents of a patch have been changed the 3 Edited symbol will appear on the first line of the display ul Effect type name 6 Use the cursor up down keys to select the effect parameter that you want to edit The displayed parameter depends on the effect module and effect type The following illustration shows an example of what appears on the display when you have selected the Depth parameter of the Ensemble effect Algorithm Module indication CLEAN COMP LIMITER Jj PREAMP EG MOD DELAY TOTAL DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM BASS COMP LIMITER EFX PREAMP ZNR VOLUME PEDAL 3BAND EQ PAT
258. ing appears Turn the dial to select whether to perform resampling or not and press the ENTER key The indication Import appears on the display If audio data exist at the import destination the indication Overwrite is shown When the import operation is performed these data will be overwritten 5 To carry out the import operation press the ENTER key once more When the import operation is completed the unit returns to the V take selection menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time NOTE Imported audio files are always played with a sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz If resampling was disabled during the import process a file with a different sampling frequency will play back with a different pitch and tempo ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Track Editing Track capture and swap You can capture the audio data of any track and temporarily store them on the hard disk Later you can swap the captured data with the current data of the track This lets you save the state of a track before an editing operation If the result of the operation is not as desired you can then easily restore the track to its previous state Capture Recorder Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Recorded data h Captured data of track 1 Capture operation for track 1 Recorded data Swap Recorder Track 1
259. ing a 134 PACH T sans 134 Storing swapping patches 135 Sequence 165 Shutdown 2 00 cece eee eee 20 SMF ium ker 158 Output 158 159 Solo function 83 Specifications 174 Step input Bass 97 Drum sequence 96 Rhythm song 102 Stereo 82 66 System version 171 TAO 140 Tempo 89 102 Time 102 Time 55 Top panel HD8 12 Top panel HD16 13 Track RR 10 2 22222 A ER EE 65 Swapiiscs lile lr ied ea thes 66 Track editing Specifying 50 Track 76 Track parameters 31 79 Track parameter 80 140 109 0 53 Trying out the recorder 22 Tuner function 167 168 Bu USB File exchange with computer 161 Operating
260. ings and select the FADE I O parameter Then press the ENTER key The fade I O start point is shown on the second line of the display A AA 2 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section and turn the dial to change the numerals for the fade I O start point Then press the ENTER key The fade I O end point is shown on the second line of the display 118 3 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section and turn the dial to change the numerals for the fade I O end point Then press the ENTER key A screen for selecting the fade in fade out curve appears 4 Turn the dial to select the curve and press the ENTER key When the indication Fade appears press the ENTER key once more The fade in fade out settings are made To return to the parameter selection screen press the EXIT key HINT For information on available fade in fade out curves see page 54 Reversing a sample You can reverse a specified range of the sample data 1 Perform steps 1 8 of Making various sample settings and select the REVERSE parameter Then press the ENTER key The reverse start point is shown on the second line of the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section and turn the dial to change the numerals for the reverse start point Then press the ENTER key The reverse end poin
261. ings are read Wait until the following indication appears on the display This is called the main screen Project number p 23 Project name 23 Current position time indication or Protect symbol measure beat tick indication p 153 Mark symbol Mark number p 47 Cursor up down keys Switch between time indication and measure beat tick indication 5 Cursor left right keys Move the cursor QI 257 4 Turn on the connected monitor system 20 Turning power off shutdown 1 Turn power to the monitor system off 2 Set the POWER switch on the rear panel of the HD8 HD16 to OFF The indication GoodBye See You appears on the display and the unit is turned off BoodEue See Vou When a synthesizer or other electronic instrument is connected turn power to that device off after the HD8 HD16 Caution You must use this method to turn off the power of the HD8 HD16 Never turn off the power by disconnecting the AC adaptor plug from the DC 12V jack or by unplugging the AC adaptor from the AC power outlet In particular you must never turn the power off by unplugging the AC adaptor while the HDD ACCESS indicator is lit Doing so may damage the internal hard disk causing all data to be lost permanently ZOOM HD8 HD16 Listening to a Demo Song When shipped from the factory the internal hard disk of the HD8 HD 16 contains a demo song To listen t
262. int specified here will be erased ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Track Editing 3 Press the ENTER key The second line of the display now lets you specify the trimming end point 4 Use the same procedure as in step 2 to specify the trimming end point If you press the PLAY key at this point the specified range will be played 5 Press the ENTER key The indication Trim appears on the second line of the display To execute the trimming operation press the ENTER key When the trimming operation is completed the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Fade in fade out of specified data range You can fade in or fade out the audio data over a specified range gt Ld NOTE The fade in out command does not simply alter the track volume Rather it rewrites the audio data and is therefore not reversible once executed 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing and select the FADE I O command Select the track V take for fade in or fade out and press the ENTER key The display for specifying the fade in fade out start point appears For information on switching the display units see page 51 2 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section of the counter and turn the dial to specify the fade in fade out sta
263. io data By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time HINT By performing the swap operation once more you can return the track contents to the previous condition return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Phrase Looping The HD8 HD16 lets you handle part of a recorded track or an audio file on CD ROM as a phrase that can be loaded and played freely in a preprogrammed sequence or for a specified number of times The result can be written to any track V take This function is called phrase looping For example you could use a commercially available sampling CD to pick up drum loops in any desired order and use these to create a rhythm track This section describes the steps for phrase looping Which kind of phrases can be used The HD8 HD16 can manage up to 100 phrases in one project The phrases are stored on the hard disk in an area called the phrase pool The following kinds of data can be used as a phrase 1 Any track V take in the currently loaded project You can select any track V take in the currently loaded project and specify a range to be used as a phrase 2 Audio file on CD ROM R RW disc You can load a stereo or mono audio file 8 or 16 bit AIFF or WAV file with sampling frequency 8 48 kHz from a CD ROM R RW disc inserted in the CD R RW drive and use it as a phras
264. it in green 3 Hold down the SHIFT key in the pad section and press pad 9 KIT PROG so that the pad lights up When the pad is lit the pad bank selection screen is shown 4 necessary turn the dial and select the pad bank to play For details on pad banks see page 90 When the setting is completed press the EXIT key to return to the rhythm pattern selection screen 5 Press the REC 9 key The key lights up and the display indication changes as follows In this condition step input of a drum sequence is possible P 4 During drum sequence step input the first line of the display shows the quantize value and the second line shows the current position in measures beats ticks 6 Use the cursor up down keys to select the quantize value This setting becomes the length of the note you want to enter The setting can be changed at any time during step input Quarter note Eighth note Eighth triplet note 16 cuum Sixteenth note default 2 hune Sixteenth triplet note de uiae Thirty second note Hi eco 1 tick 1 48 of quarter note HINT The quantize value setting is linked to the quantize setting for real time input If you change one setting the other will also change 7 Toentera note hit the pad corresponding to the note and then press the REPEAT STEP key The note is recorded and the unit advances by one step corresponding to the quantize value s
265. ithms Time Feedback Mix Delay effect with max setting 2000 ms Time Feedback Mix Warm delay effect with max setting 2000 ms Time Tone Mix Doubling effect which creates body by adding a short delay Delay Echo Doubling Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Depth 0 100 Adjusts modulation depth Resonance 10 10 Adjusts resonance intensity Negative values result in reversed phase of effect sound Color 4Stage 8Stage Invert4 Invert8 Selects sound type LFO Shift 0 180 Adjusts left right phase shift Width 0 10 Adjusts auto pan width Rate 1 50 P180 Table1 enu rate Using rhythm tempo as reference setting in note units is also Clip 0 10 Adds emphasis by clipping modulation waveform Delay Echo 1 2000ms 2 Adjusts delay time Doubling 1 100ms ZOOM HD8 HD16 187 Appendix Feedback 0 100 Adjusts feedback amount Mix 0 100 Adjusts mix ratio of effect sound to original sound Tone 0 10 Adjusts tonal quality ZNR module ZNR For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms Volume Pedal module Volume Pedal For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms 8x Comp EQ algorithm HD16 only Modules 1 8 HPF 1 8 HPF Frequency High pass filter blockin
266. k HINT A mark can be assigned either during playback or when stopped e You can use the scrub function 40 to locate the point with high precision 47 Reference Recorder 2 Press the MARK key in the control section A mark will be assigned to the current location The second line of the display always shows the number of the mark at the current point or the closest preceding mark The marker symbol to the left of the mark number changes as follows according to the current position The mark number and the current position match No mark is assigned at the current position The mark number is assigned automatically in ascending order from the beginning of the song If you add a new mark between two existing marks the subsequent marks will be renumbered Add a mark Mark number HA 1 182 Bi 04 V WV V V Song C Mark number 1 Song HINT Mark number 00 is already set at the beginning of the song the counter zero location This cannot be changed Locating a mark Here s how to move to the location of a mark This can be done in two ways you can use key operations or specify the mark number directly Using keys to locate 1 From the main Screen press either the MARKER lt or gt gt I key in the control section Each time you press the key the unit jumps to the next mark before or after the current location Current locati
267. k and records them on one or two tracks This is sometimes called ping pong recording The illustration below shows the signal flow when performing bounce recording on the HD8 MASTER OUT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM MASTER Tracks 1 6 HINT You can mix the signals from the INPUT jacks into the bounce recording f you select only one mono track as the bounce destination a signal mixed to mono will be recorded f necessary you can play back all tracks and bounce the signal onto an empty V take of a selected track Making bounce settings Before using the bounce function you may have to make certain settings Specifying playback mute for the recording track s By default the bounce destination recording track s will be muted To play back a track while you bounce record onto another V take of that track use the following procedure to change the internal setting so that the recording track s will also play back 44 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The indication REC UTILITY appears on the first line and the indication PROJECT on the second line of the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication BOUNCE on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key
268. k perform trimming of unwanted portions after loading p 53 NOTE The audio data are written to the currently selected V take of the target track If required select the appropriate V take beforehand Material subject to copyright CD analog record tape video broadcast etc is subject to legal restrictions regarding copying Mixed mode CDs or copy controlled CDs cannot be loaded 1 Insert the disc from which to load audio data into the integrated CD R RW drive 2 Perform steps 2 5 of Playing an audio CD p 143 to bring up the CD player screen and select the desired track of the CD 3 Press the REC The display indication changes as follows In this condition you can select the target for the audio data 4 Use the status keys or the dial to select the track for recording the data Only odd numbered even numbered pairs of mono tracks stereo tracks or the master track MASTER can be selected 5 Press the ENTER key The recording destination is selected and the indication Import appears on the display When the track already contains data the indication Overwrite is shown This indicates that existing data will be overwritten when the operation is carried out 6 To carry out the read process press the ENTER key Loading data from the audio CD starts When loading is complete the unit returns to the CD player screen 145 Reference Creating a C
269. k Stereo Drum x1 mono bass x1 Simultaneous recording track 2 8 Simultaneous playback track 11 8audio stereo drum bass 19 16audio stereo drum bass Recording data format 44 1kHz 16bit mono WAV Maximum recording time Approx 3hours GB in mono track Recorder Project 1000 Marker 100 points per project Locator Minite second millisecond measure beat chic Track editing Copy move erase exchange trim fade in out reverse time stretch pitch fix harmony generate duo harmony Punch in out Manual auto Other function Bounce scrub preview A B repeat capture swap phrase loop 14 Fader mono x6 stereo x1 mono x8 stereo x4 master x1 rhythm x1 master x1 rhythm x1 Level meter Post fader pre fader 5segment Mixer Equlizer 3 band Equlizer 3 band Track parameter effect send Chorus delay reverb effect send Chorus delay reverb panning balance sub out send panning balance Stereo linking Tracks 1 2 3 4 5 6 selectable Tracks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 selectable Scene 100 scenes per project 8 CLEAN DISTORTION 9 CLEAN DISTORTION Algorithm ACO BASS SIM BASS MIC ACO BASS SIM BASS MIC g DUAL MIC LINE DUAL MIC LINE Effect MASTERING 8xCOMP EQ MASTERING Patch 310 for insert 60 for send return 330 for insert 60 for send return Module 7 for insert 2 for send return Tuner Chiromatic guitar bass open A D E G D moda
270. k menu for selecting the testing method appears 2 Use the cursor left right keys to select the Scan Disk function and press the ENTER key AUTO REPAIR This function tests all files on the hard disk and automatically repairs damaged files CHEK FILE This function only tests all files but does not automatically repair them 3 To execute the selected function press the ENTER key once more Scan Disk starts By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and return to the condition of step 1 NOTE Once Scan Disk has started it cannot be interrupted by the user Never turn power to the unit off while Scan Disk is running Otherwise the hard disk may be destroyed 4 When Scan Disk is completed press the EXIT key The unit returns to the condition of step 1 172 Returning system file data to factory default Factory Initialize This action restores only the system files and other data necessary for operation of the HD8 HD16 Projects created by the user are not affected by this operation Try this procedure if operation of the HD8 HD16 is still unstable after running Scan Disk 1 Refer to steps 1 3 of Basic maintenance procedure to bring up the indication INIT FACTORY on the display Then press the ENTER key The indication Init Factory Sure appears on the display to confirm the operation Factor Init CT 2 e Tores
271. k of a single project to the disc When using this method it is possible to add audio data later until the CD R RW disc has been finalized Writing by album This method involves first creating a list for the audio CD called an album which contains information about master tracks from various projects that are to be included The CD R RW is then written in one operation and finalizing is automatically performed so that no more audio data can be added later HINT Finalizing a CD R RW disc refers to the procedure of making it playable on an ordinary CD player besides the HD8 HD16 After it has been finalized no more data can be added to a CD R CD RW disc NOTE The waveform data of the currently selected V take of the master track are recorded as is on the audio CD To cut off blank portions before or after the audio material you can use the trimming function p 53 fthe V take is less than 4 seconds long the master track cannot be written 138 About CD R RW discs When creating an audio CD you can select either CD R or CD RW discs as media The features of the two disc types are described below CD R This media type allows only one time recording or adding of data Once data have been written they cannot be changed or erased CD R discs are typically available in 650 MB and 700 MB capacities To newly write audio data of the HD8 HD 16 to disc a blank CD R is required As long as the disc has no
272. k parameter can be selected 3 Use the cursor left right keys or the MASTER status key to select the master track 4 Use the cursor up down keys to bring up the indication SUB SEND on the second line of the display In the default condition of a project the SUB OUT SEND ON OFF parameter of the master track is set to ON This means that the STEREO SUB OUT jack carries the same signal as the MASTER OUT connectors In this condition the signal from other tracks or inputs cannot be sent directly to the STEREO SUB OUT jack ZOOM HD8 HD16 NOTE If the SUB OUT SEND ON OFF parameter of the master track is set to ON calling a SUB OUT SEND parameter for another track input will only bring up the indication xxx SUB SEND Master where xxx is the track input name and no setting can be made 5 Turn the dial to change the setting to Off The level of the signal at the STEREO SUB OUT jack can now be adjusted for each track input individually HINT You can also use the ENTER key to toggle between On and Off 6 Use the cursor left right keys and status keys to select a track input and use the cursor up down keys bring up the indication SUB SND LVL on the second line of the display 7 Turn the dial to adjust the level of the signal that is sent from that track input to the STEREO SUB OUT jack In the default condition of a project the SUB OUT SEND LEVEL for all tracks inputs is set to
273. ke the selection as follows 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key and then use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SYSTEM on the second line of the display 2 Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication CONTROL SURFACE on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The currently selected connector is shown 4 Turn the dial to change the selection if necessary The following settings are available USB The remote control signals are sent and received via the USB port MIDI I O The remote control signals are sent and received via the MIDI IN OUT connectors ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference USB 5 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Switching to control surface mode To switch the HD8 HD16 to control surface mode proceed as follows 1 Select the connector for sending receiving the control surface mode signals as described in the preceding section 2 Connect the HD8 HD16 to the computer using the connector selected in step 1 HINT When using the MIDI IN OUT connectors connect the MIDI IN OUT connectors of the HD8 HD16 to the MIDI OUT IN connectors on the MIDI interface of the computer 3 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 2 CONTROL SURFACE A message to c
274. key pad is lit and when the group is disabled the key pad goes out HINT The on off setting for the TRACK PARAMETER group can be made for each track individually The on off setting for the drum track and bass track can be made together with the RHYTHM status key You can use the cursor up down keys to enable or disable all groups together except for the MASTER FADER group 4 when the setting is complete repeatedly press the EXIT key The main screen returns The settings made here are stored as part of the project 86 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm This section explains the functions and operation of the built in rhythm section of the HD8 HD 16 About the rhythm section The rhythm section of the HD8 HD16 uses internal drum sounds and bass sounds to generate rhythm accompaniment It can be used instead of a metronome by playing simple rhythm patterns or you can program a sequence of rhythm patterns and chord progression into the rhythm accompaniment for an entire song Drum kits and bass programs The sound created by the rhythm section is produced by a drum kit and a bass program The drum kit is a combination of 27 drum percussion sounds samples such as kick snare hihat and conga You can select one of these drum kits and play it manually with the pads on the top panel or you can use it as a sound source for rhythm accompaniment You may also create your own drum kit which gives
275. ks and the master track Numbers of selected V takes for each track e Mixer settings e Settings saved in scene numbers 0 99 e Scene parameter enabled disabled settings Numbers and settings of patches currently selected for insert effect send return effects e Rhythm patterns e Rhythm songs e Selected kit file e Selected bass program Audio data in phrase pool Playlist contents Other required files NOTE Recording playback operations can be performed only for the currently loaded project It is not possible to perform functions for multiple projects simultaneously 150 Project operations This section explains operations such as loading or saving a project The procedure is the same for most project operations The basic procedure is as follows 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The display indication changes as follows 2 Verify that PROJECT is being shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key If the indication is not shown use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication PROJECT and then press the ENTER key The project menu appears allowing you to select the desired project operation 3 Use the cursor left right keys to select one of the following operations SELECT Load a previously saved project from the internal hard disk NEW Create a new project e SIZE View the size of the c
276. l Auto wah dependent on dynamics of input signal Depth Rate Wave Level Periodically varies the volume level Position Rate Color Level Auto Wah Tremolo Phaser Produces a swooshing sound Position Frequency Balance Level Produces a metallic ringing sound Adjusting the Frequency parameter results in a drastic change of sound character Ring Modulator Position Time Curve Level Slows down the attack rate of the sound Position Frequency Dry Mix Level RTM Mode RTM Sync Changes the wah frequency according to rhythm tempo Slow Attack Fix Wah Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Position Before After Sets connection position of EFX module to Before before PREAMP or After after PREAMP Sense 10 1 1 10 Adjusts auto wah sensitivity Resonance 0 10 Adjusts resonance intensity Level 2 100 Adjusts signal level after passing module Depth 0 100 Adjusts modulation depth Rate 0 50 Table 1 vri RE rate Using rhythm tempo as reference setting in note units is also B 7 Sets modulation waveform to Up rising sawtooth Down falling sawtooth or exe UB Dis 3 DONE 0 9 Os Tri triangular Higher values result in stronger clipping emphasizing the effect Color 4Stage 8State Invert4 Invert8 Selects sound type Ring Modulator 1 50 Adjusts frequency used for modulation Freq
277. l Voice 9 Drum 8 Bass 1 Sound source principle 16bit linear PCM Drum kit 20 Drum sound 27 per kit 9 pad x 3 bank Sampling capacity Total 66 seconds per kit in mono 5 5MB Maximum sample is 22 seconds per pad Bass program 11 Rhythm Pad 9 velocity sensitive Resolution 48PPQN Beat 1 4 8 4 Rhythm pattern 511 patterns per project Rhythm song 10 songs per project Measure 999 measures per song 99 measures per pattern Note event Approx 20000 notes per song Tempo 40 0 250 0 BPM Hard disk drive 3 5 inch E IDE type 80 GB CD R drive 5 inch bay type CD R RW model A D conversion 24 bit 64 times oversampling D A conversion 24 bit 128 times oversampling Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz Signal processing 24 bit Frequency response 20Hz 20kHz 1 dB 10 kilohm load S N ratio 93dB IHF A Dynamic range 97dB IHF A THD N 0 02 400 Hz 10kilohm load Display 16 digit 2 line backlight LCD 174 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Specifications Input XLR standard phone combo jack x2 Balanced operation Input impedance 1 kilohm pin 2hot Unbalanced operation Input impedance 50 kilohm Hi Z selectable x1 Input impedance 1 megohm Hi Z switch ON With phantom power supply x2 XLR standard phone combo jack x8 Balanced operation Input impedance 1 kilohm pin 2hot Unbalanced operation Input impedance 50 kilohm
278. l of the track Insert effect Recorder section Insert effect MASTER OUTPUT Track 1 INPUT REC LEVEL Track OOOH Input mixer 7 8 lt lt GEID Track 15 16 gt gt Bass program Drum kit Rhythm section Send return effect Input mixer Track mixer 1 2 lt lt 2191 8 gt gt CHORUS DELAY SEND REVERB SEND REC LEVEL Track mixer 1 2 7 8 RHYTHM lt lt GEID 15 16 gt gt 3 MASTER Send return effect REC LEVEL 7 8 RHYTHM lt GEID 15 16 gt gt 126 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Using the insert effect This section explains how to select the position for the insert effect how to select a patch and how to edit the patch About insert effect patches The insert effect is a multi effect unit that contains a number of single effects such as compressor distortion and delay connected in series Each of these separate effects is called an effect module A combination of effect modules that can be used simultaneously is called an algorithm The HD8 HD106 offers the following algorithms CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM BASS An algorithm suitable for recording guitar bass MIC An al
279. lay File name Turn the dial to select a WAV AIFF file If a folder on a CD ROM R RW disc is selected the indication Folder is shown in the right section of the display PPP TR 2 OH d PP LC Folder name In this case turn the dial to select the desired folder and press the ENTER key Files contained in that folder will be shown To return to the next higher level press the EXIT key 4 When the file is selected press the ENTER key The following steps will differ depending on whether the source audio file is stereo or mono and whether the sampling frequency is 44 1 kHz When the source file is a stereo file A screen for selecting the import type appears Turn the dial to select the import type from one of the following options and press the ENTER key St5 Mono The stereo file is mixed to mono for importing e Lch Only the left channel information is imported Rch Only the right channel information is imported Sampling frequency is 44 1 kHz The indication Import appears on the display If audio data exist at the import destination the indication Overwrite is shown When the import operation is performed these data will be overwritten ZOOM HD8 HD16 e Sampling frequency other than 44 1 kHz A selection screen for choosing whether to perform conversion to 44 1 kHz resampl
280. le from the main unit into the respective connectors on the CD R RW drive 5 Push the CD R RW drive all the way into the bay so that the screw holes on the bottom of the HD8 HD16 and the screw holes of the CD R RW drive are aligned 1 Right side panel Fasten the CD R RW drive with the four supplied panhead screws Then reattach the bottom plate with the screws removed in step 2 NOTE Use only the dedicated CD R RW drive CD 02 made by ZOOM Corporation or our recommendation drive For details our recommendation drive see our website http www zoom co jp ZOOM Corporation will not accept any responsibility for damage or third party claims arising from using any other drive ZOOM HD8 HD16 19 Power On Off This section explains the procedure for turning the HD8 HD 16 on and off Turning power on 1 Make sure that the HD8 HD16 and peripheral equipment is turned off 2 Make sure that AC adapter instrument and monitor system or headphones are correctly connected to the HD8 HD16 For information on connections refer to page 16 17 At this time the volume setting of the connected instrument and monitor system should be minimum When a synthesizer or other electronic instrument is connected turn power to that device on before the HD8 HD16 3 Set the POWER switch on the rear panel to ON Power to the HD8 HD16 comes on the unit performs a self test and system sett
281. lection screen appears 2 e Turnthe dial to select the pattern for which to specify chord information and press the EDIT key The rhythm pattern edit menu appears ZOOM HD8 HD16 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication ORIGINAL ROOT on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key This screen allows you to specify the root for the selected rhythm pattern Chord root 4 Turn the dial to select the root for the chord The available range is C B default setting E When setting chord information for a rhythm song the root specified here will become the default 5 When the setting is complete press the EXIT key The rhythm pattern edit menu appears again Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication ORIGINAL CHORD on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key This screen allows you to specify the chord type for the selected rhythm pattern Z Turn the dial to select the chord For the chord type you can select Major or Minor For example if you have entered a bass phrase with a G major chord in mind set the root to and the chord type to Major 8 When the setting is complete press the EXIT key The setting is entered and the rhythm pattern edit menu appears again 9 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm Changin
282. les in a folder named TAKE on that level Open that folder and copy the respective WAV file s to the computer HINT All tracks including the master track are recorded as monaural WAV files Stereo tracks are also recorded as two monaural files The V takes of the master track can be converted into a stereo WAV file p 43 Importing WAV AIFF files from the computer as V takes to the HD8 HD16 In mass storage mode it is not possible to directly import WAV AIFF files from the computer as V takes to the HD8 HD16 However this can be achieved through the following procedure Open the project folder PROJxxx where xxx is the project number under the root directory to display the contents of the next lower level Copy the WAV AIFF files to a folder named IMPORT on that level When the copy process is finished terminate the connection and use the IMPORT command p 63 to import the files as V takes NOTE Only WAV AIFF audio files in the following formats can be imported as V takes sampling frequency 8 96 kHz quantization 8 16 or 24 bit The file names of audio files must be 8 characters or less using 162 only capital letters or numerals or the underscore symbol The files must have the extension WAV for WAV files or AIF for AIFF files HINT It is also possible to copy phrase loops drum kit samples and SMF standard MIDI files in their respective folders For informati
283. lity mode which serves for performing special functions 2 Use the cursor left right keys to select the desired command The following commands are available INIT ALL All Initialize Format the hard disk and restore system files and various data necessary for operation All existing projects will be erased INIT FACTORY Factory Initialize Restore system files and various data necessary for operation Data created by the user will not be erased SCAN DISK Test and repair the integrity of data stored on the internal hard disk 3 Press the ENTER key to execute the command Subsequent display indications and operation steps differ for the individual commands See the respective section below 4 When the command has been executed turn the unit off and then turn it on again The HD8 HD106 will operate in normal mode 171 Reference Other Functions Test restore integrity of data on internal hard disk Scan Disk This action serves to test and restore data on the internal hard disk Perform this procedure when operation of the HD8 HD16 has become unstable NOTE Scan Disk may not be able in all cases to restore damaged files To guard against data loss it is recommended to regularly back up data from the hard disk onto CD R RW discs 1 Refer to steps 1 3 of Basic maintenance procedure to bring up the indication Scan Disk on the display Then press the ENTER key The Scan Dis
284. ll apply to inputs 1 8 HINT The effects in the 8x COMP EQ algorithm can be switched off ZOOM HD8 HD16 individually 5 When the insert position selection is completed press the EXIT key When an algorithm other than 8x COMP EQ is selected up to two inputs from Input 1 8 can be selected as insert position The ON OFF key of a currently selected input is lit in orange You can use the ON OFF Keys to select the input By pressing two ON OFF keys together you can select a combination of any two inputs Non adjacent inputs can also be selected The lower numbered input is assigned to the L channel and the higher numbered input to the R channel HINT If you have selected two inputs for the effect the inputs will be shown together on the display in the format Inputx y where X y is the respective input number Insertion to track output immediately before MASTER fader To apply the insert effect to a mono track x 1 mono track x 2 a stereo track or immediately before MASTER fader proceed as follows NOTE lt lt GEIB gt gt When 8x COMP EQ is selected you can select either Track 1 8 insert to all outputs of tracks 1 8 or Track 9 16 insert to all outputs of tracks 9 16 HINT To apply the effect to two mono tracks you can only select a pair of tracks in odd even numbered order 1 On the main screen press the INPUT SOURCE key in the control section
285. loop material 5 Use the cursor up down keys to select the pad banks and press the pad for which to make settings The setting for the pad appears on the display For example if Level is selected as parameter and you press pad 3 the display indication changes as follows Turn the dial to select a setting value While the menu for setting pad parameters is shown you can also use the faders to adjust the Level parameter for the pads The assignment of faders to pads is as shown below 114 Fader HD16 HD8 Bad 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 78 7 8 m 8 9 10 9 With the HD8 adjusting the Level parameter for pads 8 9 with a fader is not possible 7 Repeat steps 4 6 as necessary to edit other pads 8 When the setting is complete press the EXIT key several times to return to the main screen Copying a kit file You can copy the kit files in the current project 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN or pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Press the PROJECT UTILITY key The rhythm utility menu screen appears 3 Verify that the indication KIT FILE is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows KIT FILE 1 6 4 Use
286. loud sounds will not be produced even when you hit the pad strongly Change the pad sensitivity setting p 125 Cannot record or edit a rhythm pattern rhythm song If the display indicates Sequence Full the rhythm section memory has been used to maximum capacity Delete unneeded rhythm patterns to free up memory Sounds recorded in the rhythm pattern do not play Sounds that exceed the maximum polyphony 8 sounds for the drum kit and 1 sound for the bass program will not be ZOOM HD8 HD16 Troubleshooting played Either delete some of the notes that have been recorded or stay within the maximum polyphony when you record Cannot play drum kit With a new drum kit no samples will be assigned to the pads Assign samples to pads or select an existing kit file Cannot add samples to kit file If the display indicates Sample Full the kit file memory has been used to maximum capacity Delete unneeded samples to free up memory Problems with MIDI The HD8 HD16 s drum kit bass program sounds cannot be played from external MIDI device Make sure that the MIDI cable is correctly connected from the MIDI OUT connector of the external device to the HD8 HD16 s MIDI IN connector Make sure that the MIDI send channels of the external device match the MIDI receive channels for drum kit bass program at the HD8 HD106 During rhythm pattern step input an external MIDI device cannot be used C
287. making it more prominent Air Size Reflex Tone Recreates the airy ambience of a room with a feeling of depth Wide Time Wet Level Dry Level Produces a stereo sound as if recorded with 2 mics Delay Time Feedback Hi Damp Mix Delay effect with max setting 2000 ms Analog Delay Time Feedback Hi Damp Mix Delay effect with max setting 2000 ms Simulates the warm sound of an analog delay Reverse Delay Time Feedback Hi Damp Balance Reverse delay effect with max setting 1000 ms ARRM Pitch ZOOM HD8 HD16 Type Tone RTM Wave RTM Sync Changes the pitch of the original sound according to rhythm tempo 181 Appendix Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Exciter 0 30 Adjusts effect depth Depth Others 0 100 Adjusts modulation depth Chorus Ensemble 1 50 Adjusts modulation rate Rate Flanger Vibe Step 0 50 Adjusts modulation rate Using rhythm tempo as reference setting in note units is also 180 Table 1 possible Tone 0 10 Adjusts tonal quality Mix 0 100 Adjusts mix ratio of effect sound to original sound Flanger 10 10 Adjusts resonance intensity Negative values result in reversed phase of effect sound Reso
288. mber Source project name 5 Turn the dial to select the source project and press the ENTER key Kit files included in the selected project are listed Kit file name 6 Turn the dial to select the kit file and press the ENTER key HINT When a file with the same name is present in the same folder on the hard disk a symbol appears on the display This is a warning that the file cannot be created You must first change the name from this screen For details on entering characters see page 37 Note that available characters are limited You can change the name of the kit file later gt p 116 7 To execute the import process press the ENTER key once more 116 Assigning a name to a kit file You can assign a name to a kit file as follows 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN or pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Press the PROJECT UTILITY key The rhythm utility menu screen appears 3 Verify that the indication KIT FILE is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication NAME on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 5 Turn the
289. me chord throughout NOTE When the rhythm pattern rhythm song is Empty the harmony create function is not available Forthe harmony create function to work properly the audio data should represent single notes recorded without applying delay reverb chorus or other effects 1 Select the rhythm pattern or rhythm song to be used for harmony generation When the selection is finished press the EXIT key to return to the main screen NOTE Make sure that the selected rhythm pattern rhythm song comprises suitable chord information 2 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing and select the HARMONY command Then select the track V take for harmony generation and press the ENTER key The indication Dst appears on the first line of the display In this condition you can select the target destination for writing the harmony NOTE You can only select a single mono track or one track of a stereo pair as source track for Harmony Generate 57 Reference Track Editing 3 Use the cursor left right keys or the status keys to select the target track and use the dial to select the V take number If you specify the same track V take as the source the harmony data will be added to the original data and the V take will be overwritten You can also specify a stereo track or two mono tracks as destination HINT During parameter setting and harmony generation the s
290. messages including Pitch Bend messages for the bass track these will alter the corresponding parameters of the internal sound sources volume pitch 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The indication UTILITY appears on the first line and the indication PROJECT on the second line of the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SMF on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The SMF menu appears on the display 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication CHANNEL TO DRUM or CHANNEL TO BASS on the display and ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference MIDI press the ENTER key If CHANNEL TO DRUM was selected the display indication changes as follows 4 Turn the dial to select Off or 1 16 and then press the EXIT key HINT The factory default setting for a project is 10 MIDI channel 10 for the Channel To Drum parameter and 9 MIDI channel 9 for the Channel To Bass parameter 5 Make the setting for the other parameter in the same way return to the main screen press the EXIT key SMF playback You can select any SMF imported into a project and play it as follows NOTE e When playing an SMF the rhythm section tempo will be disregarded and playback starts with the timing programmed in the SMF However if a tempo change event is programmed somewhere in the rh
291. n Gt 01 1C Electric guitar loop on C min Gt 01 1D Rockabilly guitar loop on A min Gt 01 1E Funk guitar loop on A7 9 Gt 01 1F Funk guitar loop on D min9 Gt 01 1G Hard rock guitar loop on B min Gt 01 1H Rock guitar loop on A min Synth Bass AG 01 1A Analog bass loop 1 AG 01 1B Synth bass loop 1 AG 01 1C Synth bass loop 2 AG 01 1D Synth bass loop 3 AG 01 1E Analog bass loop 2 AG 01 1F Analog bass loop 3 AG 01 1G Synth bass loop 4 Synth Rhythm AG 02 1A Synth loop 1 AG 02 1B Synth loop 2 AG 02 1C Synth loop 3 AG 02 1D Synth loop 4 AG 02 1E Synth loop 5 AG 02 1F Synth loop 6 Synth Textures AG 03 1A String amp synth loop AG 03 1B String loop 1 AG 03 1C String loop 2 AG 03 1D String loop 3 FX Loops FX 01 1A Fx loop 1 FX 01 1B Fx loop 2 FX 01 1C Fx loop 3 FX 01 1D With the factory default settings project 001 contains these phrases ZOOM HD8 HD16 Fx loop 4 Appendix 207 Appendix HD8 HD16 Hard Disk Contents The hard disk in the HD8 HD 16 is composed of two partitions called HD USR and HD FAC HD USR 208 PRUJINIT folder WAV_AIFF folder The HD FAC partition contains files to perform hard disk maintenance Never attempt to manipulate the files in this partition Do
292. n PROTECT on the second line of the display Then press the ENTER key The screen for setting the protect status to On Off is shown on the display Ort 2 Turn the dial to select On protect enabled or Off protect disabled When a project is loaded for which protect is On a lock symbol is shown in the top right of the display Lock symbol NOTE A project that is not protected will be automatically saved when power is turned off or when another project is loaded If you have finished a song we recommend to turn protect On This will prevent inadvertently saving changes caused by operation steps that you have taken after finishing the song Achange in the protect On Off setting becomes active immediately To return to the main screen after making the setting press the EXIT key several times 153 Reference MIDI This section explains the MIDI related settings and functions of the HD8 HD 16 About MIDI MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface is a standard that allows messages such as performance data collectively called MIDI messages to be exchanged between devices such as electronic musical instruments and computers The HD8 HD 16 supports the use of external MIDI devices and the transfer of MIDI messages via the MIDI IN OUT connectors and via the USB port MIDI IN OUT connectors O USB port MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN connector Serves for rec
293. n Current location Scrub playback Scrub playback EI AEE qu pcd Play section up to current point Play section from current point To exit the scrub function press the STOP Bl key ZOOM HD8 HD16 Re recording only a specified region punch in out function Punch in out is a function that lets you re record just a specified region of a previously recorded track The action of switching a currently playing track to record mode is called and the action of switching back from recording to playback is called punch out The HD8 HD16 provides two ways to do this You can use the panel keys or a foot switch ZOOM FS 01 sold separately to punch in out manually manual punch in out or you can cause punch in out to occur automatically at previously specified points auto punch in out NOTE lt lt GEID only When the 8 track recording function p 46 is active punch in out cannot be used Using manual punch in out To perform manual punch in out proceed as follows HINT To use a foot switch for punch in out connect the separately available ZOOM FS 01 to the CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel n the default condition of the HD8 HD16 the foot switch is set to control recorder playback stop To use the foot switch to punch in out you must first change the foot switch setting p 169 1 Repeatedly press the status key of the track on which to perform punch
294. n cancel the operation and back up one step at a time HINT The name PHxxx yy is automatically assigned to the loaded phrase where xxx is the project number and yy the phrase number NOTE Imported audio files are always played with a sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz If resampling was disabled during the import process a file with a different sampling frequency will play back with a different pitch and tempo Adjusting phrase parameters Once you have imported a phrase into the phrase pool you will need to specify parameters such as playback range and number of measures 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key in the display section The indication REC UTILITY appears on the first line of the display and PROJECT is shown on the second line 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication PHRASE on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The phrase screen appears on the display ZOOM HD8 HD16 3 Turn the dial to select the phrase that you want to edit When you press the PLAY Be key the selected phrase is played If you select a number where no phrase is imported the indication EMPTY appears instead of the phrase name 4 Press the EDIT key A parameter of the selected phrase appears 5 Use the cursor up down keys to call up the parameter you want to edit Measure x This parameter specifies to h
295. n displays the size of the currently loaded project the available capacity of the internal hard disk and the remaining recording time 1 Refer to steps 1 3 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication SIZE on the second line of the display Then press the ENTER key 2 Use the cursor up down keys to select the desired screen from one the following options Remain MB units This shows the remaining space on the internal hard disk in MB megabyte units Remain h m s units The approximate recordable time calculated for a single track is shown in hours h minutes m and seconds s Project Size MB units This shows the size of the currently loaded project in MB megabyte units Project Size h m s units This shows the size of the currently loaded project calculated for a single track in hours h minutes m and seconds s To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times NOTE These screens are for display only and contain no items that can be edited The remaining recordable time is an approximation Use it for general reference only 152 Duplicating a project This operation copies a specified project that is saved on the hard disk 1 Refer to steps 1 3 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication COPY on the second line of the display Then press the ENTER key The name and number of the project to copy are shown on the
296. n to 44 1 kHz resampling appears ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm LOOF WAL ResamPle Ur Turn the dial to select whether to perform resampling or not and press the ENTER key The indication Create Sample appears on the first line of the display Press the ENTER key once more to import the file HINT While the indication Create Sample is shown on the first line of the display it is possible to change the sample name For details on entering characters see page 37 You can also change the name of the sample later p 119 The imported sample is saved in a folder called DUSER in the SAMPLER folder immediately under the root directory top level folder of the internal hard disk NOTE Imported audio files are always played with a sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz If resampling was disabled during the import process a file with a different sampling frequency will play back with a different pitch and tempo 123 Reference Rhythm Editing various settings of the rhythm section This section explains how to edit various settings that affect the entire rhythm section such as adjusting the pad sensitivity or adjusting the volume of the metronome Basic procedure The basic procedure for editing the rhythm section settings is the same for most items as described below HINT This procedure can be carried out either in rhythm pattern mode or rhythm song mode 1 From the main screen
297. nance Step Cry 0 10 Adjusts effect intensity Manual 0 100 Adjusts frequency range of effect Shift 12 12 24 Adjusts pitch shift amount in semitone units Fine 25 25 Adjusts pitch shift amount in cent 1 100 semitone units Balance 0 100 Adjusts balance between original sound and effect sound Shape 0 10 Adjusts effect sound envelope Range 1 10 Adjusts frequency range of effect Sense 10 1 1 10 Adjusts effect sensitivity Frequency 1 5 Adjusts frequency of effect Low Boost 0 10 Adjusts low frequency boost Size 1 100 Adjusts size of simulated space Reflex 0 10 Adjusts amount of wall reflections Wide 1 64 Time Delay Analog Delay 1 2000ms Adjusts delay time Reverse Delay 10 1000ms 2 Wet Level 0 30 Adjusts effect sound level Dry Level 0 30 Adjusts original sound level Feedback 0 100 Adjusts feedback amount Hi Damp 0 10 Adjusts intensity of delay sound high range damping Type Table 5 Selects pitch change type RTM Wave Table 3 page 180 Selects control waveform RTM Sync Table 4 page 180 Selects control waveform cycle Table 5 Setting value Description Setting value Description 1 1 semitone lower original sound 9 1 octave lower original sound 1 octave higher original sound 2 Original sound 1 semitone lower 10 1 octave higher original sound 1 octave lower original sound 3 Doubling detune original sound 11 Complete fifth down original sound gt complete fourth up original
298. nd line of the display Press the same pad once more so that it lights up 2 Turn the dial to select a patch The send return effect can use 30 patches each numbered 0 29 for the chorus delay and reverb effect These patches can be edited to modify the effect further p 134 3 Select the patch for the other send return effect in the same way 4 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key HINT In the project default condition the send level for the send return effect is set to zero for each track Therefore you need to raise the setting to verify the sound produced by the effect Adjusting the send return effect intensity for each track 5 Repeatedly press the SELECT key to bring up the indication DLY SEND to set the chorus delay send level or REV SEND to set the reverb send level on the display The selected track parameter is shown by the parameter select indicator O EQ HIGH O EQ MID O EQ LOW ODLY SEND REV SEND O SUB SEND OPAN ZOOM HD8 HD16 6 While playing the song turn the parameter knob to adjust the send level value for each track 7 Adjust the intensity of the other send return effect in the same way 8 e Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key 4 4 Applying the insert effect to a track You can apply the insert effect to the output of any track so that it post processes the output signal of the track Changing the al
299. nd return effect The HD8 HD16 incorporates two kinds of send return effects chorus delay and reverb Send CHORUS O 0O HEX CHORUS lt lt _ DELAY SEND LEVEL REVERB gt SEND LEVEL gt REVERB 7 8 RHYTHM MASTER a n Return The intensity of the send return effect can be adjusted for each track by using the send level parameter which controls the signal level that is sent to the effect Increasing this parameter will result in stronger effect action This section describes how to select the send return effect type and adjust the send level for each track Selecting the send return effect patch 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 5 CHORUS DELAY or pad 6 REVERB While you hold down the SHIFT key pad 5 CHORUS DELAY and pad 6 REVERB are lit Press pad 5 CHORUS DELAY to select a chorus delay patch or pad 6 REVERB to select a reverb patch If you select pad 6 REVERB the display will change as follows and the second line of the display shows the number and name of the currently selected patch 32 Patch name Patch number NOTE If pad 5 CHORUS DELAY or pad 6 REVERB does not light when you press the SHIFT key the chorus delay or reverb effect is set to off the indication Off is shown on the seco
300. ng level as high as possible but avoid settings that cause the CLIP indicator to light In the recording standby condition status key lit in red the level of the input signal can be checked with the respective level meter 7 Repeatedly press the status keys for the tracks to be recorded so that the keys are lit in red Up to eight status keys can be activated simultaneously When a track is switched to the recording standby condition the signal from the input mixer will be sent to the corresponding recording track If the ON OFF key for an input is ON but the corresponding status key is lit green or is off the respective input will not be recorded 8 Move to the start point of the recorder and start recording When recording is finished stop the recorder 9 cancel the 8 track recording condition press the STRACK RECORDING key The key goes out Marker function This function lets you set marks at any recorder position and return to the mark using a simple operation Up to 100 marks can be set HINT t is also possible to switch mixer settings or effect setting groups scenes at a marked position p 84 When creating an audio CD marks can be used to provide index information This will allow the CD player to access specific points within a song p 142 Setting a mark Here s how to assign a mark at the desired location in a song 1 Locate the point where you want to set a mar
301. ng settings press the EXIT key several times to return to the main screen Setting the drum kit bass program MIDI channel You can specify the MIDI channels for the drum kit and bass program Refer to steps 1 4 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication DRUM CHANNEL or BASS CHANNEL on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to select one of the following settings 1 16ch Select one of MIDI channels 1 16 Default Drum Channel 10ch Bass Channel 9ch e Off Channel messages Note On Off Control Change and other messages will not be sent or received If you specify a MIDI channel 1 16 for the drum kit or bass program you can transmit Note On Off messages from an external MIDI device on that MIDI channel to play the sounds of the HD8 HD16 Also when you play back a rhythm pattern or rhythm song on the HD8 HD106 the drum bass track playing information will 155 Reference MIDI be transmitted as Note On Off messages HINT If you set the drum kit and bass program to the same MIDI channel playing information for both will be handled together and appear at the MIDI OUT connector or USB port Turning Timing Clock messages on or off This setting specifies whether the MIDI synchronization message Timing Clock will be transmitted Refer to steps 1 4 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication CLOCK on the second line o
302. not rename the HD USR files and folders unnecessarily since the HD8 HD16 will not recognize the renamed files or folders PRJDATA INI Project data RHYTHM SEQ Rhythm pattern rhythm song data KIT folder Contains drum kit bass program data 2 Stores WAV AIFF files Used when importing sample and phrase from the internal hard disk To operate this folder change HD8 HD16 to USB mass storage mode and copy WAV AIFF files from a computer to this folder SYS folder Contains the system related files MAC_PRM INI Number of most recently edited project BURNLIST CDT Album data EQPLYxx LST Play list data SAMPLE folder Contains samples constituting a kit Each sample is stored in a subfolder distributed between a category unit KICK SNARE 8 Audio data for each sample mono or stereo left channel SPR Audio data for each sample stereo right channel PROJxxx folder Contains various data for each project PHRASExx PH Audio data for each phrase mono or stereo left channel PHRASExx PHR Audio data for each phrase stereo right channel LOOPxx LSQ Expression data entered to create phrase loop RHYTHM FST Expression data entered to create rhythm song with FAST method PRJDATA INI Project setting data RHYTHM SEQ Rhythm pattern rhythm
303. nput signal from the input mixer will be sent to the recording track Normally you can select record mode for up to two mono tracks or one stereo track When selecting two mono tracks only odd even combinations are allowed To select the tracks repeatedly press the status key for one track until the key is lit in red and then hold the key while pressing the status key for the other track until it is also lit in red The signal flow from the input mixer to the track will change as follows depending on the number of inputs and recording tracks Mono track selected as recording track Recorder 7 gt a O Track UN J INPUT 1 Recorder INPUT 2 Track Stereo track or two mono tracks selected as recording track Recorder INPUT 1 Z N ON OFF Track Track INPUT 1 Recorder INPUT 2 HINT When two inputs are assigned to a stereo track or two mono tracks the signal from the input with the lower number will go to the odd numbered track and the signal from the input with the higher number to the even numbered track ZOOM HD8 HD16 No track selected as recording track INPUT 1 PAN ON OFF Track mixer MASTER fader ON OFF INPUT 1 PAN BALANCE Input with lower number gt L ON OFF INPUT2 Inp
304. o Character 0 10 Adjusts filter characteristics Color 1 10 Adjusts sound color Distortion 0 10 Adjusts distortion Tone 0 10 Adjusts tonal quality 188 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Appendix EFX Level 0 100 Adjusts effect sound level Dry Level 0 100 Adjusts original sound level NORMALIZER module Gain Adjusts COMP Lo Fi module input level Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Gain 12 12 Adjusts level 3BAND EQ module 3Band EQ For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms DIMENSION RESO module Rise1 Rise2 Dimension Effect producing spatial expansion Depth Freq Offset Filter Type Resonance EFX Level Resonance filter with LFO Resonance Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Rise1 0 30 Adjusts stereo component intensity Rise2 0 30 Adjusts mono component intensity Depth 0 100 Adjusts effect depth Freq Offset 1 30 Adjusts LFO offset Rate 1 50 P180 Table1 rate Using rhythm tempo as reference setting in note units is also Filter Type HPF LPF BPF Selects filter type Resonance 1 30 Adjusts resonance intensity EFX Level 0 100 Adjusts effect sound level Dry Level 0 100 Adjusts original sound level ZNR module ZNR For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION
305. o Showy analog style delay 4 Delay3 4 Dotted 8th note delay in sync with rhythm tempo 5 Delay3 2 Dotted quarter note delay in syne with rhythm tempo 6 FastCho Fast rated chorus 7 DeepCho Versatile deep chorus 8 ShortDLY Versatile short delay 9 DeepDBL Deep doubling 10 SoloLead Keeps fast phrases tight 11 WarmyDly Simulates warm analog delay 12 EnhanCho Enhancer using phase shift doubling 13 Detune For instruments with strong harmonics such as electronic piano or synthesizer 14 Natural Chorus with low modulation for backing 15 Whole Whole note delay in sync with rhythm tempo 16 Delay2 3 Half triplet note delay in sync with rhythm tempo 17 Delay1 4 16th note delay in sync with rhythm tempo 18 29 Empty REVERB No Name Comment 0 TightHal Hall reverb with a hard tonal quality 1 BrgtRoom Room reverb with a hard tonal quality 2 SoftHall Hall reverb with a mild tonal quality 3 LargeHal Simulates the reverberation of a large hall 4 SmallHal Simulates the reverberation of a small hall 5 LiveHous Simulates the reverberation of a club 6 TrStudio Simulates the reverberation of a rehearsal studio 7 DarkRoom Room reverb with a mild tonal quality 8 VcxRev Tuned to enhance vocals 9 Tunnel Simulates the reverberation of a tunnel 10 BigRoom Simulates the reverberation of a gym 11 PowerSt Gate reverb 12 BritHall Simulates the bright reverb of a concert hall 13 BudoKan Simulates the reverberation at Budokan in Tokyo 14 Ballade For slow ballads 15 SecBrass Reverb
306. o it proceed as follows Selecting the demo song On the HD8 HD16 song data are managed in units called projects A project encompasses recorded audio data rhythm and effect settings and other information When you load a project the complete state in which that song was saved will be reproduced To load a demo song project from the hard disk proceed as follows 1 At the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The display changes as follows 3 Verify that the indication SELECT is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key If SELECT is currently not shown use the cursor left right keys to bring it up and then press the ENTER key Project number zm roject name In this condition you can select a project stored on the hard disk 4 Turn the dial to select the demo song Project number 0 is the demo song 5 Press the ENTER key The HDD ACCESS indicator flashs up and the selected project is loaded When the respective project display appears on the main screen the demo song has been loaded ZOOM HD8 HD16 Playing the demo song After loading play the demo song as follows 1 Turn down the volume of the monitor system When headphones are connected turn down the PHONES control 2 Press the PLAY gt key in the transport section Playback of the demo song starts 3 Adjust the monitor system volume setting or the
307. o the respective sections 5 When the setting procedure is complete press the EXIT key several times to return to the main screen Changing the length of the pre count You can change the length of the pre count that is heard when you record a rhythm pattern in real time Perform steps 1 3 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication COUNT and press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to choose one of these settings e OFF The pre count is turned off e1 8 A pre count of 1 8 beats is heard default 4 Special The following special pre count is heard e 5 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Changing the metronome volume You can change the volume of the metronome that is heard when you record a rhythm pattern in real time Perform steps 1 3 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication CLICK VOLUME and press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to set the volume 0 15 Adjusting the sensitivity of the pads You can specify the volume that is produced according to the force with which you hit the pads pad sensitivity Perform steps 1 3 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication PAD SENS and press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to choose one of these settings Soft The volume will be soft regardless of how strongly you tap the pad Medium The volume will be medium regardless of how strongly you tap the pad Loud The
308. of sound produced when pads are hit in succession PL MN and the group to which the pad belongs 0 7 The setting range is PLO PL7 and MNO MN7 When PL is selected hitting two pads in succession will produce overlapping sound i e the previous sound continues while the next one starts When MN is selected the previous sound stops when the next one starts 113 Reference Rhythm GROUP PL GROUP MN The numbers 0 7 specify the group to which the pad belongs 0 no group 1 7 respective group Pads in the same group cannot produce sound at the same time For example if you assign an open hi hat sound and closed hi hat sound to two pads in the same group the open hi hat sound will cease when you play the closed hi hat sound resulting in realistic action Reverb Send Sets the reverb send level for each pad The setting range is 0 127 This parameter setting is independent of the track parameter for reverb send level Remain Shows the remaining drum kit memory as a capacity or in terms of playing time Use the cursor up down keys to toggle between kB kilobytes and mS milliseconds Priority Specifies the priority order for the pads that applies when several pads are pressed at the same time or when triggered by a rhythm pattern or rhythm song Higher numbers indicate higher priority Higher numbers are recommended for pads with long reverberation sounds such as cymbals or pads that use
309. on Mark Song lt lt gt gt MARKER MARKER MARKER MARKER 59 59 Specifying the mark number to locate 1 From the main screen use the cursor left right keys to cause the mark number on the counter to flash 2 Turn the dial to select the desired mark number As soon as the number is changed the recorder jumps to that number Deleting a mark Here s how to delete a mark that you assigned 1 Locate the mark that you want to delete A mark can only be deleted when it exactly matches the current location Make sure that the marker symbol is shown in reverse If not use the MARKER M gt I keys to jump to the exact marker point 2 Press the CLEAR key in the control section The selected mark will be deleted and subsequent marks will be renumbered NOTE A deleted mark cannot be recovered e t is not possible to delete mark number 00 located at the beginning of the song ZOOM HD8 HD16 Making settings for pre count operation In the default condition of a project a pre count of four beats is heard before the start of recording The number of beats and the pre count volume can be changed as follows 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The indication REC UTILITY appears on the first line and the indication PROJECT on the second line of the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication PRE COUNT
310. on CD R RW disc FRE TOO Project number Project name Number and name of project to write as a track Pressing the PLAY key in this condition will play the master track of the currently displayed project HINT When you press the cursor down key the duration of the V take selected for the master track of the current project is shown in minutes seconds milliseconds Pressing the cursor up key returns to the original indication NOTE A project for whose master track an unrecorded V take is Selected cannot be chosen as source material Make sure that a V take that you want to use is selected f the master track data for projects included in an album have been deleted the album returns to the blank state 9 when the project for track 1 has been selected use the cursor right key to move to track 2 The display indication changes as follows 10 e Turn the dial to select the project to be used as track 2 of the album 11 inthe same way select projects for track 3 and subsequent tracks The maximum allowable number of tracks is 99 provided that there is enough free capacity on the disc To change projects an album Use the cursor left right keys to select the track number for which you want to change the project and use the dial to select another project To insert projects an album Use the cursor left right keys to select the track number where you want to insert a project
311. on on the folder structure of the HD8 HD16 see page 208 5 To terminate the connection cancel the online condition at the computer When using Windows Click the remove hardware icon in the task tray and select the device name for the HD8 HD16 hard disk When the connection has been terminated a message stating that the hardware can be safely removed appears When using a Macintosh Drag and drop the icon for the HD8 HD16 hard disk volume mounted on the desktop into the trash NOTE To terminate the connection be sure to perform the above steps at the computer first If you simply disconnect the USB cable or cancel the mass storage mode at the HD8 HD16 files may be corrupted 6 To cancel the mass storage mode hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 3 USB The display indication changes as follows 7 Press the ENTER key The main screen returns again and normal recorder operation resumes ZOOM HD8 HD16 Operating DAW Software From the HD8 HD16 This section explains the basic settings for control surface mode which allows using the controls of the HD8 HD16 to remotely operate a DAW software application installed on the computer Selecting the connector to use for control surface mode You can select to use either the USB port or the MIDI IN OUT connectors for control surface mode Connect the HD8 HD16 to the computer either with a USB cable or via the MIDI IN and OUT connectors Then ma
312. on transport section to bring up the indication Delete Pressing the ENTER key will delete the file Z Turn the dial to select the SMF for playback and press the ENTER key The file is selected and the display returns to the SMF menu 8 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times 9 1o play the SMF press the PLAY gt key The SMF is played in conjunction with the recorder section rhythm section 160 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference USB This section explains the settings and operation steps for using the USB port of the HD8 HD16 What you can do with the USB port File transfer to and from a computer When the HD8 HD 16 is connected to a computer Windows Macintosh via the USB port the following functions become available Exchanging files with the computer mass storage mode The internal hard disk of the HD8 HD106 is recognized by the computer as an external storage device allowing easy transfer of audio data and SMF Standard MIDI Files Creating backup copies of projects on the computer is also possible Operating DAW software from the HD8 HD16 control surface mode The faders and keys on the HD8 HD16 can be used to operate transport functions or mixing functions of DAW software installed on the computer Send receive MIDI messages MIDI messages can also be sent via USB cable HINT n control surface mode you can select to use either the USB por
313. onfirm switching to control surface mode appears 4 Press the ENTER key The HD8 HD16 switches to control surface mode and the display indication changes as follows For details on how to use the control surface mode refer to the separate Control Surface Operation Manual supplied with the HD8 HD 16 5 To cancel control surface mode hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 2 CONTROL SURFACE The display indication changes as follows de sce 6 Press the ENTER key The main screen returns again and normal recorder operation resumes 163 Reference USB Using Mass Storage Mode and Control Surface Mode Simultaneously If the MIDI IN OUT connectors are selected for carrying the control surface mode signals you can use mass storage mode and control surface mode simultaneously This is convenient to access the HD8 HD16 hard disk while operating DAW software 1 Connect the HD8 HD16 and the computer with a USB cable 2 Select the MIDI IN OUT connectors for use with control surface mode as described in the section Selecting the connector to use for control surface mode gt p 163 NOTE If the USB port is selected for use with control surface mode the two modes cannot be used simultaneously In this case activating one mode will forcibly terminate the other mode 3 Connect the MIDI IN OUT connectors of the HD8 HD16 to the MIDI OUT IN connectors on the MIDI interfac
314. opy 51 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Delete data 52 Fade in fade out data 53 Generating 1 part 59 Generating 3 part harmony 57 Move data cs A ERES 52 Pitch 55 Reverse 54 Time 55 nnmero nmm ms 53 Real time input Bass sequence 94 Drum 93 Rear panel 14 10 36 Setting the pre count 49 Recording ence Bee 34 MIXING ies cee tribe 30 29 Preparations 23 Recording the first track 25 Reverse 54 10 87 Rhythm pattern 10 87 88 Assigning 100 Bass sequence 87 Bass sequence real time input 94 Bass sequence step input 97 Changing the drum kit bass program 89 Changing the tempo 89 Changing the volume of drum bass 99 Copying a rhythm 100 Creating a rhythm pattern 92 Deleting a rhythm pattern 101 Drum
315. or selecting the copy destination track V take appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys status keys and the dial to select the track V take to use as copy destination and press the ENTER key The indication Copy appears on the display If audio data exist at the copy destination the indication Overwrite is shown When the copy operation is performed these data will be overwritten 3 To execute the copy operation press the ENTER key once more When the copy operation is completed the unit returns to the V take selection menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Moving a V take You can move the audio data of a specified V take to any other V take This action will overwrite any existing data on the destination V take The data on the move source V take will be erased 62 Move source track Move destination track HINT lt lt GEID only gt gt You can also move all currently selected V takes for tracks 1 8 to tracks 9 16 in a single operation 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for V take editing to select the track V take to move and bring up the indication MOVE V TAKE on the display Then press the ENTER key A screen for selecting the move destination track V take appears on the display AE t m 2 Use the cursor left right keys
316. ot be edited 4 Press the EDIT key The cursor flashing box appears on the first character of the V take name This indicates that you can change the V take name ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Recorder cursor 5 Use the cursor left right keys to move the cursor to the character to change and use the dial or the pads and keys in the pad section to select the character During character input you can use the cursor left right keys to move the input position Characters can be input either by turning the dial or pressing the pads and keys of the pad section as described below Deleting a character Move the cursor to the character to delete and press the EDIT key The character is deleted and subsequent characters move one position to the left Entering a character with the dial The dial changes the character under the cursor Turn the dial until the desired character is shown The following characters can be selected Numerals 0 9 Letters A Z a z Symbols space 4 96 amp 2 9 HINT The method for character input is the same also when assigning a name to elements other than V takes However for samples saved on the hard disk kit file names and backup folder names the only characters that can be used are 0 9 A 2 underscore character Entering a character with the pad section pads and keys Move the cursor to the input position and repea
317. ous CD R RW functions appears 4 Verify that AUDIO CD is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 5 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication ALBUM on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key In this condition you can select the write method 6 Turn the dial to select DAO disc at once or TAO track at once and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows Here you can select whether to create a new list for the album or use a list that has previously been created The available selections are defined as follows New Create a new album list with no registered projects Old Use an album list that was compiled earlier when creating an audio CD by album 7 Turn the dial to select New and press the ENTER key The display for registering projects for the album appears The indication End of Album denotes the end of the album list of projects When the album display is first called up no project has been registered therefore the indication End of Album appears 8 Turn the dial to select the project to be used ZOOM HD8 HD16 as track 1 of the album The indication End of Album moves up to the next track track 2 in this example and the screen changes as follows Track number Number of track to write
318. ow many measures the playback range of the phrase corresponds The parameter lets you compress or expand the playing duration of the phrase to match the tempo setting of the rhythm section The setting range is 1 99 measures Time Signature This specifies the beat of the phrase In combination with the Measure parameter it determines the length of the phrase The setting range is 1 1 4 8 8 4 Start Specifies the playback start point of the phrase in milliseconds In the default condition this is the beginning of the imported data End Specifies the playback end point of the phrase in milliseconds In the default condition this is the end of the imported data Name Specifies a name for the phrase Level Specifies the phrase playback level in the range of 24 dB HINT If you do not intend to match the phrase to a rhythm song there is no need to set the Measure x and Time Signature parameters ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Phrase Looping Use the dial and the cursor left right keys to adjust the setting value Adjusting Measure x Time Signature Level Turn the dial to set the numerical value Adjusting Start End Use the cursor left right keys to cause the counter value to flash and turn the dial to set the value Adjusting Name Use the cursor left right keys to move the underline to the character to edit and turn the dial to select the character HINT You can use the PLA
319. parameter is only shown when LOW EQ is on CHORUS DELAY SEND 2 4 22 o o LEVEL S put REVERB SEND LEVEL 0 100 Adjusts the reverb effect send level for o o the track input S SUB OUT Selects whether the signal at the SEND ON On Off MASTER OUT connectors master o OFF track signal is also supplied to the Gr STEREO SUB OUT jack SUB OUT Adjusts the level of the signal sent from SEND LEVEL 0 127 the track input to the STEREO SUB A A A A 9 S GEB OUT jack p 82 SUB OUT Adjusts panning for the signal sent SEND PAN 1100 R100 from the track input to the STEREO A A A A GI SUB OUT jack Adjusts the panning value of the track input signal For stereo tracks the 5 parameter adjusts the left right level 9 a i balance x 1 8 Selects the V take to use for the track V TAKE x 1 16 p 36 x stands for the track 1 10 number for the V take number FADER 0 127 Adjusts the current volume level REC LVL 0 127 Adjusts the recording level STEREO Controls the stereo link function for LINK linking two mono tracks p 82 9 Allows inverting the track input phase INVERT On Off When set to Off the phase is normal When set to On the phase is inverted Denotes a parameter that can be switched and off with the ENTER key O Valid parameter Tor this track input
320. ping occurs 6 Move the recorder to the beginning and start recording ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Recorder Recording on tracks 7 8 lt lt GEID 15 16 gt gt starts 7 When recording is complete press the STOP key HINT Tocheckthe result of the bounce operation select the V take for the bounce target tracks and mute the other tracks Then set the recorder to playback Note that the track parameters will continue to be valid To monitor the unprocessed sound return the track volume and EQ settings for the bounce target tracks to the default condition When bouncing in stereo to two mono tracks set the Pan parameter for the odd numbered track to L 100 and for the even numbered track to R 100 f only the drum bass track signal is recorded select Master as recording source For information on how to do this see the next section Selecting drum bass track as recording source 8 To turn off the bounce function press the BOUNCE key The BOUNCE key goes out and the bounce function is canceled Recording the drum bass track sound on an audio track rhythm recording The HD8 HD16 allows you to record the drum track or bass track sound of the rhythm section onto any audio track This function is called rhythm recording By recording a rhythm song or rhythm pattern on an audio track you can then combine this with another song or pattern as played by the rhythm section To use the rh
321. play When you turn the dial to select the patch and press the ENTER key the import target patch selected in step 1 is shown If necessary turn the dial to select the number of the patch to use as import target and press the ENTER key The indication Import appears on the display 6 To carry out the import process press the ENTER key All patches or the specified patch of the selected project will be imported When all patches were imported the insert effect or send return effect select screen appears again When a single patch was imported the display of step 4 appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Effects 137 Reference Creating a CD This section describes how to use the CD R RW drive in the HD8 HD 16 to create an audio CD or store a project from the hard disk onto a CD R RW disc NOTE This section does not apply to HD8 HD16 models without integrated CD R RW drive Mixed mode CDs or copy controlled CDs cannot be played or read About creating an audio CD The HD8 HD 16 lets you write the contents of the master track of any project to a CD R RW disc in CD DA audio data format The result is an audio CD that can be played in a CD player There are two ways of writing audio data on a CD R RW disc as described below Writing by project This method writes the master trac
322. play is shown you can check the rhythm pattern entered at the current point ZOOM HD8 HD16 Current position Co number 1 2 3 Song PATTERN 002 End of Song 8 Repeatedly press the cursor right key to move to the measure number for which EOS is shown During step input you can use the cursor left right keys to move the input position in measure units When you reach the end of the song the indication EOS is shown on the second line of the display Current position measure number 1 2 3 Song PATTERN 002 End of Song HINT The REW 44 and FF gt gt keys in the transport section can be used to move the current position in beat units When Event is shown on the display turning the dial moves the current position in sixteenth note units By bringing up the Event indication to move to a point within a measure and then using the cursor up down keys to display event information you can enter event information in sixteenth note units p 107 9 Repeat steps 4 8 to enter all required pattern information 10 e When all required pattern information has been entered press the STOP W key The REC key goes out and the rhythm song selection screen appears again If you press the PLAY We key the created rhythm song will be played To edit the entered rhythm pattern information proceed as follows Selecting a different rhythm pattern Use the cursor left ri
323. present single notes recorded without applying delay reverb chorus or other effects 55 Reference Track Editing 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing and select the PITCH FIX command Select the track V take for time stretch compress and press the ENTER key The indication Pitch Fix appears on the first line of the display and Key on the second line In this condition you can select the key for the scale to be used for pitch compensation HINT You can only select a single mono track or one track of a stereo pair as source track for PitchFix 2 Turn the dial to select the key The selection range for the key is C B in semitone steps and Bass Seq When you select BassSeq the pitch of the audio track will be detected and transposed to the same note in the nearest octave specified by the bass sequence or by actually hitting a pad The upper limit for pitch detection is two octaves above center A For example if you use an audio track recorded with long tones and apply PitchFix using a bass sequence with a short rhythm you will get an interesting effect with strong modulation Audio track Audio track S19 Pitch Fix SS eee ro Eie Bass sequence HINT When you select Bass Seq step 3 is not necessary When you sele
324. press the EXIT key Entering pattern information using step input This section explains how to input rhythm pattern data into an empty rhythm song by specifying the rhythm pattern number and number of measures HINT In rhythm song mode the currently selected drum kit bass program is always enabled If necessary select the drum kit bass program before entering the mode 89 1 Fromthe main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Press the REC 9 key The key lights up and the display indication changes as follows In this condition you can perform rhythm song step input The indication EOS End of Song shows the position where the rhythm song ends For an empty song EOS will be located at the beginning Therefore nothing happens if you play the song Current position 1 measure number Song End of Song 3 Use the cursor down key to bring up the indication Pattern on the first line of the display During step input the cursor up down keys serve to show and edit various kinds of events that are programmed at the current point For example when Pattern is displayed rhythm pattern information can be entered The following items can be selected 102 Parameter Description Event Event information at current point Pattern Rhythm pattern number Time Signature
325. press the FUNCTION key twice The display indication changes as follows letting you check the copy source 6 Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 119 Reference Rhythm HINT When a sample with the same name is present in the same folder on the hard disk a symbol appears on the display This is a warning that the file cannot be created You must first change the name from this screen For details on entering characters see page 37 Note that available characters are limited e You can change the name of the sample later p 119 7 To execute the copy process press the ENTER key once more When the copy operation is completed the screen selection screen returns By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Deleting a sample You can delete a sample as follows 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN or pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Press the PROJECT UTILITY key The rhythm utility menu screen appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SAMPLE FILE on the second line of the display then press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows From this screen you can select the folder where the sample file is stored
326. r recording audio data Each of the tracks has ten switchable virtual tracks called takes For each track one V take can be selected for recording playback Currently selected V takes for tracks 1 16 and master track GI 2 2222222 a 123456 78 91017121314 15 16 Tracks Master track 10 Currently selected V takes for tracks 1 8 and master track 12345678 Tracks Master track The recorder section also provides a set of stereo tracks which are separate from the normal audio tracks This is called the master track The master track is dedicated for mixdown and for holding the material used to create an audio CD Rhythm section The HD8 HD16 contains a rhythm section that operates in sync with the recorder It offers 511 accompaniment patterns called rhythm patterns that use the internal drum bass sound generator Over 400 patterns are preprogrammed at the factory You can use these patterns as they are modify them in part or create entirely new patterns from scratch HINT The drum bass sound sources can be played with the pads on the top panel or with a MIDI keyboard or similar ZOOM HD8 HD16 Recorder Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Rhythm section Bass sound source o To BASS fader of mixer pattern To DRUM fad 9 acer oooo of mixer Rhythm Rhythm pattern p
327. rack parameters NOTE For stereo tracks and the drum track parameter settings except phase and V take number audio tracks only are linked for the L R channels HINT The parameter knobs above the faders let you quickly adjust main parameters for a track 81 Adjusting a track parameter 1 From the main screen press the TRACK PARAMETER key in the control section The first line of the display shows the track input and the second line shows the name of the parameter that is being adjusted Parameter name Track input 2 Use the cursor left right keys to select the track input You can also use the status keys to select a track Traclb E a mmm ili Paid HINT When switching the V take of a stereo track each push of the key toggles between the odd numbered and even numbered track When selecting the drum bass track with the RHYTHM status key each push of the key toggles the target track This also changes the track that can be controlled with the pad and fader lt lt CEID only gt gt In 8 track recording mode eight inputs can be used simultaneously In this case you can select the input with the respective ON OFF key and adjust track parameters for each input except for the record level The display will show the number of the input INPUT 1 INPUT 7 etc 79 Reference Mixer
328. rack starts 5 When recording is complete press the STOP key HINT You can start the mixdown operation from a point within the song In this case only the section with recorded data will be overwritten Playing the master track To play the recorded master track proceed as follows 1 From the main screen press the MASTER status key repeatedly until the key is lit in green The master track is now ready for playback In this mode all other tracks are muted and all effects are switched off HINT While the MASTER status key is lit in green the transport section keys except for the REC 6 key operate normally 2 Press the ZERO M4 key to return to the beginning of the song and then press the PLAY gt key ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Recorder Playback of the master track starts You can use the MASTER fader to adjust the playback volume 3 To stop recorder playback press the STOP key 4 To cancel the master track playback mode press the MASTER status key so that the key goes out Muting for all tracks is canceled and the unit returns to normal operation Status keys that were automatically turned off are returned to the previous condition Converting the master track to a stereo WAV file You can write any V take of the master track to the hard disk as a WAV file This file can then be copied to a computer for further editing or burning to CD 1 From the main screen pre
329. re and number of measures Be sure to make these settings beforehand 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN so that the pad lights up The rhythm pattern selection screen appears FTH B LE 2 Turn the dial to select an empty rhythm pattern The indication Empty appears on the display when an empty pattern is selected HINT If there is no empty rhythm pattern erase an unneeded pattern gt p 101 3 Press the EDIT key The rhythm pattern edit menu appears 4 set the quantize value bring up the ZOOM HD8 HD16 indication QUANTIZE on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The current quantize setting is shown Quantize value The quantize value is the smallest note unit for recording a pattern When performing real time input your play is recorded using the note steps selected here 5 Turn the dial to select one of the following quantize values Then press the EXIT key Quarter note P Eighth note 12 5 ores Eighth triplet note 16 eui Sixteenth note default Sixteenth triplet note 2 Thirty second note Hi 1 tick 1 48 of quarter note When you press the EXIT key the rhythm pattern edit menu appears again HINT The quantization setting applies to the entire rhythm section 6 To set the bar length number of measures of the rhythm pattern us
330. recording level and make sure that the REC LEVEL indicator does not light The output level to the insert effect changes according to the selected patch To prevent clipping readjusting the REC LEVEL control may be necessary 7 Toreturnto the main screen press the EXIT key HINT To record without using the insert effect hold down the SHIFT key in the pad section and press pad 4 INSERT EFFECT The pad goes out and the insert effect is bypassed 27 Quick Tour 2 3 Selecting a track and recording Now we will record the guitar sound with the insert effect applied on track 1 1 From the main screen repeatedly press the status key 1 until the key is lit in red PLAY MUTE REC PLAY MUTE REC PLAY MUTE REC PLAY MUTE REC Red The status keys are used to select the recording playback track and to switch muting for each track on and off Each time you press a status key the key will cycle through the following states Status key Lit green Out Lit red PLAY MUTE REC PLAY MUTEAME T 8 Mute off PLAY MUTE REC Mute on Selected as recording track When status key 1 is red track 1 is in the recording standby condition and the input signal is assigned to track 1 The signal routing will change as follows When a recording track has not been selected MASTER INPUT 1 When a
331. red project does not appear on the display check the V take selected for the master track fthe V take is less than 4 seconds long the master track cannot be registered in the playlist Z Press the cursor right key The display indication changes as follows End of List indication has changed to the second position In this condition you can select the second project to play 165 Reference Other Functions 8 Turn the dial to select the next project to play Use the same procedure to select projects for subsequent positions A maximum of 99 projects can be registered in a playlist To change projects in a playlist Use the cursor left right keys to select the position number for which you want to change the project and use the dial to select another project To insert a project in a playlist Use the cursor left right keys to select the position number where you want to insert a project Press the FUNCTION key once to bring up the indication INSERT TRACK on the first line of the display The second line shows the name of the project to be inserted In this condition use the dial to select another project and press the ENTER key The indication Insert appears on the second line of the display To carry out the process press the ENTER key To delete a project from a playlist Use the cursor left right keys to select the position number you want to delete Then press the FUNCTION key t
332. reen press the FUNCTION key once to store the patch or twice to swap the patch d Stan Patch number 2 Verify that the indication STORE PATCH or SWAP PATCH is shown on the first line of the display and press the ENTER key 3 Turn the dial to bring up the patch to store or swap on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The indication Store or Swap appears on the second line of the display 4 To carry out the store swap operation press the ENTER key When the store swap operation is completed the insert effect patch select screen appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time HINT Patches that you have stored are saved on the hard disk as a part of the project Patch data included in another project can be loaded into the current project p 136 Editing the name of an insert effect patch This section explains how to edit the name of the currently selected patch 1 At the insert effect patch select screen select the patch whose name you want to change ZOOM HD8 HD16 2 Press the EDIT key The currently selected patch can be edited 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication TOTAL on the first line and the indication Patch Level on the second line of the display 4 Repeatedly press the cursor down key
333. rformed E Restoring the factory default condition RECOVER This action restores all data including the demo song to the condition in which the unit was originally shipped from the factory All projects created by the user will be erased Q Caution e Once erased user created projects cannot be restored Use this function with extreme care e To preserve projects back them up to CD R RW disc first p 146 Factory initialize VERSION UP This action restores system files and all data necessary for HD8 HD 16 operation onto the hard disk To use the CD ROM for one of these functions proceed as follows 1 Insert the supplied CD ROM into the integrated CD R RW drive of the HD8 HD16 and press the rear panel POWER switch to turn the HD8 HD16 on 2 Use the cursor left right keys to select RECOVER or VERSION UP and press the ENTER key The indication Sure appears on the display 3 To carry out the respective operation press the ENTER key once more When maintenance is completed the indication Done appears Remove the CD ROM from the CD R RW drive and restart the HD8 HD 16 To cancel the operation press the POWER switch before pressing the ENTER key to turn the unit off 173 Specifications Model HD8 HD16 Physical track 8 mono x6 stereo x1 16 mono x8 stereo x4 Virtual take 80 10V takes per track 160 10V takes per track Rhythm trac
334. rme character lt SHIFT key l 3 a character Case indication Case indication 38 By pressing another pad or key after entering a character the cursor will move to the next position without the need for pressing the cursor key If the next character to input is assigned to the same pad you must first press the cursor right key once to move the cursor and then enter the character An example for entering BASS from scratch is shown below W lake Mare Pad 1 4 U Take m gm Press twice Cursor gt key Press once Pad 6 _ OPEN HAT Press 4 times Cursor gt key D OPEN HAT PORS Press 4 times NOTE The space character and some symbols x lt gt _ _ cannot be entered with the pads and keys of the pad section 6 Repeat step 5 to complete the desired name 7 To finish press the EXIT key The main screen appears again HINT If the contents of a V take are erased the name reverts to No Data ZOOM HD8 HD16 Moving to a desired point in the song locate function You can specify a location within the song in time units minutes seconds milliseconds or in measure units measure beat tick units and move to that location Ft
335. rn off the input and the guide rhythm from the rhythm section 1 To mute the rhythm section press the RYTHM status key so that the key goes out 2 Tomute the input press the ON OFF key for the input where the instrument is connected so that the key goes out HINT If desired you can add the drum kit bass program sound and or sound from input signals to the mix 4 2 Adjusting volume panning and EQ Adjust the volume panning and equalization for each track by using the faders or controlling the track parameters of the built in mixer To change the track parameter settings you can either call up the respective track and parameter on the display and use the dial to change the setting or you can select main parameters with the keys and use the parameter knobs on the panel to quickly change the setting This section explains how to use the parameter knobs for main track parameters 1 To adjust the volume balance between tracks operate the faders to set the volume for the respective track Operating the fader of a pair of stereo tracks adjusts the level in both channels 2 e Toselect the track parameter to adjust press the SELECT key in the function transport section while the main screen is shown The SELECT key allows you to select main track parameters The parameter can then be adjusted with one of the parameter knobs The first time you press the SELECT key the most recently adjusted track parameter
336. rn the dial to specify the copy start point When a value is specified the other units currently not shown on the display also reflect the new location NOTE If you specify a point where no audio data exist the display shows a symbol 3 Press the ENTER key The second line of the display now lets you specify the copy range end point 4 Use the same procedure as in step 2 to specify the copy range end point If you press the PLAY key at this point the specified range will be played 5 Press the ENTER key The first line of the display now shows Copy Destination and the second line Trackxx yy where xx is the track number and yy the V take number This display lets you specify the copy destination HINT You can select the same track as copy source and copy destination In this case the copy source range and copy destination range may overlap but copying is still possible 6 Specify the copy destination track V take in the same way as when selecting the copy source and press the ENTER key The display shows the copy destination start point 51 Reference Track Editing 7 Specify the copy destination start point in the same way as for the copy source and press the ENTER key The indication Copy appears on the second line of the display 8 To execute the copy operation press the ENTER key When the copy operation is completed the unit
337. rol section The display shows the currently selected scene number and name 2 Turn the dial to select the desired scene to recall HINT By pressing the EDIT key after selecting a scene you can edit the name of the scene Follow steps 4 and 5 in the section Saving a scene to enter the name 3 To recall the selected scene press the ENTER key The scene is recalled the indication Call appears on the display and the unit returns to the condition of step 1 If you press the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key the action is canceled and the main screen returns Switching scenes automatically The HD8 HD16 allows you to assign a scene to a mark gt p 47 that was placed at a desired location in the song This can be used to switch scenes automatically For example you could change the mixing balance or effect settings as the song progresses 1 Move to the point in the song where you want to change the mix and press the MARK key in the control section A mark is entered at this point 2 Repeat step 1 to enter marks at all other points where you want to change the mix 3 Save the mix to be used at the start of the ZOOM HD8 HD16 song as well as all other mix settings as scenes 4 While the recorder is stopped press the ZERO M4 key in the transport section to move to the recorder start position The beginning of the song counter zero location already contains the mark number 00
338. rom the basic steps for other MIDI operations 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key and then use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SYSTEM on the second line of the display ski TE p aum oom Rem 2 Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows iy E 14 i VXHITTLL 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication MIDI OUT on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows You can now select the MIDI input output connector 4 Turn the dial to select one of the following settings MIDI I O MIDI messages are output and received via the MIDI IN OUT connectors Default setting e USB MIDI messages are output and received via the USB port 5 e Press the EXIT key several times to return to the main screen 157 Reference MIDI Using the SMF player Using the SMF player function the HD8 HD16 can read Format 0 SMF Standard MIDI Files from a CD ROM R RW disc and load the contents into a project Once loaded an SMF can perform playback in sync with the recorder section or rhythm section using the sounds of the rhythm section or MIDI sound sources connected to the MIDI OUT connector This section explains how to use the SMF playback function HINT Format 0 is a type of SMF that contains all MIDI
339. rse it NAME Specify a name for the sample e SIZE Display the size of the currently selected sample in kB kilobytes or mS milliseconds 8 Press the ENTER key The selected parameter can now be changed The subsequent steps will differ depending on the parameter See the following sections for the respective commands 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 to make all necessary parameter adjustments 10 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times 117 Reference Rhythm Changing the playback start and end point You can specify the playback start and end point for the sample 1 Perform steps 1 8 of Making various sample settings and select the START END POINT parameter Then press the ENTER key The sample start point is shown on the second line of the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section and turn the dial to change the numerals for the start point Then press the ENTER key The sample end point is shown on the second line of the display 3 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section and turn the dial to change the numerals for the end point Then press the ENTER key The sample start and end points are set Using fade in fade out for the sample You can rewrite a specified range of data to perform fade in fade out 1 Perform steps 1 8 of Making various sample sett
340. rt point 53 Reference Track Editing 3 Press the ENTER key The second line of the display now lets you specify the fade in fade out end point 1 B HRS B 4 Use the same procedure as in step 2 to specify the fade in fade out end point If you press the PLAY key at this point the specified range will be played D Press the ENTER key A display for selecting the fade in or fade out curve appears Turn the dial to select the fade in or fade out curve Curves In 1 to In 3 are for fade in and curves Out 1 to Out 3 are for fade out The numbers are for three different kinds of curves which look as follows Fade in In 1 In 2 In 3 Fade out Out 1 Out 2 Out 3 Wi W Z Press the ENTER key The indication Fade appears on the second line of the display 8 To execute the fade in or fade out operation press the ENTER key When the fade in fade out operation is completed the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Reversing a specified range of audio data You can reverse the order of a specified range of audio data Reverse laABcpre l Ir D C B 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing and select the REVERSE command Select the track V take for reversing and press the ENTER k
341. rt the correct disc for the stored content If the project was backed up as a single project Insert disc number 1 If the project was backed up as part of a full backup of all projects Insert the disc where the project is stored If there are multiple discs insert the first disc that contains data of the desired project NOTE If the backup of the project spans multiple discs be sure to insert the first disc that contains data of the desired project first If you insert another disc the project data will not be read correctly 5 Press the ENTER key The name of the project on the disc and the number which is to be assigned to the project are shown on the display Project name Project number to be assigned HINT When being restored to the HD8 HD16 an empty project number is automatically assigned to the project Even if a project with the same name already exists on the hard disk it will not be overwritten check the name of the folder from which the project will be read press the cursor down key The second line of the display shows the folder name Press the cursor up key to restore the original display 7 Turn the dial to select the project to load and press the ENTER key The indication Load appears on the second line of the display ZOOM HD8 HD16 8 To execute the load operation press the ENTER key To cancel press the EXIT key instead When the operation is
342. rum sequence Bass sequence ChordsAm Dm7 G7 C Rhythm pattern mode and rhythm song mode The rhythm section can operate in one of two modes rhythm pattern mode in which you can create and play rhythm patterns and rhythm song mode in which you can create and play a rhythm song One of these two modes will always be selected The rhythm pattern mode is selected by holding down the SHIFT key and pressing pad 7 PATTERN The rhythm song mode is selected by holding down the SHIFT key and pressing pad 8 SONG The pad for selected mode lights up Rhythm pattern mode Rhythm song mode Playing rhythm patterns This section explains basic functions such as how to play rhythm patterns how to change the tempo and how to change the drum kit or bass program Selecting a rhythm pattern This section explains how to select and play one of the 511 rhythm patterns 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN The rhythm pattern selection screen appears Pattern number Pattern name Current position measure beat tick indication Pad bank shown when drum kit is selected 90 or bass range shown when bass program is selected 91 2 e Turn the dial to select the rhythm pattern that you want to play In the default condition of a project patterns are programmed in rhythm pattern numbers 0 472 and 509 5
343. ry effect Persistence makes it easy to play 14 ArpenCho Chorus effect great for arpeggios 15 HK Drive The full bodied sound of AMP3 high gain distortion with added delay 16 MS Drive JCM2000 lead channel simulation Air effect adds the cabinet touch ZOOM HD8 HD16 191 Appendix 17 Crunch Crunch sound optimized for cutting 18 NuanceOD Overdrive sound brings out those fine amp details 19 Tremolo Tremolo sound for arpeggio 20 ShortDLY Rock lead sound with short delay 21 Half Wah Midrange oriented sound with half open wah 22 Jet Riff Flanger jet sound 23 SmoothLD Smooth and glossy distortion sound 24 HR Core Punchy hard rock sound 25 ENGL 650 Simulation of the ENGL E650 favored by Ritchie Blackmore 26 5thPitch Synthesizer like pitch sound with fifth down for ad libbing 27 375 DLY Dotted eighth delay with bpm 120 gives a gimmicky sound for solo play 28 PsycheVB Psychedelic vibe sound of the sixties as personified by Jimi Hendrix 29 D live Crunch sound with intense live feeling 30 NicePick Crunch sound controlled by your picking 31 X over Slick semi acoustic sound with overdrive 32 Combo Crunch sound in the boogie combo style 33 MildTone Mild tone emphasizes the low range 34 Bright Bright and airy sound 35 OLD DLY Lead tone flavored with analog delay 36 Tweed Tweed amp sound with a clear edge 37 BoxBody Old style semi acoustic fusion sound 38 Big Wave
344. s Deleting a number formula Use the cursor left right keys to cause the numeral or symbol that you want to delete to flash and press the EDIT key Inserting a number formula Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section and enter the new numeral or symbol 5 When formula input is completed press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows In this condition you can select the rhythm song number into which you want to write the song E m Rhythm song number ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm NOTE If you select an existing rhythm song as write target the contents of that rhythm song will be completely erased Turn the dial to select the target rhythm song and press the ENTER key The write operation is carried out and the rhythm song edit menu appears again To check the result press the EXIT key to return to the rhythm song selection screen select the rhythm song that you have written and press the PLAY key Z Toreturnto the main screen press the EXIT key several times Entering chord information This section explains how to add chord information root and chord type data to the rhythm song that you have created by inputting rhythm pattern data When playing a rhythm song for which chord information was input the bass sequence will change according to the chord progression HINT ftheoriginal root of the rhythm pattern and t
345. s Rhythm patterns A project can contain accompaniment patterns with drum bass performance data for up to 99 measures each This is called a rhythm pattern The HD8 HD16 has 511 such patterns Inside each rhythm pattern the area that holds the drum performance data is called the drum sequence and the area that holds the bass performance data is called the bass sequence In the default condition a project contains preprogrammed rhythm patterns in numbers 000 472 and 509 510 You can edit a portion of a rhythm pattern or use an empty slot to create an entirely original rhythm pattern The rhythm patterns you modify or create are saved on the hard disk as part of the project Rhythm 1 2 3 4 section PATTERN PATTERN Drum sequence Drum sequence Bass sequence Bass sequence 87 Reference Rhythm Rhythm song Multiple rhythm patterns arranged in a desired order of playback are collectively called a rhythm song Besides the rhythm pattern data a rhythm song comprises information about various aspects such as chord tempo and time signature to create the accompaniment for an entire song Up to 10 rhythm songs can be programmed in one project PATTERN A PATTERN B PATTERN C PATTERN D PATTERN E Rhythm song Measure number 1 2 3 6 PATTERN A PATTERN PATTERNB Drum sequence Bass sequence Drum sequence Bass sequence D
346. s When the setting is complete press the EXIT key to return to the previous screen STORE DELETE COPY NSERT SELECT 500 EDIT HINT You can also set the tempo by tapping the TEMPO key repeatedly 89 6 Use the RHYTHM status key and the RHYTHM fader to adjust the volume of the drum bass track While the RHYTHM status key is lit in green the drum track can be adjusted While the key is lit in red the bass track can be adjusted If bass sound is not desired turn the bass track level all the way down 7 To stop playback press the STOP W key 8 e Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times ZOOM HD8 HD16 Quick Tour Step 2 Recording the first track In this step you record the first track while listening to the guide rhythm of the rhythm section As an example we describe how to record an electric guitar on track with the insert effect 2 1 Adjusting input sensitivity 1 Connect an instrument to the INPUT jack 1 16 17 For an instrument with high output impedance passive type electric guitar or bass use a high impedance compatible INPUT jack and set the respective Hi Z switch to On engaged On the HD8 the INPUT jack 1 is high impedance compatible On the HD16 INPUT jacks 1 and 2 are high impedance compatible wa LL Hi Z switch 8 GI INPUT 1 INPUT 2 Hi Z switches To connect a low impedance electric guitar or b
347. s and select the SIZE parameter Then press the ENTER key The sample size is shown on the second line of the display Use the cursor up down keys to toggle between kB and mS indication 2 Press the EXIT key to return to the previous screen ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm Copying a sample You can copy a specific sample which is convenient to use the same material but with a different playing range 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN or pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Press the PROJECT UTILITY key The rhythm utility menu screen appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SAMPLE FILE on the second line of the display then press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows From this screen you can select the folder where the sample file is stored Folder name HINT For information on the folder structure of the HD8 HD16 see page 208 To use a sample imported from an external source select the folder OUSER under the SAMPLER folder in the root directory of the hard disk 4 Turn the dial to select the folder which contains the desired sample file and press the ENTER key Sample files included in the selected folder are listed Sample name 5 Turnthe dialto select the sample to copy and
348. s Spruces up a thin midrange Acoustic guitar Vocal 24 Arp Vo Overall solid sound Acoustic guitar Vocal 25 ClubDuo Simulates live sound in small club Acoustic guitars 26 BigShape Enhances overall clarity Acoustic guitars 27 FolkDuo Fresh and clean sound Acoustic guitars 28 GtrDuo Suitable for guitar duos Acoustic guitars 29 Bright Bright and sharp outlook Acoustic guitars 31 49 Empty LINE algorithm No Name Comment 0 Syn Lead For synthesizer single note lead 1 OrganPha Phaser for synthesizer organ 2 OrgaRock Boomy distortion for rock organ 3 EP Chor Beautiful chorus for electric piano 4 ClavFlg Wah for clavinet 5 Concert Concert hall effect for piano 6 Honkey Honky tonk piano simulation 7 PowerBD Gives a bass drum more power 8 DrumFIng Conventional flanger for drum 9 LiveDrum Simulates outdoor live doubling 10 JetDrum Phaser for 16 beat hi hat 11 AsianKit Changes a standard kit to an Asian kit 12 BassBost Emphasizes low range 13 Mono gt St Gives spaciousness to a monaural source 14 AM Radio AM radio simulation 15 WideDrm Wide stereo effect for internal drums 194 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Appendix 16 DanceDrm Reinforces bass for dance rhythms 17 Octaver Adds one octave lower sound 18 Percushn Gives air presence and stereo spread to percussion 19
349. s ready you can transfer it onto two tracks to create the finished song This is referred to as mixdown There are two ways of doing this use the MASTER OUT connectors and record the song on an external recorder or use the internal master track of the HD8 HD16 to record The master track is a dedicated pair of stereo tracks that is separate from the normal audio tracks When you select the master track as recording track the signal after the MASTER fader is recorded The content recorded on the master track can later be used as source material for creating an audio CD DIGITAL OUT MASTER OUT Master track ma 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RHYTHM MASTER Tracks 1 8 RHYTHM DIGITAL OUT MASTER OUT Master track Tracks 1 16 RHYTHM This section explains the mixdown procedure when you select the second method i e recording on the master track 5 1 Using the mastering insert effect By applying the insert effect immediately before the MASTER fader you can process the stereo mix signal for mixdown If you select the MASTERING algorithm at this time you can use t
350. s track as recording source will be recorded HINT To record drum sounds in stereo select a stereo track or two mono tracks as recording destination If only one mono track is selected the left and right signals will be mixed down to mono for recording 3 While holding down the SHIFT key in the pad section press a pad marked SONG or PATTERN to select a rhythm song or rhythm pattern for recording To record your own pad playing select an empty rhythm pattern rhythm song verify that the sounds that you want to play are assigned to the pads 46 4 Set the recorder to playback and adjust the drum bass track output level Adjust levels while watching the level meter to make sure that no signal clipping occurs NOTE Before performing the following steps make sure that the rhythm pattern rhythm song tempo is as desired If you change the rhythm pattern rhythm song tempo after recording the audio track the rhythm will no longer match the recorded track 5 Move to the start point of the recorder and start recording The rhythm pattern rhythm song play is recorded on the audio track If you hit the pads during recording this sound will also be captured 6 When play is complete stop the recorder 7 Press the BOUNCE key The key goes out and the bounce function is canceled To return the bounce function to the normal condition select Master as recording source as described in Selectin
351. s will be transmitted Song Position Pointer is a MIDI message that indicates the current position as a beat count from the start Normally it is used in conjunction with Timing Clock Refer to steps 1 4 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication SPP on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to select one of the following settings On Transmission on MIDI Song Position Pointer messages will be transmitted when a locate operation is performed on the HD8 HD16 default setting Off Transmission off Song Position Pointer messages will not be transmitted Turning Start Stop Continue messages on or off You can specify whether Start Stop Continue messages will be transmitted Start Stop Continue are MIDI messages that control the transport of a device causing it to run or stop Normally these messages are used in conjunction with Timing Clock Refer to steps 1 4 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication COMMAND on the display and press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to select one of the following settings On Transmission on The appropriate Start Stop Continue message will be transmitted when the HD8 HD16 stops or begins running default setting Off Transmission off Start Stop Continue messages will not be transmitted ZOOM HD8 HD16 Turning MIDI Time Code MTC messages on or off You can specify whether MI
352. sc has not been finalized 2 Select the project to be used as write source NOTE Before starting the procedure use the trimming function on the V take to make sure that it does not include unwanted blank portions at the beginning and end p 53 3 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 1 CD R RW The menu for various CD R RW functions appears 4 Verify that AUDIO CD is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 5 Verify that BURN CD is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The indication Time appears on the second line of the display is shown along with the duration of the master track V take that is currently selected for writing By pressing the PLAY We key at this point you can listen to the contents of the V take ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Creating a CD Master track duration HINT When you press the cursor down key the second line of the display shows Remain and the remaining write time on the inserted CD R RW disc appears on the counter Press the cursor up key to return to the previous indication 6 To change the V take to be used as source material press the EDIT key When the key is pressed the display indication changes as follows By turning the dial in this condition you can select the V take To return
353. second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows Z Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication PLAYER on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The CD player screen for audio CD playback appears The second line of the display shows the track number and current position minutes seconds for the inserted audio CD If a non finalized CD R RW disc is inserted a 42 symbol is shown on the first line of the display Finalize status When a k symbol is shown here a non finalized CD R RW disc is inserted Track number The number of the currently selected track on the audio CD is shown 5 Use the REW 44 and FF gt gt keys in the transport section to select the track to be played The FF gt gt key selects the next track and the REW 44 key selects the previous track 6 To start playback of the audio CD press the 143 Reference Creating a CD PLAY gt key Playback of the selected track starts When the track is finished playback continues with the next track During audio CD playback all faders except for the MASTER fader as well as the EQ reverb chorus delay and pan settings are disabled 7 For track selection and for controlling playback stop pause use the transport section keys PLAY gt key Playback of the selected track starts Pressing the key during playback sets the s
354. sections for the respective commands When the import process is completed the sample selection screen appears again This lets you easily import further samples To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Importing a V take 1 Perform steps 1 5 of Importing a sample from an external source and select the TAKE parameter Then press the ENTER key The indication Trackxx yy where xx is the track number and yy the V take number appears on the second line of the display This indicates the source track V take 2 Use the cursor left right keys or the status keys to select the track number and turn the dial to select the V take number Imraort Source T ow 4 1 rack i i When track 8 of the HD8 or track 16 of the HD16 is selected turning the dial further to the right selects tracks in odd numbered even numbered pairs or the master track By pressing two adjacent odd numbered even numbered status keys together you can select two mono tracks When a stereo track two mono tracks or the master track is selected a stereo sample can be imported HINT Pressing the status key for a stereo track repeatedly selects the odd numbered track even numbered track and stereo track in sequence 3 Press the ENTER key A display showing the import start point appears 122 HINT You can use the cursor up down keys to toggle the counter indication between m
355. select the track number and turn the dial to select the V take number a Source i BOR ash nan 8 When track 8 is selected with the HD8 or track 16 with the HD106 turning the dial further to the right selects tracks in odd numbered even numbered pairs or the master track Pressing two status keys for odd even numbered tracks together selects the tracks as two mono tracks When a stereo track two mono tracks or the master track is selected the phrase can be imported in stereo HINT By repeatedly pressing the status key of a stereo track you can select the odd numbered track even numbered track and stereo track 3 Press the ENTER key A display showing the start point for the data range to be imported appears For information on how to switch the display units see page 51 4 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section of the counter and turn the dial to specify the start point HINT By holding down the STOP lil key and pressing the PLAY gt key you can perform scrub playback of the V take of the specified track p 40 The playback range of the phrase loop can be fine tuned also after importing Therefore it suffices if you make a rough selection here f you specify a point where there are no audio data the second line of the display shows 5 Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 6 Sp
356. single operation With this method the disc will be automatically finalized When recording by album the V take last selected for the master track of each project will be selected as source material There are two methods for recording by album Track at once The master track of each project selected for the album is written in a separate operation When a CD R written with track at once is played on a CD player a pause of 2 seconds will occur between tracks Disc at once DAO The master tracks of all projects selected for the album are written in a single operation When a CD R written with disc at once is played on a CD player there will be no pause between tracks If necessary you can use marks set in the project as PQ subcode information specifying track start stop position and other items to split up a single project into multiple tracks HINT You can include playlist information created with the sequence play function in the album 2 p 165 NOTE Before starting the procedure use the trimming function on the V takes to be used as source material l Insert a CD R RW disc into the integrated CD R RW drive Use a blank CD R RW disc or a CD RW disc that has been completely erased 2 Verify that the V takes you want to use for the audio CD are selected for the master tracks of the projects 3 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 1 CD R RW 140 The menu for vari
357. song data TAKE folder Contains audio data recorded with HD8 HD16 PRACKx_y WAV x 0 9 TRACKxy WAV 10 15 TRACKL y WAV master track left channel TRACKR y WAV master track right channel Audio data recorded with HD8 HD16 x denotes the track number 1 and y the V take number 1 IMPORT folder Stores WAV AIFF files Used when importing V Take from the internal hard disk To operate this folder change HD8 HD16 to USB mass storage mode and copy WAV AIFF files from a computer to this folder KIT folder Contains drum kit bass program data ZSP Drum kit bass program data SYSTEM ZEX HD8 HD 16 system file is a file name ZOOM HD8 HD16 MIDI implementation chart HardDisk Recorder Recorder Mode MIDI Implementation Chart Model HD8 HD16 Appendix Date 17 Jan 2007 Version 1 00 Transmitted Recognized Remarks Function Basic Default 1 16 0FF 1 16 0FF Memorized Channel Changed 1 16 0FF 1 16 0FF Default 3 3 Mode Messages x x Altered kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Note 12 74 12 74 Number True voice kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk k velocity Note ON Note OFF x x After Key s x x Touch Ch s x x Pitch Bend x 7 7 Volume Control Ail Expression Change 120 120 All Sounds Off 121 121 Reset All Ctrls Prog Change True ee System Exclusive x x Qtr Frame 30 frame non drop System Song Pos
358. ss program Drum kit Rhythm section Recorder section CLIP Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 8 p Tracks 9 10 3 Tracks 12 11 4 Tracks 13 14 4 From directly after Tracks 15 16 4 MASTER fader Tracks 15 16 Master track To directly before MASTER fader Bass program Drum kit Rhythm section 19 jo o j Track mixer Reference Mixer MASTER OUTPUT To master track REEE From master track alee i MASTER OUTPUT 4 master track 6 7 8 9 10 17 12 13 14 15 16 RHYTHM MASTER iin EHE Track mixer Assigning input signals to recording tracks This section explains how to adjust the sensitivity for signals input from the INPUT jacks and how to send them to audio tracks in the recorder section 1 e Make sure that the instrument or mic that you want to record is connected to the respective INPUT jack ZOOM HD8 HD16
359. ss the PROJECT UTILITY key The indication UTILITY appears on the first line of the display and PROJECT is shown on the second line 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication STEREO WAV on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The name of the master track V take is shown on the second line of the display 3 Turn the dial to select the V take to convert into a stereo WAV file and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows NOTE When a file with the same name is present in the same folder on the hard disk a symbol appears on the display This is a warning that the file will be overwritten if you proceed with this operation If required you can change the name from this screen For information on entering characters see page 37 4 Assign a file name as necessary and press the ENTER key The indication Create appears on the second line of the 43 Reference Recorder display 5 Tocreate the file press the ENTER key once more The stereo WAV file is created in the IMPORT folder of the currently selected project By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Combining multiple tracks on one or two tracks bounce function Bounce is a function that mixes the sound from the audio tracks and drum bass trac
360. t allow you to first listen to the audio files Confirm file content and file name before you start the procedure 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic phrase loading steps to select CD ROM to import from CD ROM R RW disc or WAV AIFF FOLDER as import source Then press the ENTER key The indication Import appears on the first line of the display and the file name is shown on the second line When a folder on a CD ROM R RW disc is selected the indication Folder is shown at the left side of the display 2 Turn the dial to select the audio file to import 3 When the file has been selected press the ENTER key Depending on the sampling frequency of the imported audio file the following applies 70 Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz The indication Import appears on the second line of the display When you press the ENTER key again the audio file is imported When the process is complete the phrase menu appears again e Sampling frequency other than 44 1 kHz When you press the ENTER key a selection screen for conversion to 44 1 kHz resampling appears Turn the dial to select resampling on off When you press the ENTER key the indication Import appears on the second line of the display Press the ENTER key once more to start the import process When the process is complete the phrase menu appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you ca
361. t been finalized it is possible to add further audio data up to the maximum capacity of the disc After being finalized the disc can be played on an ordinary CD player CD RW This media type allows recording adding and bulk erasing of data CD RW discs are also typically available in 650 MB and 700 MB capacities To newly write audio data of the HD8 HD 16 to disc a blank or completely erased CD RW is required As long as the disc has not been finalized it is possible to add audio data up to the maximum capacity of the disc Even when finalized some CD players may not be able to play CD RW discs Disc Write Add data Erase CD R Once only Yes No CD RW Many times after erasing Yes Yes NOTE When using commercially available pre formatted CD RW discs perform an erase operation first as described on page 144 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Creating an audio CD This section describes how to create an audio CD using a completed project as source material Creating an audio CD by project You can write the contents of the master track of the current project to a CD R RW disc When creating an audio CD by project you can select any desired V take of the master track as source 1 Insert a CD R RW disc into the integrated CD R RW drive To newly write audio data use a blank CD R RW disc or a CD RW disc that has been completely erased Even when audio data are present adding data is possible as long as the di
362. t is shown on the second line of the display 3 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section and turn the dial to change the numerals for the reverse end point Then press the ENTER key When the indication Reverse appears on the display press the ENTER key once more ZOOM HD8 HD16 The reverse action is carried out To return to the parameter selection screen press the EXIT key Changing the sample name You can assign a name to a sample as follows 1 Perform steps 1 8 of Making various sample settings and select the NAME parameter Then press the ENTER key The current sample name is shown on the second line of the display HINT If a sample with the same name exists in the same folder on the hard disk a 2 symbol appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring the cursor to the character to change and use the dial and the pads keys of the pad section to select a character For details on entering characters see page 37 Note that available characters are limited 3 Repeat step 2 until the name is as desired 4 When the name entry is completed press the ENTER key Checking the sample size The sample size can be displayed in kB kilobytes or mS milliseconds of playing time This display is for information only and no changes can be made 1 Perform steps 1 8 of Making various sample setting
363. t or the MIDI IN OUT connectors If you select the MIDI IN OUT connectors for control surface mode simultaneous use of the mass storage mode is also possible For information on how to send and receive MIDI messages via the USB port see page 157 NOTE While the HD8 HD16 is in mass storage mode or control surface mode the recorder functions cannot be used Supported operating systems Windows Windows XP and later Macintosh Mac OS X 10 2 and later ZOOM HD8 HD16 This section describes how to switch the HD8 HD16 to mass storage mode and how to transfer files to and from a computer 1 Connect the computer and the HD8 HD16 with a USB cable The USB connection can be established while power to the HD8 HD 16 and the computer is already on 2 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 3 USB so that the pad is lit A message to confirm switching to mass storage mode appears 3 Press the ENTER key The HD8 HD16 switches to mass storage mode and the display indication changes as follows Icon indicating the online condition When you switch the HD8 HD16 to mass storage mode the computer will automatically recognize the hard disk built into the HD8 HD16 as an external storage device When this has happened the second line of the display of the HD8 HD16 shows a symbol indicating the online condition To check whether the online condition is established from the computer proc
364. t possible The current operation is not possible while the recorder is operating Press the STOP Bl key to stop the recorder 176 Problems during recording Cannot record on a track Make sure that you have selected a recording track Check whether you have run out of free space on the hard disk p 152 Recording is not possible if the project is write protected Either turn protect off p 153 or use a different project While the 8 track recording function p 46 of the HD16 is active recording on tracks 9 10 15 16 and the master track is not possible To record on these tracks turn off 8 track recording The recorded sound is distorted Check whether the input sensitivity setting GAIN control and recording level setting LEVEL control are appropriate Lower the fader so that the 0 dB dot of the level meter does not light If the EQ gain of the track mixer is set extremely high the sound may be audibly distorted even if the fader is lowered Set the EQ to an appropriate value When the insert effect is applied to the input check whether the effect output level patch level setting is appropriate Problems with effects Insert effect cannot be inserted When the 8x COMP EQ algorithm is selected the selection of insert points is limited p 128 Insert effect does not work Make sure that pad 4 INSERT EFFECT is lit If it is out hold down the SHIFT key
365. t type that determines the general sound of effect and various parameters that let you adjust the sonic character Settings for the effect type and parameters together with a name are collectively called send return effect patches A newly created project contains 30 reverb patches and 30 chorus delay patches You can instantly switch reverb or chorus delay settings simply by choosing the effect for which you want to select a patch reverb or chorus delay and then selecting a patch The number of patches available for each effect is as follows Patch number Effect preprogrammed patches REVERB 30 22 CHORUS DELAY 30 18 Selecting a send return effect patch This section explains how to select a reverb or chorus delay patch 1 On the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 5 CHORUS DELAY or pad 6 REVERB so that the pad lights up The patch select screen for the send return effect appears For example if you have pressed pad 6 REVERB the following indication appears Patch number Patch name 2 Turn the dial to select the patch As you turn the dial new patches will be called up immediately 3 Repeatedly press the SELECT key to select DLY SEND chorus delay send level or REV 134 SEND reverb send level as track parameter to adjust 4 Turnthe respective parameter knob to adjust the parameter You can press the PLAY P gt key to play back the song
366. tatus key of the source track is lit in green and the status key of the destination track in red If the source track V take is also selected as destination the status key is lit in orange 4 Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows From this screen you can set the volume and panning for the source and the harmony parts The parameter for the edit source is Source The parameter for the chord root is called Chorus 1 the parameter for the third Chorus 2 and the parameter for the fifth Chorus 3 5 Verify that Source Level is shown on the second line of the display and turn the dial to set the volume for the edit source The setting range is 0 127 A setting of 100 results in an unchanged level HINT When the Source Level parameter is set to zero the edit source will be muted and only the generated harmony parts are written to the track 6 To set the pan value for the edit source use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication Source Pan on the second line of the display and then turn the dial to adjust panning for the source The setting range is L100 fully left R100 fully right NOTE When the destination is a mono track the pan setting will have no effect 7 Use the cursor left right keys and the dial to adjust the level and panning for the harmony parts Chorus 1 3 in the same way 58 By setting the Chorus
367. te recorded at that point is erased and the pad goes out HINT Tochangethe scale and key range during step input hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 9 KIT PROG to bring up the screen for setting these value Use the cursor left right keys for the scale type and the dial for the key range Press the EXIT key to return To switch to a drum sequence during step input press the RHYTHM key repeatedly until the key is lit in green NOTE When searching for a note to erase set the quantize value to the same value as the smallest value used during recording or to a smaller value Otherwise the start of a note may be missed 1 1 When you have finished step input press the STOP W key The REC key goes out and the rhythm pattern selection screen appears again By pressing the PLAY key you can check the rhythm pattern that you recorded 12 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Entering rhythm pattern chord information If required you can set specific chord information root chord type for a recorded rhythm pattern When you then use the bass phrase in a rhythm song it will be transformed based on the original chord information of that rhythm pattern HINT For patterns not used in a rhythm song or for which no bass sequence is input this procedure is not necessary 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN The rhythm pattern se
368. tedly press the respective pad or key to enter a numeral letter or symbol The pad key assignments are shown below 8 WXYZwxyz 5 REPEAT STEP MNOmno 7 TOMI i TOM2 2 TOM3 9 TuVtuy 004 4 RIDE fo T OPEN HAT 6 JKLjkl J PQRSpars 1 EH KICK SNARE CLOSED 3 ABCabc GHlghi Lu o GH 2 DEFdef 37 Reference Recorder When you press a pad or key the character is inserted and subsequent characters move one position to the right To clear the old name first press the EDIT key repeatedly until all characters are erased and then start the input procedure For example when all characters are cleared and you press pad 1 repeatedly the character under the cursor changes in the order A gt B gt C gt 1 gt A gt B LIT esh e T E H EDIT key Tobe ebb sees PIED pini Le H Press repeatedly i x Pad 1 Kick CD R RW m mt jJ KICK J a E H LEN J KICK To switch between upper and lower case press the SHIFT key The currently selected case is indicated by the A or a shown on the second line of the display You can change the case of a letter after you have already input it by pressing the SHIFT key immediately afterwards pu i Take Ha
369. the V take number This display lets you specify the move destination 6 Specify the move destination track V take in the same way as when selecting the move source and press the ENTER key The display shows the move destination start point 7 Specify the move destination start point in the same way as for the move source and press the ENTER key The indication Move appears on the second line of the display 8 To execute the move operation press the ENTER key When the move operation is completed the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Erasing a specified range of data You can erase the audio data of a specified range and return the range to the mute non recorded condition 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing and select the ERASE command Select the move source track V take and press the ENTER key The display for specifying the move start point appears For information on switching the display units see page 51 2 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section of the counter and turn the dial to specify the erase start point 3 Press the ENTER key ZOOM HD8 HD16 The second line of the display now lets you specify the erase range end point 4 Use the same procedure as
370. the input signal Tremolo Phaser Ring Modulator For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithms Slow Attack Fix Wah Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Position Before After Sets connection position of EFX module to Before before PREAMP or After after PREAMP Sense 10 1 1 10 Adjusts auto wah sensitivity Resonance 0 10 Adjusts resonance intensity Dry Mix 0 10 Adjusts original sound mix ratio Level 2 100 Adjusts signal level after passing module PREAMP module SVT Simulation of Ampeg SVT sound Bassman Simulation of Fender Bassman sound Hartke Simulation of Hartke HA3500 sound Super Bass Simulation of Marshall Super Bass sound SANSAMP Simulation of Sansamp Bass Driver DI sound Tube Preamp ZOOM original tube preamplifier sound Gain Tone Cabinet Balance SVT Tube Preamp have the same parameters Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Gain 0 100 Adjusts preamp gain distortion depth Tone 0 30 Adjusts tonal quality Cabinet 0 2 Adjusts intensity of speaker cabinet sound Balance 0 100 Adjusts mixing balance of signal before and after module Level 1 100 Adjusts signal level after passing module 3Band EQ module 3Band EQ For an explanation of types and parameters see CLEAN DISTORTION AC
371. the pad lights up The rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Press the PROJECT UTILITY key The rhythm utility menu screen appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SAMPLE FILE on the second line of the display then press ENTER key The display indication changes as follows From this screen you can select the folder where the sample file is stored Folder name 4 Turn the dial to select the folder which contains the desired sample file and press the ENTER key Sample files included in the selected folder are listed Sample name ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm HINT e For information on the folder structure of the HD8 HD16 see page 208 To assign a sample imported from an external source p 121 select the folder OUSER under the SAMPLER folder in the root directory of the hard disk 5 Turn the dial to select the sample whose parameters you want to change By pressing the PLAY We key at this point you can listen to the selected sample Press the EDIT key A parameter of the selected sample is shown HD POINT 7 Use the cursor left right keys to select the parameter to adjust START END POINT Specify the playback start and end point for the sample FADE Fade in out Specify a sample range and perform fade in or fade out REVERSE Specify a sample range and reve
372. the song and press the PLAY gt key The master track is played back To stop playback press the STOP Bl key 8 To return the HD8 HD16 to normal operation repeatedly press the MASTER status key until it is out Muting of other tracks is canceled and the status keys revert to the original condition HINT Like the other tracks the master track also has 10 V takes Youcan play the master tracks of multiple projects in succession 2 p 165 e The contents of the master track can be edited later 50 35 Reference Recorder This chapter explains the functions and operation steps of the recorder section About V takes Each audio track and the master track of the recorder contains ten virtual tracks called V takes For each track you can select one such take which will be used for recording and playback For example you can switch V takes as you record multiple vocal or guitar solos on the same track and later compare them and select the best V take The illustration shows the track configuration of the HD8 and HD16 V takes selected for tracks 1 8 and master track 1234567 8 Tracks pec Master track V takes selected for tracks 1 16 and master track WP 1234 56 7 8 9 1011 1213 1415 16 Tracks o Master track Switching V takes Here s how to select the V take used by the audio tracks or the master track 1
373. to bring up the indication Patch Name on the first line of the display The name of the selected patch can now be edited A cursor flashing square indicates the character that can be changed 5 Use the cursor left right keys to move the cursor to the character you want to change and turn the dial or use the pads keys of the pad section to select a character For details on entering characters see page 37 6 To confirm the new name do the store operation For details on store operation see page 132 The patch is stored overwritten with the new name and the insert effect patch select screen appears again NOTE Keep in mind that the name will revert to the previous name if you switch to another patch without storing the edited patch name Applying the insert effect only to the monitor signal Normally when the insert effect is applied to the input mixer the signal processed by the effect will be recorded on the track If necessary however you can apply the insert effect only to the monitor signal and record the unprocessed input signal on the track For example when recording the unprocessed sound of a vocal performance the vocalist will be more comfortable singing if an insert effect suitable for mic recording is applied to the monitor signal ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Effects Insert effect Recorder 1 Set the insert effect position to the input mixer 2 At the main screen
374. tore the system data press the ENTER key once more The factory initialize process starts When it is complete the unit returns to the condition of step 1 By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and return to the condition of step 1 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Returning the entire hard disk to the factory default All Initialize This action formats the hard disk and restores system files and various data necessary for operation of the HD8 HD16 existing projects including demo song data will be erased Caution Once erased user created projects cannot be restored Use this function with extreme care To preserve projects back them up to CD R RW disc first p 146 1 Refer to steps 1 3 of Basic maintenance procedure to bring up the indication INIT ALL on the display Then press the ENTER key The indication Init All Sure appears on the display to confirm the operation 2 To carry out the initialization process press the ENTER key once more The all initialize process starts When it is complete the unit returns to the condition of step 1 By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and return to the condition of step 1 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Other Functions Hard disk maintenance using the supplied CD ROM Using the CD ROM supplied with the HD8 HD16 the following functions can be pe
375. tring numbers Tune the other strings in the same way 6 To quit the tuning function press the EXIT key The main screen returns again DADGAD String number note name 168 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Changing the function of the foot switch With the default settings of a project a foot switch connected to the CONTROL IN jack can be used to control play stop of the recorder To use the foot switch to control manual punch in out recording p 41 use the following procedure to change the internal setting 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The indication REC UTILITY appears on the first line of the display and PROJECT is shown on the second line 2 Usethe cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SYSTEM on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 3 Make sure the indication FOOT SWITCH is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The function currently assigned to the foot switch will be displayed 4 Turn the dial to select Play Stop or Punch 1 0 The available settings are as follows Play Stop Each push of the foot switch toggles between play and stop of the recorder section Punch I O The foot switch can be used to perform manual punch in out Pressing the foot switch has the same effect as pr
376. ty rhythm pattern number If necessary set the bar length time signature and quantize value gt p 92 2 Press the RHYTHM status key repeatedly until the key is lit in green 3 Hold down the SHIFT key in the pad section and press pad 9 KIT PROG so that the pad lights up When the pad is lit the pad bank selection screen is shown 4 necessary turn the dial and select the pad bank to play For details on pad banks see page 90 When the setting is completed press the EXIT key to return to the rhythm pattern selection screen 5 Hold down the REC 09 key and press the PLAY gt key A four beat pre count one measure is heard and rhythm pattern recording starts During recording a click sound metronome indicating the current tempo beat setting is heard The current position in the rhythm pattern is shown on the display in measures beats ticks HINT The beat and the volume of the pre count clicks can be changed 5 p 124 93 Reference Rhythm Hit the pads while listening to the metronome Your performance on the pads will be recorded as a drum sequence according to the quantization setting The intensity with which you hit the pads will also be recorded When you reach the end of the pattern the unit automatically returns to the first measure and real time input continues T REC PLAY SNARE Ea Ea TERRE Pre count V R
377. u have verified that the sound is as desired press the EXIT key The unit returns to the main screen 5 2 Mixdown on the master track After mastering effect settings have been completed record the final mix on the master track 1 Press the ZERO lt lt key to return to the beginning of the song 2 Press the PLAY gt key to play the song and check the level after the MASTER fader The signal level after the MASTER fader can be checked by observing the MASTER level meter If the 0 dB segment lights up during play turn down the MASTER fader to perform fine adjustment After checking the level press the STOP key 3 Repeatedly press the MASTER status key so that the key lights up in red The master track can now be recorded 4 Move again to the recorder start position Then hold down the REC 0 key and press the PLAY gt key Recording on the master track starts The playback level of each track and the master track recording level are shown on the level meters 5 When recording is completed press the STOP key 6 To play the master track repeatedly press the MASTER status key until it is lit in green While the MASTER status key is lit in green the master track ZOOM HD8 HD16 Quick Tour can be played All other status keys go out and the signals from other tracks are muted The insert and send return effects are also disabled 7 Return to the beginning of
378. uency Fix Wah 1 50 Adjusts wah center frequency Can also be controlled by pedal ZOOM HD8 HD16 179 Appendix Balance 0 100 Adjusts balance between original sound and effect sound Time 1 50 Adjusts rise time for sound Curve 0 10 Adjusts volume rise curve Dry Mix 0 10 Adjusts original sound mix ratio RTM Mode Table 2 Adjusts change range and direction RTM Wave Table 3 Selects control waveform RTM Sync Table 4 Adjusts control frequency Table 1 Parameters marked with 2 allow selection of setting value in note units using the song pattern tempo as reference The note duration according to the setting value is shown below Thirty second note Dotted sixteenth note Dotted eighth note Quarter note x 2 Sixteenth note Eighth note Quarter note Quarter triplet note Half triplet note Dotted quarter note Quarter note x 20 NOTE The actually available note range depends on the parameter Depending on the combination of tempo setting and selected note symbol the maximum of the parameter setting range may be exceeded In such a case the value is automatically halved or set to 1 4 if the range is still exceeded Table 2 Setting value Description Off Frequency does not change Pedal Frequency changes according to expression pedal movement Up Frequency changes from minimum to maximum according to
379. ult condition of a project the insert effect is applied to the input mixer However you may change the insert location as necessary The following possibilities are available Display Insert position Input Input mixer Drum Drum track output Bass Bass track output Track1 Track2 Any output of a mono track Any output of a stereo track or mono track x 2 Immediately before MASTER fader Track1 2 Track3 4 Master lt lt GEID only gt gt In addition to the above possibility the HD16 offers the following choices Display Insert position Input1 Input8 Any input of input mixer Inputi 8 All inputs of input mixer Track1 8 All outputs of tracks 1 8 Track9 16 All outputs of tracks 9 16 NOTE lt lt GEID only gt gt Individual selection of Input 1 Input 8 is possible only when the 8 track recording function is enabled and an algorithm other than 8x COMP EQ is selected Track 1 8 and Track 9 16 are only available when the 8x COMP EQ algorithm is selected Simultaneous selection of Input 1 8 is possible only when the 8 track recording function is enabled and the 8x COMP EQ algorithm is selected If you switch to the 8x COMP EQ algorithm after selecting the insert position the position will change to Input 1 8 Track 1 8 128 or Track 9 16 depending on the immediately preceding setting Insertion to input
380. und To prevent the risk of accidents never use one of the following for grounding Water pipe risk of electric shock Gas pipe risk of explosion Telephone wiring ground or lightning arrestor risk of lightning stroke Environment Avoid using your HD8 HD 16 in environments where it Caution will be exposed to Extreme temperature High humidity moisture or splashing water Excessive dust or sand Excessive vibration or shock Handling Never place objects filled with liquids such as vases Warning the HD8 HD16 since this can cause electric shock The HD8 HD 16 is a precision instrument Do not exert Caution undue pressure on the keys and other controls Also take care not to drop the unit and do not subject it to shock or excessive pressure Alterations Never open the case of the HD8 HD 16 or attempt to Caution modify the product in any way since this can result in damage to the unit Connecting cables and input and output jacks You should always turn off the power to the HD8 Caution HD16 and all other equipment before connecting or disconnecting any cables Also make sure to disconnect all cables and the AC adapter before moving the HD8 HD16 Volume Do not use the HD8 HDI06 at a loud volume for a long Caution time since this can cause hearing impairment CD R RW Drive Never look directly in the laser beam projected from Caution the optical pickup of the CD R RW
381. und of Marshall stack amp JCM2000 Rect Vnt High gain sound of Mesa Boogie Dual Rectifier red channel vintage mode HK Drive High gain sound of Hughes amp Kettner flagship model Triamp MKII DZ Drive High gain sound of the hand made German guitar amp Diezel Herbert with three separately controllable channels ENGL Drive Drive sound of ENGL Ritchie Blackmore Signature 100 PV Drive High gain sound of Peavey 5150 developed in cooperation with a world famous hard rock guitarist TS FD CMB Combination of Fender combo amp and Ibanez TS 9 sound SD MS STK Combination of Marshall stack amp and Boss SD 1 sound FZ MS STK Combination of Fuzz Face and Marshall stack amp sound 180 Gain Tone Cabinet FD Clean FZ MS STK have the same parameters ZOOM HD8 HD16 Acoustic Sim Top Body Appendix This effect makes an electric guitar sound like an acoustic guitar Aco_Ere Pre Color Tone This is a dedicated preamp for electroacoustic guitar Bass Sim Tone Level This effect makes an electric guitar sound like a bass guitar Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Gain 0 100 Adjusts preamp gain distortion intensity Tone 0 30 Adjusts tonal quality Cabinet 0 2 Adjusts speaker cabinet sound intensity Level 1 100 Adjusts signal level after passing modul
382. urrently loaded project COPY Duplicate a specified project on the hard disk ERASE Erase a specified project from the hard disk NAME Edit the name of the currently loaded project ZOOM HD8 HD16 PROTECT Switch the protection status of the currently loaded project on or off SEQUENCE PLAY Continuously play the master tracks from several projects saved on the hard disk 4 Press the ENTER key to execute the operation or change the setting that you selected For details on the procedure refer to the sections that follow HINT For information on the sequence play feature see the section Other Functions on page 165 5 Toreturnto the main screen press the EXIT key several times Depending on which selection was made in step 2 the main screen may return automatically Loading a project You can select a project that was saved on the hard disk and load it 1 Refer to steps 1 3 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication SELECT on the second line of the display Then press the ENTER key The name and number of the project to be loaded are shown on the display Project number Project name 2 Turn the dial to select the desired project 3 Press the ENTER key to load the project When loading is completed the unit returns to the main screen By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time HIN
383. ut with higher number R 1 OUTPUT L Fon MASTER fader 27 112 only 8 track recording enabled ON OFF INPUT 1 PAN LE ON OFF INPUT 2 ae OUTPUT L I R MASTER fader NOTE The diagrams above show the signal flow when the insert effect has not been inserted into the input mixer When the insert effect is inserted the signal flow will change depending on the number of input and output channels of the effect p 128 lt lt GEID only gt gt In 8 track recording mode p 46 the signals from inputs 1 8 are sent to tracks 1 8 HINT When no recording track is selected the input signals are sent directly to the MASTER fader The pan controls of the input mixer can be used to adjust the panning value of the signal sent to the MASTER fader When a recording track is selected the pan setting of the input mixer has no effect on the signal By using the bounce function you can apply the send return effect to the input signal for recording 44 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Mixer Adjusting the signal for each track track parameters The input mixer and track mixer let you adjust various aspects for each track called track parameters such as panning and send return effect intensity This can be done for each track individually This section describes how to adjust t
384. vent that you want to input If the event you select here has been input at the current location its value will be displayed If there is no corresponding event the display will indicate Xxx where xxx is the event name This indicates that the previously input event information still applies eTemra Turn the dial to input the event value Event type Symbol Description Setting range E Rhythm pattern _ Pattern number 0 510 HINT Time Signature ae 1 8 1 4 8 4 By pressing the PLAY gt button during rhythm song step input you can listen to the rhythm pattern with the updated Root Chord root C B settings To stop play press the STOP Ill key Maj m 7 m7 M7 Chord type aug dim 7sus4 sus4 m Chord us m6 6 m9 M9 7 Input the remaining events in the same way m To input more information for the same type of event you can empo SNO i Tempo 40 0 250 0 move the current position in measures or beats while the event Drum Volume Prum Sequence 0 15 input screen is displayed If you make a mistake or want to change the information the B Vol Bass sequence g _ 45 8599 volume events can be edited in the following ways Measure 1 2 3 4 5 Pattern fmm 7 PATTERN 27 p Beat 44 s ee we 27 D maj emi Fi AT Tempo BPM 135 S 4 P p Drum track ic Pad m e ou un
385. volume will be loud regardless of how strongly you tap the pad Lite Maximum sensitivity Even light taps will produce a loud volume Normal Normal sensitivity default setting Hard Low sensitivity Strong tapping is needed to produce a loud volume EX Hard Lowest sensitivity Very strong tapping is needed to produce a loud volume ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm Checking the remaining amount of memory The remaining amount of recording memory for rhythm patterns and rhythm songs will be displayed as a percentage 96 Perform steps 1 3 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication MEMORY and press the ENTER key This screen is for display only There is no setting that can be changed Swapping the left right pan position The pan setting for the drum sound can be set to apply as seen from the drummer or from the listener Perform steps 1 3 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication POSITION and press the ENTER key Then select one of the following settings Player Left right pan setting applies as seen from the player drummer Listener Left right pan setting applies as seen from the listener audience 125 Reference Effects This section explains the functions and operation of the effect section built into the HD8 HD 16 About the effects The HD8 HD 16 has two types of effects an insert
386. w 1 To perform scrub playback hold down the STOP W key from the main screen and press the PLAY gt key The keys light up and a short section 40 milliseconds by default following the current location will play back repeatedly Immediately after activating the scrub function audio track 1 will be selected as target for scrub playback Current location SS IM mE Track Scrub playback heissen CP EE TE When the scrub function is on the display indication changes as follows 2 Use the status keys to select the track s for scrub playback Up to four tracks can be selected simultaneously for scrub playback Stereo track pairs are counted as two tracks Scrub playback is toggled on and off for a track by repeatedly pressing the respective status key If you attempt to select more than four tracks scrub playback will be carried out for the last four tracks only 3 To move the scrub playback position use the cursor left right keys to cause the millisecond indication or the tick indication on the counter to flash Then turn the dial to find the desired location During scrub playback the current location can be moved forward or backward in milliseconds or ticks 4 To use the preview function for hearing the section before the current location press the REW 44 key To hear the section after the current location press the FF gt gt key If you press the REW lt 44 key a section of
387. w shows the screen for selecting phrases in that project Phrase name Phrase number HINT If the selected project does not contain any phrases the indication No Data appears on the display for several seconds and then the previous screen returns 3 Turn the dial to select the phrase and press the ENTER key 69 Reference Phrase Looping The indication Import appears on the display 4 To carry out the import process press the ENTER key once more The phrase is imported When the import process is completed the phrase menu appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Importing a WAV AIFF file You can an import an audio file WAV AIFF from a CD ROM or CD R RW disc inserted in the CD R RW drive or from the internal hard disk Before doing this the following preparations are necessary E When importing from the CD R RW drive Insert a CD ROM or CD R RW disc containing audio files into the CD R RW drive E When importing from the internal hard disk Copy audio files from a computer into a folder named WAV AIFF immediately under the root directory top level folder of the internal hard disk The files must have the extension for WAV files or AIF for AIFF files NOTE Any subfolders in the WAV AIFF folder are not recognized by the HD8 HD16 The following procedure will no
388. wice The indication DELETE TRACK appears on the first line of the display and the name of the project to be deleted is shown on the second line When you press the ENTER key in this condition the indication Delete appears on the second line of the display To delete the project press the ENTER key To delete all projects from a playlist On the playlist registration screen press the FUNCTION key three times The indication DELETE TRACK appears on the first line of the display and AII is shown on the second line When you press the ENTER key in this condition the indication Delete appears on the second line of the display To delete all projects from the playlist press the ENTER key To switch the V take for the master track Press the EXIT key repeatedly to return to the main screen Load the project for which you want to switch the V take and select the V take for the master track Then return to the playlist registration screen 9 When you have registered all desired projects in the playlist press the EXIT key several times to return to the main screen HINT The playlist contents are stored automatically 166 NOTE If the master track data for projects included in a playlist have been deleted from the hard disk the playlist returns to the blank state Playlist playback Select the playlist for continuous project playback as follows 1 From the main screen press the
389. with 176 Problems with the rhythm section 177 Problems with 177 Problems with CD R RW drive 178 Other 178 Appendix 179 Effect 179 Insert 179 Send return 190 Effect Patch 191 Insert 191 Send return Effect 197 Rhythm 198 Drum Kits Bass Programs 200 Instruments ri Re Re 201 MIDI note number 205 Phrases ull uu ME 206 HD8 HD16 Hard Disk Contents 208 MIDI implementation chart 209 INDEX 2 mI eu 210 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Introduction Thank you for selecting the ZOOM HD8 HD16 Hard Disk Recorder simply called the HD8 HD16 in this manual This manual covers both the HD8 and the HD16 model In order to take full advantage of the HD8 HD16 s versatile functions and to ensure trouble free enjoyment please read this manual carefully Keep this manual in a safe place together with the warranty card Features of the HD8 HD16 The HD8 HD 16 is a fascinating product with the
390. x Song Sel x x Common Tune x x System Clock 1 Commands Aux Local ON OFF x x All Notes OFF o Mes Active Sense x x sages Reset x x Notes MTC quarter frame message is transmitted Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO x No ZOOM HD8 HD16 209 HardDisk Recorder Control Surface Mode Date 17 2007 Model HD8 HD16 MIDI Implementation Chart Version 1 00 3 4 4 Transmitted Recognized Remarks Function me eta BAY ERI EC TEL DURER eS ett Beet Basic Default 10 10 Memorized Channel Changed 1 16 1 16 RNC Em Default x Mode Messages x Altered kkk er et dee ex Be r pis Lf oca Note 35 70 x Number True voice NS Tee EN fe X rode m ve Wo AUN Velocity Note ON Note OFF 3 3 3 After Key s Touch Ch s 3 Pitch Bend x X 3 3 6 6 Data
391. x is recorded on the master track to create the finished song ZOOM HD8 HD16 Step 1 Preparations 1 1 Creating a new project On the HD8 HD106 song data are managed in units called projects To start recording with the HD8 HD16 you must first create a project 1 Connect the instrument to record and the monitoring system to the HD8 HD16 16 17 2 Turn power on in the order HD8 HD16 monitoring system When the HD8 HD 16 starts up the last handled project is automatically loaded 3 Press the NEW PROJECT key in the control section When you press the NEW PROJECT key at the main screen the display indication changes as follows and a new project can be created uS Tet F 25 Name of new project Number of new project You can assign a name to the project For details on entering characters see page 37 HINT When creating a new project the lowest free project number is automatically selected It is also possible to create a new project from the project menu gt p 151 4 Press the ENTER key A new project is created and the main screen appears While this screen is displayed you can perform various recorder actions such as recording and playback 23 Quick Tour HINT When selecting a different project or creating a new project the project you were working on up to that point is automatically saved When performing the shutdown procedure
392. y One of the following messages is shown when attempting to execute a command There is not enough free space on the CD R RW disc The disc in the CD R RW drive is not an audio disc The specified data do not exist No disc is inserted in the CD R RW drive The CD R RW disc is not empty The disc inserted in the CD R RW drive is not a CD R RW disc There is not enough free space on the internal hard disk ZOOM HD8 HD16 Appendix Insert effect CLEAN DISTORTION ACO BASS SIM algorithm COMP LIMITER module Sense Attack Tone MXR Dynacomp type compressor Threshold Ratio Attack Compressor with more detailed adjustment Threshold Ratio Release Compressor Rack Comp Limiter Limiter for suppressing signal peaks above a certain level Parameter description Parameter name Setting range Description Sense 0 10 Adjusts compressor sensitivity Compressor Fast Slow Selects compressor response speed Attack Rack Comp 1 10 Adjusts compressor response speed Tone 0 10 Adjusts tonal quality Level 2 100 Adjusts signal level after passing module Threshold 0 50 Adjusts threshold for compressor limiter action Ratio 1 10 Adjusts compressor limiter compression ratio Release 1 10 ajusts delay n compressor limiter release from point where signal level falls below EFX module Position Sense Resonance Leve
393. y selected project Take care not to accidentally overwrite rhythm pattern or rhythm song data that you want to keep 1 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 7 PATTERN or pad 8 SONG so that the pad lights up The rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Press the PROJECT UTILITY key The rhythm utility menu screen appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication IMPORT on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 4 Use the cursor left right keys to select ALL import all rhythm patterns rhythm songs or PATTERN import a specific rhythm pattern and press the ENTER key In this condition you can select the source project from which to import An example for a display that appears when you select ALL ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Rhythm is shown below ImrFort All Ho FE TGG1 T T Project number Project name 5 Turn the dial to select the source project and press the ENTER key The subsequent steps differ depending on which selection was made in step 4 When ALL was selected Verify that the indication Import is shown on the second line of the display Proceed to step 6 When PATTERN was selected The source rhythm pattern is shown on the display Turn the dial to select the desired rhythm pattern and press the
394. y sound with effective use of short delay 13 WarmCho Combination of warm tone with deep chorus 14 Unison Unison sound with added bass 12 shift good for low range phrasing 15 Crunch Light crunch for rock and pop backing 16 CleanArp Wide ensemble sound that works well with arpeggios and obligato 17 CompLead Streamlined lead sound with effective compressor action 18 FastRate Fast phaser turns full chords into a unique lead sound 19 ClubJazz Simulates the ambience in a jazz club or a similar live venue 20 SlowVibe Slow attack sound for imaginative chord work 21 Ethnic ARRM effect effectively emphasizes open string phrasing 22 Insect SFX sound of a small insect buzzing 23 29 Empty DISTORTION algorithm No Patch name Description 0 5 1 5 0 5150 simulation great for hard riffs 1 MS 1959 British rock sound with airy distortion that comes alive at high volumes 2 AnyOD Overdrive suitable for both lead and backing 3 RectiDRV Sound modeled on the Boogie Rectifier 4 MultiLD Versatile lead tone for many applications 5 Detune Solid sound with detune effect 6 UK Blues Bluesbreaker with added delay gives fat and smooth sound 7 Fusion Fusion type sound with a surging deep chorus 8 AutoWah Versatile auto wah for lead or backing 9 JB Style Octaver sound made famous by Jeff Beck 10 Hvy Riff Choose this for heavy riffs 11 BlueLine Bluesy sound with a dry character 12 Melody Sustain sound for melodious solos 13 TalkTime Talk sound featuring a c
395. y useful for recording 7 AG MIC Preamp tone is great for recording acoustic guitar 8 AG Dub Doubling sound that gives a stroke more of a pick feeling 9 12st Cho Chorus sound for 12 string guitar 10 AG Jumbo Increases the apparent body size of an acoustic guitar 11 AG Small Reduces the apparent body size of an acoustic guitar 12 StereoAG Stereo sound for acoustic guitar 13 Live AMB Bright reverb sound for acoustic guitar increases the live feeling 14 Tunnel Simulation of tunnel reverb 15 Filter Filter effect lets you change the sound character during a song 16 BrethCmp Fairly strong compressor sound emphasizes breathiness 17 Vib MOD Crafty vocal sound combining phaser and vibrato 18 Duet Cho Detune sound creates an instant duet 19 Ensemble Fresh ensemble sound great for chorus 20 VocalDub Conventional doubling sound 21 Sweep Voice sound with slow phase sweep 22 VoiceFlg Flanging chorus sound with strong modulation 23 Wide PH Phase sound spread to right and left 24 VibVoice Clearcut vibrato sound 25 FutureVo A message from the aliens 26 MtoF Transforms male vocals into a female sound 27 FtoM Transforms female vocals into a male sound 28 WaReWaRe SFX sound speaks to you from the cosmos 29 Hangul SFX sound that turns Japanese into Korean 30 49 Empty ZOOM HD8 HD16 193 Appendix DUAL MIC algorithm
396. you must first specify the In point the point where the recorder switches from playback to record and Out point the point where the recorder switches from record to playback and then perform the recording operation In point Out point Track Playback Playback 1 e Raise the fader of the track on which to perform punch in out to a suitable position 2 Use the ON OFF key to select the input and then play your instrument connected to the input jack and use the GAIN control and REC LEVEL control to adjust the recording level 3 Locate the point for punch in and press the AUTO PUNCH IN OUT key The key flashes This sets the In point at which recording will begin 4 Locate the point for punch out and press the AUTO PUNCH IN OUT key once more The key changes from flashing to solidly lit This sets the Out point at which recording will end HINT To specify the in out points precisely it is convenient to use the scrub function 2 p 40 to find the locations and assign a mark 47 beforehand at the desired locations 5 Use the Locate function to go to a spot 41 Reference Recorder before the In point 6 Repeatedly press the status key for the track on which to perform punch in out until the key flashes red NOTE If the current location is between the In point and Out point the status key and the REC 0 key if during recording will be lit red In this c
397. ystem to pause mode STOP key Playback stops and the system returns to the beginning of the current track FF gt gt key Playback stops and the system jumps to the beginning of the next track REW 44 key Playback stops and the system jumps to the beginning of the previous track 8 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Finalizing a CD R RW Disc Finalizing a CD R RW disc to which audio data were written refers to the procedure of turning it into a finished audio CD When a CD R disc has been finalized it will be playable on an ordinary CD player A CD RW may not be playable on an ordinary CD player even after it has been finalized After a disc has been finalized no more tracks can be added to it 1 Insert the disc to finalize into the integrated CD R RW drive 2 From the main screen hold down the SHIFT key and press pad 1 CD R RW The menu for various CD R RW functions appears 3 Verify that AUDIO CD is shown on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 144 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication FINALIZE on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The first line of the display indicates the total number of tracks on the CD R RW disc The second line indicates the total playing time of all tracks on the disc including pauses
398. ythm recording function proceed as follows Selecting drum bass track as recording source While using the bounce function select the drum bass track as recording source signal 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The indication REC UTILITY appears on the first line and the indication PROJECT on the second line of the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication BOUNCE on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key 45 Reference Recorder 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication REC SOURCE on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows In this condition you can select the recording source signal The following choices are available Master Signal immediately before MASTER fader default setting Drum Track Drum track output Bass Track Bass track output 4 Turn the dial to select Drum Track or Bass Track as recording source 5 Press the EXIT key several times to return to the main screen Recording While playing the audio tracks you can now record the rhythm section play on any audio track 1 Press the BOUNCE key The key lights up 2 Repeatedly press the status key for the track on which to record until the key is lit in red In this condition the signal of the track selected in step 4 of Selecting drum bas
399. ythm song this tempo change will become active If you want to use the SMF tempo throughout you should first select an empty rhythm song f the beat information of the SMF and the rhythm section is different the audio track position and SMF position may be different when locating in measures beats ticks 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT UTILITY key The indication REC UTILITY appears on the first line and the indication PROJECT on the second line of the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SMF on the second line of the display and press the ENTER key The SMF menu appears on the display 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication OUTPUT on the display and press the ENTER key In this condition you can decide whether to enable SMF playback 159 Reference MIDI 4 Verify that the setting is On and press the EXIT key In the default condition of a project the setting is On If it was set to Off turn the dial to select On 5 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication FILE SELECT on the display dil Press the ENTER key In this condition you can select an SMF imported into the project for playback File name HINT If required you can delete the selected SMF from the project To do this select the SMF to delete and then use the FUNCTION key in the functi
400. zero Setting the value to 100 results in unity gain dB for the signal at the STEREO SUB OUT jack 8 Press the cursor down key to bring up the indication SUB SND PAN on the second line of the display and turn the dial to adjust the panning value for the signal sent to the STEREO SUB OUT jack The panning value setting range is L100 fully left R100 fully right By pressing the cursor up key you can return to the condition of step 5 ZOOM HD8 HD16 Reference Mixer 9 Repeat steps 4 6 to adjust the output level and panning for all track input signals sent to the STEREO SUB OUT jack Also while the SUB OUT SEND LEVEL or SUB OUT SEND PAN parameter is shown you can use the ENTER key to set the signal for that track input to Off and prevent it from being sent to the STEREO SUB OUT jack This lets you temporarily remove a track input signal from the sub mix Pressing the ENTER key once more restores the previous condition 10 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key Using the solo function If desired you can mute all other tracks except one during playback of the recorder section This is called the solo function It is convenient to fine tune the parameters for a certain track 1 From the main screen perform playback of the recorder section and press the SOLO key The key lights up NOTE Also when the SOLO key is lit the input signals are always mixed

ZOOM HD8IHD16 Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents